Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 211

DAilAA

DAOSEDUA

NON DESTAUCTIVE TIS-IING (ND-f}


fll- Alll,DA DII{A CIIDA
DESCRIPTION

DOCUMENT NO.
Rev.2

ABC-WP-01

written Practice For NDf Pe6onnel Quolification dnd certiticotion


As Per ASNT-T6-7A 2077 Edition

Rev. 0

ABC-WP-02

Qualificotion ond certificotion of Personnel Performing lnspection


of APt RP 7G-24SO 10407

Magnetic Particle Exdmination Procedure Fot

ABC-MT-0201
ABC-MT-0202
ABC-MT-0203
ABC-MT-0204

Yoke

Rev. 1

Yoke

Rev. 1

ABC-MT-0205 Rev.0

lnspection :

Non Fluorescent Dry Powder Technique


- Wet Fluorescent Particle Technique
Coil - Continuous Fluorescent Particle Technique
Coil - Residual Fluorescent Partlcle Technjque

Rev. 1
Rev. 1

OCTG

Electro Magnetic lnspection Procedure

Mqgnetic Particle Exqmination Procedure lor Steel Structure, Dtill Stem Elements,
Hoisting Equipment, Pressure Vessel & Ports Contdining Pressure :

ABC-MT-0206

Rev

ABC-MT-0207

Rev 0

1,

Yoke

Wet Particle Non Fluorescent Technique

Electro Magnetic lnspection Procedure


Liquid Penetront Examinotion Procedure Jor Steel Structure, Drill Stem Elements, Hoisting
Equipment, Pressurc Vessel & Ports Contqining Pressure :

ABC-PT-0301

Solvent Removable Technique

Rev

Visible

ABC-PT-0302

Rev. 1

Liquid Penetront Exomindtion Procedure For OC|G lnspection :


Visible - Water Washable Technique

ABC-LT-0401

Rev. 1

Operqting Procedure For Lilting tnspection & Testing oI Pod Eyes

ABC-LT-0402

Rev.0

Operuting Procedure For Lifting lnspection & Testing of Slings

ABC-UT-0501

Rev.0

lJ lttosonic

Thickness Measuring Procedure

Approved

PREPARED

B)

REWETcilD BY

4PPROVED BY

/',tL
/lz

MANAGER

OPERATIONS MANAGER

ASNT-NDT-LEVEL III

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE

0l

WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALIFICATION AND CERNFICATION

08

PAGE

2012

I of49

DOC. NO.
ARC.WP-OI

REV
2

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND


CERTIFICATION AS PER ASNT SNT-TC-IA 2011 Edition

DOCUMENT NO. : ABC

- WP - 0l

REVIEWED BY

PREPARED BY
NAMF

NAMF,

ANDI SETYO BUDIANTO

POSITION

QA MANAGER

:01 08

/f

t"*"ru*;4,1;
2012

DATE

:01

BONNIE F. AMRIL

POSITION

OPERATTONS MANAGER

,/

D^rE

NAME

ARIANI WIDIAWATI

POSnON

APPROYED BY

08

-2012

ASNT _ NDT _ LEVEL

III

A.

DATE

:01-08-2012

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE

01 08

2012

WRITI'EN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALIFICATION AND CERTTFICATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION

CONTENT

PAGE

SCOPE

DEFINITIONS

LEVEL OF QUALIF]CATION

EDUCATION. TRAINING AND EXPERIENCE REQUIREMENTS

FOR INITIAL QUALIFICATION


5

TRAINING PROGRAM

OUTSIDE AGENCY (SUB CONTRACTOR)

ADMINISTRATION AND CRADINC EXAMINATION ......

EXAMINATION

CERTIFICATION

l3

l0

TECHNICAL

1l

RECERTIFICATION

l4

12

TERMINATION AND REINSTATEM ENT

t5

PER FORMANCE

EVALUATION

ATTACHMRNT
EXHIBIT A

: Vision Examination Record

EXHIBIT B

: Certificate of Qualification

EXHIBIT C

: Training Course Outline

14

Ivll
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA
WRI'I'TEN PRACTICE FOR NDI] PERSONNEL
QUALIFICATION AND CBRTIFICATION

r.

S -T 1fl, lR

DATE

0l -

08

2012

DOC. NO.
ABC.WP.O I

PAGE
3 of 49

REV
2

SCOPE

1.1

This procedure is established for the control and administration of NDE personnel
training, examination and certification under the employment of Akura Bina Citra
(hereon referred to as Akura).

1.2

The ASNT Recommended Practice No.: SNT-TC-IA 201I Edition shall be used as a
guideline for the establishment ofthis procedure.

.3

The ASNT Standard Topical Outlines for Qualification of Nondestructive Testing


Personnel Document No.: ANSI/ASNT CP-105, 2011 Edition shall be used as a
guideline in constructing the Training Course Topical Outline ofeach method and level

of certification.

procedure describes the responsibility of each Level ol Ce(ification lor


determining the acceptability of material or components in accordance with the
Applicable Codes, Standards, Specifications and Procedures.

1.4 This

1.5
I

.6

This procedure describes the training, experience and examination requirement for each
level ofcertification.
This procedure is applicable only for the following methods:
a. Magnetic Particle Examination (MT)
b. Liquid Penetrant Examination (PT)
Ultrasonic Examination (UT)
d. Radiography Examination (RT)

c.

2.

DEFINITIONS

2.1

Certification: Written testimony of qualification.

2.2

Qualification: demonstrated skill, demonstrated knowledge, documented training and


documented experience required for personnel to properly perform the duties of a
specific job.

2.3

Certification Authority: Akura's Ooerations Director or Operations Manager.

2.4

Certilying Agency: Akura Bina Citra.

2.5

Closed Book Examination: Examination administered without access to reference


material except for materials supplied with or in the examination.

NflAST'IidllR.
PT. AI(URA BINA CITRA

DATE

0l -08-2012

WRITTEN PRACTICE IOR NDE PERSONNEI,


QUALIFICATION AND CER TIFICATION

2.6

Comparable: Being at an equivalent or similar level of NDE responsibility and


difficulty as stated in this document.

2.7

Documented: The condition of being in written form.

2.8

Experience: Work activities accomplished in a specific NDE method under the


direction ofqualified supervision including the performance ofthe NDE method and
related activities but not including time spent in organized training programs.

2.9

Limited Certification: Nondestructive test method subdivided into limited disciplines


or techniques to meet Akura's specific needs; these are Level lI certifications, but to
a limited scope.

2.10 Outside Agency: A company or individual who provides NDE Level III services and
whose qualifications to provide these services have been reviewed by Akura's
Operations Manager.

2.11 Training: An organized program developed to impart the knowledge and skills
necessary for qualifi cation.

LEVELS OF QUALIFICATION

3.1

There are three levels of qualification. While in the process of being initially trained,
qualified, and certified to a certain level ofqualification, the individual is considered as
a trainee. Trainees shall not be allowed to independently conduct, interpret, evaluate

and/or report the result of any test. At all times, a tminee shall work under the
supervision ofcertified Level II or Level III individual.

3.2

The three basic levels ofqualification are as follows:

3.2.1 NDE Level I

Qualilication

An individual who has met the requirements of Par. 4

:ffi[JT,'lH:g, 6T,]?:fJ fl:J"::.';Jf


Level

and

;l*J;

III endorsement.

Responsibilities An NDE l,evel I individual shall be qualified to ptoperly


periorm specific calibrations, specific NDE Method, and
specific evaluation for acceptance or rejection determination
according to written instructions and to record results. The
NDE Level I shall receive the necessary instructions and
supervision from a certified NDE Level II or III individual.
lt is the intension of this paragraph that an NDE Level I

nsiAsTiflR
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE
01

PACE
5

-08-2012

of49

WRI'I"IEN PRACI]CE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALIFICATION AN D CERl'IFICATION

individual may be the sole person to perform and evaluate


the NDE for final acceptance in accordance with written
procedures/working instructions and acceptance standards
with occasional surveillance and guidance from a Level
ILIII individual. An NDE Level I individual is authorized to
organize report and sign the result ofNDE.

3.2.2

NDE. Level II

Qualification

A-n individual who has met the requirements of Par. 4 and


passed the required examination of Par. 8 and shall be

certified by Akura's Operations Manager upon its NDE


Level

Responsibilities

Ill

endorsement.

An NDE Level II individual shall be qualified to set up and


calibrate equipment ard to interpret and evaluate results
with respect to applicable codes, standards and
specifications. The NDE Level II shall be thoroughly
familiar with the scope and limitations of the methods for
which he/she is qualified and shall exercise assigned
responsibility for on the job training and guidance of
trainees and NDE Level I personnel. The NDE Level II shalt
be able to organize report and is authorized to sign the
results of NDF,.

3.2.3 NDE

Level

lll

Qualification

An NDE Level III individual shall have sufficient practical


background in applicable materials, fabrication and product
establish techniques and
assist in
establishing acceptance criteria when none are otherwise

technology

to

to

available.

An NDE Level III individual shall also have general


familiarity with other appropriate NDE methods, as
demonstrated by the ASNT Level
other means.

Lastly, an NDE Level

III Basic Examination or

III

individual shall meet the


requirements of Par. 4 and Par. 8 and shall be certified by
Akura's Director or Operations Manager.
Responsibilities

An NDE Level III individual shall be

responsible in
establishing techniques and procedures; interpreting codes,
standards, specifications, and procedures; and designating
the particular NDE methodq techniques, and procedures to
be used-

AflASlIIER
DATE

PT. AI(URA BINA CITRA

01

PAGE

-08*20t2

6of49

WRI'I'TEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QT]AI,IFICA TION AND CERTIFICATION

An NDE Level III individual shall also be responsible for


the NDE operations for which he/she is qualified and
assigned, and shall be capable of interpreting and evaluating
results in terms of existing codes, standards and
specifications. The NDE Level lll, in the method in which
he was certified, shall be responsible in establishing training
course and examination ofNDE Level I and ll personnel for

certification in those methods.

4.

EDUCATION, TRAINING AND EXPERIENCE REQT]IREMENTS FOR INITIAL


QUALIFICATION
To be considered for certification, a candidate shall sarisfu one of the following criteria for
the applicable NDE Level.

4.1

NDE Level I and Level II


Initial qualification for NDE Level I or Level ll shall satisry the requirement
conceming his/her education, experience and training requirements as per Table l.
These requirements shall be verified by the NDE Level lll who is also responsible in
ensurine each candidate's eligibiliW.
Table I -Initial Training and Experielce Levels

Experience

Examination
Method
Magnetic
Particle

NDT

Level

]I

Liquid
Penetrant
Radiography

LJltrasonic

II
II
I
1I

Training
Hours

Minimum
Hours in
Method

Hours in

t2

70

130

2t0

400

Solvent Removable & Water

70

130

Washable

740

270

40

2r0

400

40

630

1200

40

270

400

40

630

1200

Technique and Designator

Yoke & Coil

Radioactive Material
Manual Contact Testing
Straight/Angle Beam - Pipe &
Forqinqs

Total
NDT

Notes:

l.

2.

For l,evel II certif'ication, the experience shall consist oltime at Level I or equivalent, If a person
is being qualified directly to Level II with no time at Levei I, the required experience shall consist
ofthe sum ofthe times required for [,evel I and Level II and the required training shall consist of
the sum ofthe hours required for Level I and Level II.
For initial eligibility determination, total houls in hands-on NDE works in any method can be used
as an alternative to the minimum required work experience in that particular method, as ifldicated

]MI,A\STETE
PT. AI(T-IRA BINA CITRA

DATE

0l -

08

2012

PAGE
7 of 49

WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALITIICATTON AND CERTIFICA'f ION

3.
4.

4.2

in the table above.


For Level III certification, the requircd experience shall consist ofthe sum ofthe time required fbr
Level I and Level II, and the additional requirements listed in Par.3.2. The required formal
training shall consist ofthe Level I and Level II traioing plus any additional lbrmal training.
While fulfilling total NDT experience requirement, experience may be gained in morc than one (1)
method, and hours spent perlbrming NDT-related tasks may be counted. Minimum experience
hours must be met for each method and technique.

NDE Level lll


NDE Level III applicants must satisfu one of the following eligibility criteria:
a. Have graduated from a minimum four-year college or university curriculum with
a de$ee in engineering or a physical science, plus one additional year (12
months) of experience beyond the NDE Level II requirements in NDE in an
assignment at least comparable to that of an Level II in the applicable test
method(s), or;
b.

Have completed with passing grades at least two years of engineering or science
study at a university, college, or technical school, plus tlvo years (24 months) of
experience beyond the NDE Level II requirements in nondestructive testing in an
assignment comparable to that ofa Level II in the applicable test method(s), or;
Have four years (48 months) experience beyond the NDE Level II requirements
in NDE in an assignment at least comparable to that of a Level in the
applicable test method(s).

lI

5.

TRAININGPROGRAM
5.1

Personnel being considered

for initial certification shall satisfu the

requirement

described in Par. 4 to become thoroughly familiar with the principles and practices of
the specified NDE methods related to the level ofcertification desired and applicable
to the processes to be used and the product to be tested.
5.2

The training program shall include sufficient examinations as per Par. 8 to assure that
the necessary information have been comprehended.

5.3

Recommended training course outline for NDE Level I, II, and III personnel and
recommended references which might be used as technical source material shall
follow the outline as given in Exhibit C for the relevant NDE method.

5.4

lf Akura were to purchase an Outside Training Agency services, it shall be as defined in


Par. 6 of this procedure.

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

PAGE

DATE
01

-08

2012

of49

WR}TTEN I'RACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALI FICATION AND CERTII-ICATION

6.

OUTSIDE AGENCY (ST]B CONTRACTOR)

An outside agency is a company or individual who provides NDE Level I[[ services and
whose qualifications to provide these services have been reviewed and approved by Akura.
Akura's Operations Director or Operations Manager shall be responsible in assuring the
following:

a.

The proposed NDE Level

III shall have qualifications

and familiarity in meeting Akura's

specifi c NDE assignments.

b.

The NDE Persomel Qualification and Certification Procedure and the training course
outline used by the agency to qualifo the NDE personnel are in accordance with this
procedure.

7. {)MIMSTRATION

AND GRADING OP EXAMINATIONS

7.1 An NDE Level III

shall be responsible for the administration and grading of

examinations specified in Par. 8.2 through Par. 8.4 for NDE Level

I, Il

personnel.

examinations may be delegated to a qualified representative


appointed by the NDE Level III and so recorded. Grading shall only be done by the
NDE l.evel III.
Supervision

7.2

of

Only individuals qualified as ASNT NDE Level III or ACCP Professional NDE
Level III in the method and have been appointed by Akura's Operations Manager
shall be allowed to perform the actual administration and grading of Level III
examinations specified in Par. 8.5.

7.3

I/ll

personnel, composite grades shall be determined by simple averaging


ofthe results ofgeneral, specific and practical examinations. For Level III personnel,

For Level

composite grade shall be obtained by simple averaging

of the results of

basic,

method and specific examinations.


7.4

When an examination is administered for qualification, a composite grade of 80% or


greater is required for qualification. In addition, the grade for each examination shall
be 70oZ or greater.

7.5

When an examination is administered and graded lor Akura by an approved outside


agency and issues grades of pass or fail only, on a certified repoft, then Akura may

accept the pass grade as 80%

for that particular examination. Any

original
inistration
Deparhnent.
file
the
Adm
by
examination records shall be maintained on

Nt l\
PT. AI(I]RA BINA CITRA

01

sl

T'f, R

DATE
08

,2012

PAGE

9of49

WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALIFICATION AND CER'f IFICATION

8.

EXAMINATIONS
8.

Vision Examinations
Vision Examinations shall be administered by Akura's NDE Level III. Only the NDE
Level III Ophthalmologist or Medical Doctor shall conduct the examination. Vision
examination result shall be recorded in a form as shown in Exhibit A.
A Near-Vision Acuity Examination shall be conducted upon initial certification and
annually thereafter to ensure natural or corrected near-distance acuity in at least one
eye to the extent that the applicant is capable of reading a minimum of Jaeger
Number 2 or equivalent type and size letter at a distance of not less than 12" on a
Standard Jaeger Test Chart. Successful completion ofthe examination is mandatory
for individual seeking certification in MT, PT, UT, RT methods.
b.

Color Contrast Differentiation Examination shall be conducted upon initial


certification and at five-year intervals thereafter using an Ishihara Test Plates to the
extent that the candidate is capable of differentiating color contrast with minimum
of l4 plates from the 24 plates available. Successful completion ofthe examination
is mandatory only for individual seeking cefiification in MT, PT, UT methods.

For personnel that fail to meet the requirement of 8.1.b above, the NDE Level III
must perform additional examinations on test specimen that demonstrate that the
candidate can differentiate between the colors to be used in the applicable NDE
technique. This variation shall be documented in addition to Exhibit A and shall
obtain the NDE Level III approval.

c.

Shades

of Gray shall be conducted upon initial certification and at

five-year

intervals thereafter using Shades of Gray Test Plates (see Fig. 1) to the extent that
the candidate is capable of distinguishing the numbers in the shaded areas with
minimum of 20 plates from the 25 plates available. Successful completion of the

examination is mandatory for individual seeking certification in

MT

and RT

methods.

8.2

General Examination for NDE Level I, Level II (Written)


a. This examination shall address the basic principle of the applicable method. In
preparing the examination, the NDE Level III shall select or devise appropriate
questions covering the applicable method to the degree required by quality control
processes to be used and the products to be tested.

b.

General examination questions for NDE Level I or II shall be approved by the


responsible NDE Level III. The minimum number of questions (multiple choice) is
as

follows:

PT. AI(URA BINA CITRA

DATE

PAGE

0t -08-2012

l0 of49

WRII"TEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

NDE Method

Number of Questiotrs
Level

Level

MT

40

40

PT

40

40

UT

40

40

RT

40

40

ll

The maximum time permitted to answer all of the questions for the particular
method and level is as follows:
NDE Method
MT

d.

8.3

Duration of Examination
Level

Level

II

75 min

75 min

P',t'

75 min

UT

90 min

90 min

RT

90 min

90 min

Akura may delete the general examination if the candidate has a valid ACCP Level
II certificate in the designated level ofqualification and endorsed by Akura's NDE
Level III, provided the examinations administered meet the technical needs of
Akura.

Specific Examination for NDE Level I, Level II (Written)


a. This examination shall address the equipment, operating procedures and NDE
techniques that the individual may encounter during specific assignments. This
examination shall also cover the specifications/codes/acceptance criteria used in

Akura's NDE procedures.

b.

This examination shall be closed book except that necessary data, such as graphs,
tables, specifications, procedures, codes, etc., may be provided with or in the
examination. Questions utilizing such reference materials shall require an
understanding of the information rather than merely locating the appropriate
answer.

c.

Specific examination questions for NDE Level I or Il shall be approved by the


IIl. The minimum number of questions (multiple choice) is
as follows:
responsible NDE Level

tri

t.:S'tf jfl
DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

01

R
PAGE

-08-20r2

I1

ol49

WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALIFICATION AN D CERTIFICATION

NDf, Method

Number ofQuestions
Lyel

Level

MT

20

20

PT

20

20

UT

20

20

RT

20

20

II

The maximum time permitted to answer all of the questions for the particular
method and level is as follows:
NDE Method

Duration of Examination
Level

MT

Level

II

75 min

75 min

IJT

90 min

90 min

RT

90 min

90 min

PT

e.

8.4

Akura may delete the specific examination if the candidate has a valid ACCP
Level II certificate, provided the examinations administered meet the technical
needs of Akura. This condition shall be verified and endorsed by Akura's NDE
Level [lI.

Practical Examination for NDE Level I, Level II

a.

The candidate shall demonstrate famitiarity with and abitity to operate the
necessary NDE equipment, record and analyze the resultant information to the
degree required.

b. At least one flawed specimen

or component shall be tested and the results of the


NDE analyzed by the candidate.

c.

The description ofthe specimen, the NDT procedure, including check points, and
the results ofthe examination shall be documented.

d. NDE Level I

Practical Examination. Proficiency shall be demonstrated in

performing the applicable NDE on one or more flawed specimens approved by the
NDE Level III and in evaluating the result to the degree of responsibility as
described in this procedure. At least ten (10) different checkpoints requiring and
understanding of test variables and Akura's procedural requirements shall be
included in this examination. The candidate shall detect all discontinuities and
conditions specified by the NDE Level III. Failure to successfully detect all
discontinuities in a flawed specimen will result in the failure ofthe overall Practical
examination-

lvt.i\
PT. AI(URA BINA CITRA

:I lfl nR

DATE

01 08

2012

PACE
12 of 49

WRITTEN PR{CTICE FOR NDE PERSONNT]IQUALIFICAT]ON AND CI]RTIFICATION

e. NDE Level II

Practical Examination. Proficiency shall be demonstrated in


selecting and performing the applicable NDE on one or more flawed specimens
approved by the NDE Level Ill and in evaluating the result to the degree of
responsibility as described in this procedure. At least ten ( l0) different checkpoints
requiring and understanding oftest variables and Akura's procedural requirements
shall be included in this examination. The candidate shall detect all discontinuities
and conditions specified by the NDE Level III. Failure to successfully detect all
discontinuities in a flawed specimen will result in the failure ofthe overall Practical
examination.

f.

ofACCP Level II general hands-on practical examinations


in the method may be considered as fulfilling the requirement of Practical
Successful completion
examination.

8.5

NDE Level III Examinations

8.5.1 BasicExamination
This examination is required only once when more than one method of
examination is to be taken. The minimum number of questions shall be given
as follows (to be completed in 100 minutes):

(i)

5 questions relating to the understanding the SNT-TC- l A document.

(ii) 20

questions relating

to

applicable material, fabrication and product

technology.

(iii) 20
(iv)

8.5.2

questions those are similar to the published ASNT NDT Level II


questions for other appropriate NDE methods.
Akura may delete the basic examinations if the candidate has a valid
ASNT NDE Level III or ACCP Professional Level lII.

Method Examination (for each method), to be completed in 100 minutes


30 questions relating to the fundamental and principles those are similar to
the published ASNT Level III questions for each method.
(ii) l5 questions relating to application and establishment of techniques and
procedures those are similar to the published ASNT NDT Level III
questions for each method.
(iii) 20 questions relating to the capability of interpreting Codes, Standards and

(i)

Specifications relating to the designated method.

(iv) Akura may delete the method examinations if the candidate has a valid
ASNT NDE Level Ill or ACCP Proiessional Level III for each applicable
method.

8.5.3

Specific Examination (for each method), to be completed in 60 minutes

(i) 20 questions

relating

procedures applicable
employed.

to

specifications, equipment, techniques and


services and methods to be

to Akura's NDE

Nt1".\ S
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

:l IS rR
PACE
13 of 49

WRITTEN PMCTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUAI,IFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

(ii)

Akura may delete the specific examinations if the candidate has a valid
ASNT NDE Level III or ACCP Professional Level III certificate in the
method and if documented evidence of experience exist, including the
preparation of NDE procedures according to Codes, Standards or
Specifications and/or the evaluation oftest results.

8.6

Examination Results Validity


Each examination result for every type of examination is valid for 180 days interval. In
tlat time interval, the candidate shall have to complete all the necessary examinations
in order to be certified to a certain NDE level.

8.7

Reexam ination

Those failing to attain the required grades should wait at least 30 days or receive
suitable additional training as determined by the NDE Level III before reexamination.

9.

CERTIFICATION
9.1

Certification of NDE personnel shall be based on the satisiactory qualification in


accordance with Paragra.ph {, 5, 7 and 8 ofthis procedure.

9.2

Certification ofall levels ofNDE personnel under this procedure is the responsibility
of Akura's Operations Manager.

9.3

At the option ofAkura, an outside agency may be engaged to provide NDE Level III
services. In such instances, the responsibility of certification shall be retained by
Akura's Operations Manager.

9.4

Certificate of Qualification (Exhbit B) shall be issued and this document shall be


maintained on file by Akura's Administration Department for a period of 5 years from
the date of issuance. The document shall include the following information:
( l) Name of the individual certified.
(2) Level ofcertification and the NDE method(s) which he/she is certified.
(3) Specific technique designation in the method which he/she is certified.
(4) Training hours completed.
(5) Composite grade(s) or suitable evidence ofgrades.
(6) Date of Ce(ification and/or recertification and the date of assignment to NDE.
(7) Signature of Akura' NDE Level III that endorse the qualification(s) of the
individual (for Level I and Level II personnel only).
(8) Certification expiration date.
(9) Signature ofAkura's Opel4tlq4q Director or Operations Manager that certifu the
qualifi cation(s) of the individual.

XVr{

:l rE lR

DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

0l 08 2012

WRITTEN PRACTICB IiOR NDE PERSONNTL


QUALIFICAT]ON AND CERTIFICAI'ION

DOC. NO.
ABC.WP-OI

PAGE
14 of 49

REV
2

Format of Certificate of Qualification shall follow that is shown in Exhibit B of this


procedure.

9.5 As long as the certified individual is under Akura's

employment, Akura shall

maintain on file the following record for each individual unless specified otherwise.

(l)

(2)
(3)
(4)

10.

Evidence of individual's highest formal education (rnay either be acadernic


transcript and/or college,rhigh school diploma).
Document approved by Akura's OA Manager or Operations Manager that
indicating the individual's working experience in NDE assignment(s).
Evidence of successful technical examinations taken by the individual in order
to be certified to the designated NDE level.
Evidence of vision examination result. This type of record only needs to be
maintained on file for a maximum period of 5 (five) years.

TECHMCAL PERFORMANCE E,VALUATION


ln every 5 (five) years interval, a technical performance evaluation of Level [, Level and
[Il personnel shall be evaluated and documented by Akura's NDE Level IIl.
Technical performance evaluation documentation shall follow the format and guidelines
described in Par. 8.4 or 8.5.3, as appropriate.

Level

11.

RECERTIFICATION
I

l.l

NDE Level I or II
NDE Level I or II personnel initially certified by examinations in accordance with
Par. 8.1 through Par. 8.4 ofthis procedure may be recertified at 5-years interval after
the initial examination by meeting one of the following requirements:

a.
b.

Satisfactorily pass the vision examination in accordance with Par. 8.1 and obtain
verification ofcontinuing satisfactory performance from Akura's NDE Level Ill.
This verification is obtained from documentation as described in Par. 10.
Satisfactorily pass all examinations in accordance with Par. 8.1 through Par. 8.4

ofthis procedure.
Certifications expire on the last day ofthe month ofexpiration.
II

.2 NDE Level Ill


NDE Level III personnel initially certified by examinations in accordance with Par.
8.1 and Par. 8.5 of this procedure may be recertified at s-years interval after the
initial examination by satisfactorily pass the vision and specific examinations in
accordance with Par. 8.1 and Par. 8.5.3 of this procedure. Certifications expire on the
last day ofthe month ofexpiration

NIl A\ S
PT. AIruRA BINA CITRA
WRITTEN PIL{CTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL
QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

ll.3

T i,

IIR

DATE

0l

-08

PAGE

l5 of49

2012

DOC. NO.

REV

ABC-WP-ot

to earlier edition ol Akura's NDE Personnel


and
Certification
Procedure
shall be considered eligible to be
Qualification
recertified to their former NDE lcvel subject to review by Akura's NDE Level IIl.
Personnel qualified and certified

ll.4 A Level I, Level II, or Level III

individual certified to other employer's written

practice other than Akura's may be recertified to their former NDE level by Akura
based on successful completion of examinations without additional training provided
all of the following conditions are met to the satisfaction of Akura's NDE Level III:

a.

The individual has proofofprior certification (original or copy ofcertificate).

b.

The individual was working in the capacity to which he/she was certified within
6 (six) months of termination.

c.

The individual is being recertified within 6 (six) months oftermination.

Prior to being examined for certification, individuals not meeting the above
by Akura's

requirements shall receive additional training as deemed appropriate


NDE Level II I.

12.

TERMINATION AIID REINSTATEMENT


12.

Akura's certification shall be deemed revoked when employment


terminated or when the certification has exceeded its expiration date.

with Akura

is

12.2 Interrupted Service as follows shall also be considered as the cause oftermination:
a. The vision examinations' validity period have exceeded 1 (one) year.
Certification is reinstated concurently upon satisfactory completion ofthe vision
reexamination.

b.

The individual has not performed the duties in the method(s) for which he/she is
certified during any consecutive 6 (six) months period. Certification is reinstated
concurrently upon satisfactory completion oftechnical perlormance evaluation in
accordance with Par. l0 (for Level I or II) and satisfactory cornpletion ofspecific
examination in accordance with Par. 8.5.3 (for Level III).

MASTMR
PT. AKT]RA BINA CITRA
WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL
QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

Ic
t

o
-3
rY

-(I

.i

Gs

oi
oi

o3
Ob

E'I-'.' TY
G
.(l 3

ut ,';
lr

o
G
lL(sL

i.

ta
o6

:'e
!, i;
E6

ii

F:,
c}u
-!i

(Eae

xr3
lU '!

:_

o;.or

ut ir
Figure

- Shades of Grey Plates

DATE
0r

08

2012

PAGE
16 of 49

Nll

t\

S 1l t0 lR

DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

01

-08

2012

PAGE
17 of 49

WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEI,


QUALIFICAT]ON AND CERTIFICATION

f,XHIBIT A _ VISION EXAMINATION RECORI)


VISION EXAMINATION RECORD

Name

Position

File No
Place / Birth Date

:
:

Without Glasses

Near \rision Acuity

Jaeger
(at distance 12")

With Glasses

Left

Both

Risht

Left

Both

Risht

J1...

J1...

tl...

11...

11...

J1...

Number Shades of Gray can be read at a distance between 30 - 50 cm = .........., Plates


(Passing Grade r Minimum 20 correct Reading Requird)
Color Contrast

Plate I{o.

Difrercntiation
(Ishihara Chart)

Li 2i 3i 4i 5i 6', 7i A; 9'. toi tLi lzi


t6i lli LAi tgi 2Oi 2li 22| 23i 24i

13; 14; 15;

Result of :

I{earVision
Acuity
Shades of Gray

Color Contrast

Difie.entiation
Examination Admiristered By

Date of Examination;

Date of Expiration

N,i

PT.

PACE

0l 08 2012

l8 of49

DOC. NO-

REV

ABC.WP.OI

WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALIFICATION AN D CERTIFICATION

B_

S TI-i0, lR

DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

EXHIBIT

1+'

CERTIFICATE OF QUALIFICATION

Akura Bina Citra


Cert.

CE RTI FICATE

OF

No.i

/MT- f l- ABC/ MM/YYYY

QAAL I FI CATI O N

This is to cefiiry that


Q.{ame)

Has met the requirements and successfully passed the examination as required by
NDE Personnel Qualification and Certification Procedure No. ABC-WP-01 Rev......
(in compliance with ASNT Document No. SNT-TC-1A, 2011 Edition), and we certif, as

NDE Method
Specifi c Codes/Standards:

Level ........ (....)

This certificate is valid only whilst the above named technician is in the employment of PI. Akura Bina Citra
Recerrification was bur"a on

,u"""r.rur(I',1;i:T::"#+::H3",

performance Evatuation and specifio

Examination (for re-certifi cation)

Date of
Date of

Certification : MM-DD-YY

Expiration : MM-DD-YY

Examiner.

ASNTNDT Level III


C'ERTIFICATE NUMBER

Company Signatory,

Operations Director or Manager

lvrtA S'T Ifl,R


PT, AI(T-]RA BINA CITRA

DATE

0l -

08

2012

PAGE
19 of 49

WRII'TEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QU

ALIFICATION AND CEI1TIFICATION

EXHIBIT C-TRAINING COURSE OUTLINE


TRAINING COURSE OUTLINE
LIQUID PENETRANT EXAM INATION METHOD
Level I Course Outline

l.

Introduction
Brief history ofnondestructive examination and liquid penetrant examination
b. Purpose of liquid penetrant examination
c. Basic principles of liquid penetrant examination
d. Types of liquid penetrant commercially available
e. Method ofpersonnel qualification
Liquid Penetrant Processing
a. Preparation ofparts
b. Adequate lighting
Application of penetrant to parts
d. Removal of surface penetrant
Developer application and drying
f. Inspection and evaluation
g. Post cleaning
h. Reference photographs from ASTM E-125
Various Penetrant Examinations Methods
a. Current ASTM standard methods
b. Characteristics ofeach method
c. General applications ofeach method
Liquid Penetrant Examination Equipment
a. Liquid penetrant examinalion units
b. Lighting for liquid penetrant examination equipment and light meters
c. Materials for liquid penetrant examination
d. Precautions in liquid penetrant examination
Exarnination According To Specific Procedures
a.

2.

3.

4.

5.

TotaI hours of instruction for this course:

i.
ii.

High school graduate or equivalent 4 hours


Completion with passing grades of at least tlvo years of engineering or science
study at university, college or technical school - 4 hours

trv{.A\
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

T',1il,

lh?

DATE

PACE

0l 08 2012

20 of 49

WRITTEN PRACI'ICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALIFICA ION AND CERI'IFICATION

Level II Course Outline


1.

Review
Basic principles

a.
b.

c.
2.

-r-

Process ofvarious methods

Equipment
Selection of the Appropriate Penetrant Examination Method
a. Advantages ofvarious methods
b. Disadvantages of various methods
Inspection and Evaluation of Indications

a.

General

(l)

Discontinuities inherent in various materials

(2) Reason for indication


(3) Appearance of indications
(4) Time for indications to appear
(5) Persistence of indications
(6) Eflects ofternperature and lighting (white light to UV)
(7) Eflects ofmetal smearing operations (shot peening, machining,
(8) Preferred sequence for penetrant examination
(9) Part preparation (pre-cleaning, stripping, etc.)

b.

c.

Factors aflecting indications


Penetrant used
(2) Prior processing

(l)

(3)

Technique used
Indications from cracks
Cracks occuming during solidification
(2) Cracks occurring during processing
Cracks occurring during service

(l)

(l)

(4)

d.

e.

f.

Reference photographs from ASTM E-125

Indications from porosity

l)

Reference photographs from ASTM E- 125

Indications from specific material lorms


Forgings

(l)

(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

Castings
Plate

Welds
Extrusions
Reference photographs from ASTM E-l25

Evaluation of indications
(1) True indications
(2) False indications

(3) Relevantindications
(4) Non-relevant indications

etc.)

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

PAGE
21 of 49

WRITTEN PRACTICE TOR NDE PERSONNETQUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

(5)

4.

Process control

o
o

Controlling process variables


Testing and maintenance materials

lnspection Procedures and Standards


lnspection procedures(minimumrequirements)

a.

(l)

DS-l Vol.3

(2) ASME BPV Sect. V and


(3) AWS Dl.l

Sect.

VIII Div. I

Total hours of instruction for this course:


i. High school graduate or equivalent - 8 hours
ii. Completion with passing grades of at least two years of engineering or science
study at university, college or technical school - 4 hours
Level III Topical Outline

l.

Principles/Theory
Principles of liquid penetrant process
Process variables
(2) Effects oftest object factors on process
b. Theory
Physics of how penetrant work

a.

(l)

(l)

(2)

c.

d.

Control and measurement ofpenetrant process variables


o Surface tension, viscosity and capillary entrapment
o Measurement of penetrability, washability and emulsification
. Contrast, brightness and fluorescence
o Contamination of materials
o Proper selection of penetrant levels for different testing (sensitivity)
Proper selection of liquid penetrant examination as method ofchoice
(l) Difference between liquid penetrant examinations and other methods
(2) Complementary roles of liquid penetrant examination and other methods
(3) Potential for conflicting results between methods
(4) Factors that qualifo/disqualifo the use of liquid penetrant examination
(5) Selection of Iiquid penetrant examination techniques
Proper selection of liquid penetrant examination as method ofchoice
(l) Prepararions of pans
(2) Applications of penetrants and emulsifiers to parts
(3) Removal of surface penetrants
(4) Developer application and drying
(5) Evaluation
(6) Post cleaning
(7) Precaution

Mt/\SI]XEIR
PT. AKI]RA BINA CITRA

DATE

01 08

2012

WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALIFICATION AND CER]IFICATION

2.

Equipments,Materials

a. Methods of measurement
b. Lighting for liquid penetrant examination

White light intensif


Black (UV fluorescent) light intensity, warm up time, etc.
Physics and physiological differences
c. Materials lor liquid penetrant examinalion
(l) Solvent removable
(2) Water washable
(3) Post emulsifiable
o Water base (hydrophilic)
o Oil base (lipophilic)
(4) Dual sensitivity
d. Testing and maintenance olmaterials
Interpretation/Evaluation
(l

(2)
(3)

3.

a.
b.

General
Appearance of penetrant indications
(2) Persistence of indications
Factors affecting indications
(I
Preferred sequence for penetrant inspection
(2) Part preparation (pre-cleaning, stripping, etc.)
(3) Environment (lighting, temperature, etc.)
(4) Effect ofmetal smearing operations (shot peening, machining, etc.)

(l)

c.
d.

Indications from discontinuities


(1) Metallic materials
(2) Nonmetallic materials
Relevant and non-relevant indications
(l True indications
(2) False indications

4.

Code

a.
b.
c.
5.
6.

&

Standards

DS-l Vol.3
ASME BPV Sect. V and Sect.
AWS Dl.1

Procedures
Safety and Health

a.
b.

Toxicity
Flammability

Vlll

PAGE
22 of 49

NfiATS,TER
PT. AKI]RA BINA CITRA
WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL
QUALIFICATION AND CERTI}'ICATION

TRAINING COURSE OTJTLINE


MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION METHOD
Level I Course Outline

l.

Principles of Magnets and Magnetic Fields


a. Theory of magnetic fields
Earth's magnetic field
(2) Magnetic field around magnetized materials
b. Theory ofmagnetism
(l Magnetic poles
(2) Law of magnetism
(3) Materials influenced by magnetic fields
Ferromagnetic

(l)
)

o
o

Paramagnetic

(4)

Magnetic characteristic of nonferrous materials


Terminology associated with magnetic particle testing
Characteristics of Magnetic Fields
a. Bar magnet
b. Ring magnet
3. Effect of Discontinuities of materials

c.

a-

Surface cracks
Scratches
Suhsurface defects
4. Magnetization by means of Electric Current

b.
ca.

Circular field
(l) Field around a straight conductor
(2) Right-hand rule
(3) Field in parts through which curent flows
. Long, solid, cylindrical, regular parts
o Irregularly shaped parts
o Tubular parts
o Parts containing machined holes, slots, etc.
(4) Method of inducing current flow in parts
o Contact plates

(5)

b.

Prods

Discontinuities commonly discovered by circular fields

Longitudinal field

(1) Field produced by current flow in a coil


(2) Field direction in a current-carrying coil
(3) Field strength in a current-carrying coil
(4) Discontinuities commonly discovered by longitudinal fields
(5) Advantages of longitudinal magnetization
(6) Disadvantages of longitudinal magnetization

PAGE
23 of 49

II/l

/\

S 1ll 1[] R

PT. AKTJRA BINA CITRA


WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL
QUALIFICATION AND CER fIFICATION

5.

6.
7.

8.

9.

Selecting the proper Method of Magnetization

a.
b.

c.
d.
e.

Alloy,

shape and condition

ofpart

Type of magnetizing curent


Direction of magnetic field
Sequenceofoperations
Value offlux density

lnspectionMaterials
a. Wet particles
b. Dry particles
Principles of Demagnetization
a. Residual magnetism
b. Reason lor requiring demagnelization
c. Longitudinal and circular residual fields
d. Basic principles of demagnetization
e. Retentivity and coercive force
f. Methods of Demagnetization
Magnetic Particle Examination Equipment
a. Equiprnent selection consideration
(1) Type ofmagnetizing current
(2) Location and nature oftest
(3) Test material used
(4) Purpose oftest
(5) Area inspected
b. Manual inspection equipment
Particle medium and heavy-duty equipment
d. Stationary equipment
Types of Discontinuities detected by Magnetic Particle Testing
a. lnclusions
b. Blowholes
c. Porosity
d.

Flakes

Cracks
f.

Pipes

h.

Laps

Laminations

i.
j.

Forging bursts
Voids
10. Magnetic Particle Indications and Interpretations
a. Indications of nonmetallic inclusrons
b. Indication of surface seams
c. lndication ofcracks
d. Indication of Laminations
e. Indication of laps
f. Indication ofburst and flakes

PAGE
24 of 49

M-]A\STI,R
PT. AI(URA BINA CITRA

DATE

0t 08 2012

PAGE
25 of 49

WRITTEN PRACT'ICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALIFICATTON AND CERTIFICATION

g. Indicationofporosity
h. Non relevant indications

i.

l.

Reference photograph from ASTM E-453


Examination to Specific Procedures

Total hours of instruction for this course:


i. High school graduate or equivalent - 12 hours
ii. Completion with passing grades of at least two years of engineering or science
study at university, college or technical school - 8 hours
Level Il Course Outline

l.

Principles
a. Theory
(l
Flux pattems
(2) Frequency and voltage factors
(3) Cunent calculations
(4) Surface flux strength
(5) Subsurface effects
b. Magnets and magnetism
(1) Distance factors versus strength offlux
(2) Intemal and extemal flux pattems
(3) Phenomenon action at the discontinuity
(4) Heat eflects on magnetism
(5) Material hardness versus magnetic retention
Flux Fields
a. Direct current
(1) Depth ofpenetration factors

(2)

Source ofcurrent
Direct pulsating current
(1) Similarity to direct current
(2) Advantages
(3) Tlpical fields
c. Altemating current
(l) Cyclic effects
(2) Surface strength characteristics
(3) Safety precautions
(4) Voltage and current factors
(5) Source of current
3. Effects of Discontinuities on Materials
a. Design factors
(l) Mechanical Properties
(2) Part use
b. Relationship to load - carrying ability

b.

MI/{
PT. AI(URA BINA CITRA
WRITTEN PMCTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEI,
QUAUFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

Magnetization by Means of Electric Current

a.

b.

Circular techniques
(1) Current calculations
(2) Depth-factor considerations
(3) Precautions, safety and overheating
(4) Contact prods and yokes
. Requirements for prods and yokes
o Current - carrying capabilities
(5) Discontinuitiescommonly detected
Longitudinal technique
(l) Principles ofinduced flux fields
(2) Geometry ofpart to be inspected

(3)
(4)

Shapes and sizes

ofcoils

Use ofcoils and cables


Strength of field

o
.
o

Current directional flow versus flux field


Shapes. sizes and currenl capacities
(5) Current calculations
Formulas
Tlpes ofcurrent required
Current demand
(6) Discontinuities commonly detected
5. Selecting the Proper Method of Magnetization

.
.
o

a.
b.
c.

Alloy, shape and condition ofpad


Tlpe of magnetizing current
Direction of magnetic field

d. Sequenceofoperations
e. Value offlux density

Demagnetization Procedures
a. Need for demagnetization ofparts
b. Current, flequency and field orientation
c. Heat factors and precautions
d. Need for collapsing flux fields
7. Equipment
a. Portable type
(1) Reason for portable equipment
(2) Capabilities of portable equipment
(3) Similarity to stationary equipment
b. Stationary type
6.

(l)

Capability ofhandling large and heavy parts

(2) Flexibility in use


(3) Need for stationary equipment
(4) Use ofaccessories and attachments

S -T Ifl

01

DATE
08

-2012

R
PACE
26 of 49

IV-IAST]O]R
PT. AIruRA BINA CITRA
WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL
QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

c.

8.

9.

Automatic type
(l) Requirement for automation
(2) Sequentialoperations
(3) Control and operation factors
(4) Alarm rejection mechanisms
d. Liquids and Powders
(l) Liquid requirements as a particle vehicle
(2) Safety precautions
(3) Temperature needs
(4) Powder and paste contents
(5) Mixing procedures
(6) Need for accurate proportions
e. Black light type
(l) Black light and fluorescence
(2) Visible light and black light comparison
(3) Requirements in the testing cycle
(4) Techniques in use
f. Light-sensitiveinstruments
( l) Need for instrumentation
(2) Light characteristics
Types of discontinuities
a. In castings
b. In ingots
c. In wrought sections and parts
d. Tn welds
e. Reference photographs from ASTM E-453
EvaluationTechniques
a. Use ofstandards
(l) Need for standards and references
(2) Comparison of known with unknown
(3) Specifications and certifi cations
(4) Comparison techniques
b. Defect appraisal
(l ) History of pafts
(2) Manufacturing process
(3) Possible causes of defect

(4) Use ofpart


(5) Acceptance and rejection
(6) Use oftolerances

criteria

PAGE

DATE
01

-08

20

t2

27 of 49

MT
PT. AI(URA BINA CITRA
WRITTEN PRAC'TICE FOR NDE PERSONNEI,
QUALII.'ICATION AND CERTIFICATION

1\

rS

if 10, lR

DATE

01 o8

2012

DOC. NO.
ABC.WP.OI

PAGE
28 of 49

REV
2

10. Inspection Procedures and Standards

a.
b.

Inspection procedures (minimum requirements)


Standards/codes

(l)

DS-l Vol. 3
(2) ASME BPV Sect. V and Sect. VIII Div. 1
(3) AwS Dr.l
I

L Quality Control ofEquipment and

Processes

a. Malfunctioning of equipment
b. Proper magnetic particles and bath liquid
c. Bath concentration

(l)

Settling test
Other bath-strength tests
Tests for black light intensity

(2)

d.

Total hours ol inslruction for this course:


i. High school graduate or equivalent - 8 hours
ii. Completion with passing grades of at least two years of engineering or science
study at university, college or technical school - 4 hours
Level III Topical Outline

1.

Principles/Theory
Principles ofmagnets and magnetic fields
(1) Theory ofmagnetic fields
(2) Theory ofmagnetism
(3) Terminology associated with magnetic particle examination
b. Characteristics of magnetic fields
Bar magnet
(2) Ring Magnet
Equipments/Materials
a. Magnetic particle examination equipment
Equipment selection and considerations
(2) Manual inspection equipment
(3) Medium and heavy duty equipment

a.

(l)

2.

(l)

(4)
(5)

b.

Stationeryequipment
Mechanized inspectionequipment

Inspectionmaterials
( l) Wet particle technique
(2) Dry particle technique

trw/\s',Ti&R
PT. AIORABINACTTRA

PAGE
29 oi 49

WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

3.

4.

5.

Technique / Calibrations
Magnetization by means of electric current

a.

(1)

Circular field
o Field around a straight conductor
o Right hand rule
o Field in parts through which current flows
o Methods ofinducing current flow in parts
. Discontinuities commonly indicated by circular field
. App)ications of drcdar magteization
(2) Longitudinal field
. Field direction
o Discontinuities commonly indicated by longitudinal technigues
o Applications of longitudinal magnetization
b . Se\ecfrng \he ptoper met\o ol magnetrzatron
(1) Allo1,, shape and condition ofpart
(2) Type of magnetizing field
(3) Direction of magnetic field
(4) Sequence of operation
(5) Value offlux density
c. Demagnetization
( I ) Reasons for requiring demagnetization
(2) Methods of demagnetization
Interpretation/Evaluation
a. Magnetic particle test indications and interpretations
b. Effects of discontinuities on materials and types of discontinuities indicated by
magnetic particle examination
Code

&

Standards

a. DS-l Vol. 3
b. ASME BPV Sect. V and Sect. VIII
c. AWS Dl.l
6.
7.

Procedures
Safety and Health

RIIASTiflR
PT. AI(URA BINA CITRA

DATE
0t - 08 -2012

PAGE
30

WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALIF1CATION AND CERTIFICATION

TRAINING COURSE OUTLINE


ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION METHOD
Level I Course Outline

I. Basic f]ltrasonic Course

l.

lntroduction
a. Definition of ultrasonic
b. History of ultrasonic examination
c. Application of ultrasonic energy
d. Basic math review
e. Responsibilities of levels ofcertification
2. Basic Principles of Acoustics
a. Nature ofsound
b. Modes ofsound - wave generation
Velocity, frequency and wavelength of sound waves
d. Attenuation of sound waves
e. Acoustic impedance
f. Reflection
g. Refraction and mode conversion
h. Snell's law and critical angles
i. Fresnel and Fraunhofer effects
3. Equipment
a. Basic instrumentation display (A scan, B scan, C scan)
(1) Electronics - time base, pulser, receiver and various monitor displays
(2) Control function
(3) Calibration
o Basic instrument calibration
o Calibration blocks (types and use)
b. Digital thickness instrumentation
c. Transducer operation and theory
(1) Piezoelectric effect
(2) Types oftransducer elements
(3) Frequency (transducer elements, thickness relationships)
(4) Near field and far field
(5) Beam spread
(6) Construction, materials and shapes
(7) Types (straight, angle, dual, etc.)
(8) Beam-intensity characteristics
(9) Sensitivity, resolution and damping
( lO)Mechanical vibration into part

of49

Iylt;\
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

"1

ll

ll:l IR

DATE

PAGE

0l-08-2012

lll of49

WRI'I"'I'EN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL

QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

d.

Couplant

(l)

Purpose and principles

(2)

4.

Materials and their efficiency


Basic Testing methods
a. Contact
b. Immersion

Total hours of instruction lor this course:


i. High school graduate or equivalent - 20 hours
ii. Completion with passing grades of at least two years of engineering or science
study at university, college or technical school - l5 hours

IL Ultrasonic Technique Course


l. Contact Testing methods
a.

Straight beam

Angle beam
Surface wave and plate waves
d. Pulse-echo transmission
Multiple transducer
f. Curved surfaces
(l) Flat entry surfaces
(2) Cylindrical and tubular shapes
Calibration (Electronic and functional)
a. Equipment
(3) Monitor displays (amplitude, sweep, etc.)
b.

2.

(4) Recorders
(5) Alarms
(6) Automatic and semiautomalic slslems
(7) Electronic distance/amplitude correction
(8) Transducer

b.

c.

Calibration ofequipmentelectronics
(l) Variable effects
(2) Transmission accuracy
(3) Calibration requirements
(4) Calibration reflectors
Inspectioncalibration
(l) Comparison with reference blocks
(2) Pulse-echovariables
(3) Reference for planned tests (straight beam, angle beam, etc.)
(4) Transmission factors
(5) Transducer
(6) Couplant
(7) Materials

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE

0l 08

2012

PAGE
32 of 49

WRITI'EN PRACI'ICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

3.

Straight Beam Examination to Specific Procedures


a. Selection of parameters
b. Test standards
Evaluation of result
d. Test reports
Angle Beam Examination to Specific Procedures
a. Selection of parameters
b. Test standards
c. Evaluation ofresult

c.

4.

d.

Test reports

Total hours of instruction for this course:


i. High school graduate or equivalent - 20 hours
ii. Completion with passing grades of at least two years of engineering or science
study at university, college or technical school - l5 hours
Level II Course Outline

I. Ultrasonic Evaluation Course


l_

Review oi Ultrasonic Technique Course


a. Principles of ultrasonic
b. Equipment

(1) A scan
(2) B scan or D scan
(3) C scan
c.
d.

Testing techniques

Calibration
(l) Straight beam
(2) Angle Beam
(3) Specialapplication
2. Evaluation ofbase material product form
a. Pipe and tubular products
(l) Manufacturing process
(2) Types, origin and typical orientation of discontinuities
(3) Response of discontinuities to ultrasound
(4) DS-1 Vol. 3
b. Forgings
(l) Process Review
(2) Types, origin and typical orientation of discontinuities
(3) Response of discontinuities to ultrasound
(4) AWS Dl.l
I
t
(5) ASME BPV Sect. V and Sect. VIll Div. I

lWi\STiflR
PT. AKT]RA BINA CITRA

DATE

0t

-08

WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALIFICATION AN D CERTIFICATION

Castings
(1) Process Review
(2) Types, origin and typical orientation of discontinuities
(3) Response ofdiscontinuities to ultrasound
(4) ASME BPV Sect. V and Sect. VIII Div. 1

(5) API Specification 6A


Welding

(1) Process review


(2) T1pes, origin and typical orientation of discontinuities
(3) Response of discontinuities to ultrasound
(4) AWS Dl.r
(5) ASME BPV Sect. V and Sect. VIll Div. 1
Discontinuity Detection
a. Sensitivity to reflections
(1) Size, type and location of discontinuities
(2) Techniques used in detection
(3) Wave characteristics
(4) Material and velocity
b. Resolution
(l) Standard reference comparisons
(2) History of part
13) Probability oftype of discontinuity
(4) Degrees of operator discrimination
(5) Eflects of ultrasonic frequency
(6) Damping effects
c. Determination of discontinuity size
( I ) Various monitor displays and meter indications
(2) Transducer movement versus display
(3) Two-dimensional testing techniques
(4) Signal pattems
d. Location ofdiscontinuity
(l) Various monitor displays
(2) Amplitude and linear time
(3) Search technique
4. Evaluation
a. Comparison procedures
J.

(l)

Standards and references

(2) Amplitude, area and distance relationship


(3) Application of result of other NDE methods

b.

Object appraisal
(1) History of part
(2) Intended use of part
(3) Existing and applicable code interpretation
(4) Type ofdiscontinuity and location

20t 2

PAGE
33

of49

Sf,.A S :l rt ltl
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE
0r

08

2012

PAGE
34 ol 49

WRITTEN PRACTICE I]OR NDE PERSONNEL


QUAI-IFICATiON AND CLR'TITICATION

Total hours of instruction for this course:


i. High school graduate or equivalent - 40 hours
ii. Completion with passing grades of at least tlvo years of engineering or science
study at university, college or technical school 40 hours
Level III Topical Outline

1.

Principles/Theory

a.
b.

General

Principlesofacoustics

(l)

Nature ofsound waves


Modes ofsound wave generation
Velocity, frequency and wavelength ofsound waves
Attenuation of sound waves

(2)
(3)
(4)
(5) Acoustic impedance
(6) Reflection
17) Relraction

and mode conversion


Snell's law and critical angles
Fresnel and Fraunhofer effects
Equipment/Materials
a. Equipment
(l) Pulse-echo instrumentation
o Controls and circuits
o Pulse generation (spike, square wave and tone burst pulsers)
o Signal detection
. Display and recording methods, A scan, B scan, C scan and digital.
o Sensitivity and resolution

(8)
(9)

2.

(2)
(3)

Gates, alarms and attenuators

Basic instrument calibration


Calibration blocks
Digital thickness instrumentation
Transducer operation and theory
o Piezoelectric effect
o Types oftransducer elements
o Frequency (transducer elements-thickness relationship)
o Near field and far field

o
o
o
o
.
o

Beam spread

Construction, materials and shapes


Types (straight, angle, dual, etc.)
Beam intensity characteristics
Sensitivity, resolution and damping
Mechanical vibration into parts

S/fI
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA
WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL
QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

(4)

Transduceroperation/manipulations
Tanks, bridges, manipulators and squirters

o
o
o
o

Wheels and special hand devices

Transfer devices for materials


Manual manipulation
(5) Resonance testing equipment
Bond testing
Thickness testing
Materials
Couplant
Contact surface
Purpose and principles
Materials and their efficiencv
(2) Calibration blocks

.
o

b.

(l)

(3)
(4)
(5)
3.

o
.
o

Cables/connectors
Test specimen

Miscellaneousmaterials

Techniques/Calibrations
a- Contact
(1) Straight beam

(2) Angle beam


(3) Surface wave and plate waves
(4) Pulse-echo transmission
(5) Multipletransducer
(6) Curved surfaces

b.

lmmersion
Transducer in water
(2) Water column, wheels, etc.
(3) Submerged test part

(l)

(4) Sound beam path - transducer to part


(5) Focused transducer
(6) Curved surfaces
(7) Plate waves
(8) Pulse-echo and through-transmission
c.
d.

Comparison of contact and immersion methods


Remote monitoring
Calibration (electronic and functional)

(l

(2)

General
Reference reflectors for calibration
o Flat bottom holes

o Area amplitude blocks


o Distance amplitude blocks
o

Notches

S TI iO, ]R

DATE
01

08

2012

PAGE
35 of 49

PT. AKT]RA BINA CITRA


WRITTEN PMCTICE FOR N'DE PERSONNEL
QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

(3)

Side-drilled holes
. Special blocks - IIW and others
Equipment
o Various monitor displays (amplitude, sweep, etc.)

o
o
.
o
o

(4)

(5)

Recorders

Alarms
Automatic and semiautomatic systems
Electronic distance amplitude correction
Transducer
Calibration of equipment electronics
. Variable effects
o Transmissionaccuracy
o Calibrationrequirements
. Calibration reflectors
Inspection calibration
o Comparison with reference blocks
o Pulse-echo variables
o Reference for planned tests (straight beam, angle beam, etc.)
. Transmission factors

.
.
o

Transducers

Couplant
Materials
4. Interpretations/Evaluations
a. Evaluation of base material product forms
( 1) Ingots

o
.
.
o

(2)

(3)

(4)

Process review
Types, origin and tlpical orientation of discontinuities
Response of discontinuities to ultrasound
Applicable codes, standards, specs
Plate and sheet

.
.
.
.

Process review

Types, original and typical orientation of discontinuities


Response of discontinuities to ultrasound

Applicable codes, standards, specs


Bar and rod
. Process review
. Types, origin and ttpical orientation of discontinuities
o Response of discontinuities to ultrasound
. Applicable codes, standards, specs
Pipe and tubular products
o Process review

PAGE
36 of 49

lVil
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

/\

S 'iI
DATE

01 08

2012

WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNtrL


QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICA'I'ION

.
o
.

(5)

(5)

(7)

Types, origin and typical orientation of discontinuities


Response of discontinuities to ultrasound

Applicable codes, standards, specs


Forgings
o Process review
o Types, origin and typical orientation of discontinuities
. Response of discontinuities to ultrasound
. Applicable codes, standards, specs
Castings
Process review

.
.
.
o

Types, origin and typical orientation of discontinuities


Response of discontinuities to ultrasound

Applicable codes, standards, specs

Composite structures

o
.
o
.

Process review
Types, origin and typical orientation of discontinuities
Response ofdiscontinuities to ultrasound

Applicable codes standards, specs


as applicable (rubber, glass, etc.)
. Process review
. Types, origin and typical orientation of discontinuities
. Response of discontinuities to ultrasound
. Applicable codes standards, specs
b. Evaluation of welds
(l) Process review
(2) Weld geometries
(3) Types, origin and typical orientation of discontinuities
(4) Response of discontinuities to ultrasound
(5) Applicable codes standards
Evaluation of bonded structures
(l) Manufacturing process
(2) Tlpes origin and typical orientation of discontinuities
(3) Response of discontinuities to ultrasound
(4) Applicable codes/standards/specs
Variables affecting test result
( 1) Instrument performance variations
( 2) Transducer perlormance variations
(3) Test specimen variations
. Surface condition
. Part geometry
o Material structure

(B) Miscellaneous product forms

i,T,

R
PAGE
37 of 49

trMI

PT. AKT]RA BINA CITRA


WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL
QUALIFICATION AND CER'II I'ICATtON

(4) Discontinuity

variatrons
Size and geometry
Relation to entry surface
Type ofdiscontinuity
Procedure variations
Recording criteria

o
o
o

(5)

(6)

e.

o
.

Acceptance crileria
Personnel variat ions

.
.

Evaluation(General)
( 1) Comparison procedures

.
.
.

(2)

5.

Skill level in interpretation ofresult


Knowledge level in interpretation ofresult

Standards and references


Amplitude, area and distance relationship
Application ofresults ofother NDE methods

Object appraisal
History of part
lntended use of part
Existing and applicable code interpretation
Type ofdiscontinuity and location

o
.
o
.

Procedures

a.

b.

Specificapplications
(1) Flaw detection
(2) Thickness measurement
(3) Bond evaluation
(4) Fluid flow measurement
(5) Material properties measurements
(6) Computer control and defect analysis
(7) Liquid level sensing
(B) Process control
(9) Field inspection
Codes/standards/specifications

(1) DS-l vol.3


(2) Aws Dr.r
(3) ASME BPV

Sect. V and Sect.

VIII

S 'JI 10, iR
PAGE
38 of49

hu
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

/i '*'rr . l,i'
DATE

0l 08 2012

PAGE
39 of49

WRTfTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALI FICATION AND CERTIFICATION

TRAINING COURSE OUTLINE


RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION METHOD
Level I Course Outline

I. Radiographic Equipment Operating and Emergency Instruction*


l. Personnel Monitoring
a.

Wearing of monitoring badges

b.
c.
d.

Reading of pockets dosimeters


Recording of daily dosimeter readings
"Off-scale" dosimeter-action requ ired
Permissible exposure limits

e.

Survey Instruments
Types of radiation instruments
Reading and interpreting meter indications

a.
b.

c.

Calibrationfrequency
d. Calibration expiration - action
e. Battery check - importance
,. Leak Testing of sealed radioactive source
a. Requirements for leak testing
b. Purpose ofleak testing
c. Performance of leak testing
4. Radiation survey reports
a. Requirements for completion
b. Description ofreport format
5. Radiographic Work Practice
a. Establishment of restricted areas
b. Posting and surveillance ofrestricted areas
c. Use oftime, distance, and shielding to reduce personnel radiation exposure
d. Republic of Indonesia's regulatory requirements for surveys, posting, and control
ofhigh - radiation areas
6.

Exposures devices

a.
b.

c.

d.
e.
7.

Daily inspection and maintenance


Radiation exposure limits for gamma

- ray exposure devices


Labeling
Use of collimators to reduce personnel exposure
Use of "source changers" lor gamma-ray sources

Emergency procedures
Vehicle accidents with radioactive sealed sources
"Source out" - failure to retum to safe shielded conditions.

a.

b.
c.

Emergency call list

PT. AKI]RA BINA CITRA

DATE
01

-08-2012

PAGE
40 of 49

WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

8.

Storages and shipment ofexposed devices and sources


Vehicle storage
Storage Vault - permanent
Shipping instruction - sources

a.
b.

c.

d.

9.

Receiving instructions

radioactive material

Republic oflndonesia's Regulations


a. License reciprocity
b. Radioactive materials license requirements for industrial radiography
c. Qualification requirements for radiography personnel
d. Indonesian Regulations for the control of radiation-source
e. Indonesian Regulation for transportation of radiation-source

topics may be deleted ifcourse participants hold valid National Nuclear Regulatory Body's Radiography
Level I/IVIII or Radiation Protection Officer Certificates.
Total hours of instruction lor this course:
i. High school graduate or equivalent - 5 hours
ii. Completion with passing grades of at least two years of engineering or science
study at university, college or technical school - 5 hours

IL
l.

Basic Radiation Physics Course


Introductions
a. History and discovery ofradioactive materials
b. Definition of industrial radiography
Radiation protection - why?*
d. Basic math review: exponent, square root, etc.
Fundamental properties of matter
a. Elements and atoms
b. Molecules and compounds
Atomic particles - properties ofprotons, electrons and neutrons

c.
2.

d. Atomic structure
e. Atomic number and weight
Isotope vs. radioisotope

3.

f.

RadioactiveMaterials
a. Production
(1) Neutron activation
(2) Nuclear fission
b. Stable vs. unstable (radioactive) atoms
c. Curie - the unit ofactivity
d. Half - life ofradioactive materials
e. Plotting of radioactive decay
f. Specific activity - curies/gmm

PT. AIruRA BINA CITRA

DATE

PAGE

0l -08-2012

4l of 49

DOC. NO.
ABC-WP-OI

REV

WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICA'TION

4.

5.

Types of Radiation
a. Particulate radiation - properties: alph4 beta, neutron.
b. Electromagnetic radiation - X-ray, gamma-ray
c. X-ray production
d. Gamma-ray production
Gamma-ray energy
f. Energy characteristic of common radioisotope sources.
g. Energy characteristic ofX-ray machines.
Interaction of radiation with Matter

a.
b.

Ionization
Radiation interaction with matter
(l) Photoelectric effect
(2) Compton scattering
(3) Pair production
c. Unit ofradiation exposure - the roentgen
d. Emissivity of commonly used radiography sources
e. Emissivity of X-ra; exposure devices
f. Attenuation of electromagnetic radiation shielding
g. Half-value layers; tenth - value layers
h. Inverse square law
6. Biological effects of radiation*
a. "Natural" background radiation
b. Unit ofradiation dose - rem
c. Difference between radiation and contamination
d. Allowable personnel - exposure limits and the banking concept
e. Theory of allowable dose
f. Radiation damage - repair concept
g. Symptoms of radiation injury
h. Acute radiation exposure and somatic injury
i. Personnel monitoring for tracking exposure
j. Organ radio sensitivity
7. Radiation Detection*
a. Pocket dosimeter
b. Difference between dose and dose rate
c. Survey instruments
(l ) Ceiger - Miller tube
(2) Ionizationchambers
(3) Scintiltation chambers, counters
d. Film badge - radiation detector
e. TLDs (thermo luminescent dosimeters)
f. Calibration

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE
01

-08-2012

PAGE
42 of 49

WRITTEN PRACTICE F'OR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

8.

Exposure Devices and Radiation Sources*

a.

Radioisotopesources

source design and fabrication


Gamma - ray sources
Radioisotope exposure device characteristic*

(I

Sealed

(2)

b.
*l

opics may be deleted if course participants hold valid National Nuclear Regulatory Body's Radiography
l/llllll or Radiation Protection Officer Certificates.

Level

Total hours of instruction for this course:


i. High school graduate or equivalent - 20 hours
ii. Completion with passing grades of at least two years of engineering or science
study at university, college or technical school - I 5 hours

III.Radiography Examination Techniques Course

l.

Introductions
a.

2.

Process of Radiography

b. Types of electromagnetic radiation source


c. Electromagnetic Spectrum
d. Penetrating ability and "quality" of X-rays and gamma rays
e. Spectrum of X-ray tube source
f. Spectrum of gamma radioisotope source
g. X-ray tube - change of mA or kV effect on "quality" and intensity

Basic Principles of Radiography


a. Geometric exposure principles

(l

"Shadow" formation and distortion

(2) Shadow enlargementcalculation


(3) Shadow sharpness
(4) Geometric Unsharpness
(5) Finding discontinuity depth

b.

3.

Radiographicscreens
(l ) Lead intensifying screen
(2) Intensifuing factors
(3) Importance of screen-to-film contact
(4) Importance of screen cleanliness and care
(5) Techniques lor cleaning screens
c. Radiographic cassettes
d. Composition of industrial radiographic film
Radiographs
a. Formation of latent image on film
b. InherentUnsharpness
c. Arithmetic ol radiographic exposure
(l ) Milliampemge - distance{ime relationship
(2) Reciprocity law
(3) Radiographic density

PT.

AI(IRA BINA CITRA

DATE

0l 08 2012

PAGE
43 of 49

WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICAT1ON

(4)
(5)
(6)

4.

Gamma ray exposure chart


Inverse square law considerations
Calculation of exposure time for gamma and X-ray sources
d. Characteristic Hurter and Driffield (H&D) curve
e. Film speed, class descriptions and selection offilm for particular purpose
Radiographic Image Quality
a. Radiographic sensitivity
b. Radiographic contrast
c- Film contrast
d. Subject contrast

e.

5.

Definition
f. Film graininess and screen mottle effects
g. Image quality indicator
Film handling, Loading and Processing
a. Safe light and darkroom practices

b. Loading bench and cleanliness


c. Opening offilm boxes and packets
d. Loading of film and sealing cassettes
e. Handling technique for "green film"
6.

Elements of manual film processing


Exposure Techniques - Radiography

a. Single Wall radiography


b. Double Wall radiography

(1) Two walls simultaneously (superimposed) viewing


(2) Elliptical techniques
(3) Double wall exposure single wall viewing

7.

c.
d.
e.

Panoramic radiography
Use of multiple film loading

Specimenconfiguration

Examination According To Specific Procedures

Total hours of instruction for this course:


i. High school $aduate or equivalent - l5 hours
ii. Completion with passing grades of at least two years of engineering or science
study at university, college or technical school - 10 hours

Ty[I

PT. AKIIRA BINA CITRA


WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL
QUALI FICATION AND CERTIFICATION

Level II Course Outline

I. Film Quality and Manufacturing


1.

Processes Course

Review of Basic Radiographic Principles


a. Interaction ofradiation with matter

b. Math review
c. Exposurecalculations
d. Geometric exposure principles
e. Radiographic-imagequalityparameters

Film loading
a. Facilities and equipment
(l) Automatic film processor versus manual processing
(2) Safe lights
(3) Viewer lights
(4) Loading bench
(5) Miscellaneousequipment
b. Film loading
('l) General rules for handling unprocessed film
(2) Types of film packaging
(3) Cassette loading techniques for sheet and rolled-pack
c. Protection of radiographic film in storage
d. Processing of film - manual
(1) Developer and replenishment

(2) Stop bath


(3) Fixer and replenishment
(4) Washing
(5) Prevention of water spots
(6) Drying
Film filing and storage
(l) Retention-life measurements

(2)
(3)

Long term storage

Filing and separation techniques


Unsatisfactory radiographs - causes and cures
(l) Over densities films
(2) Insufficient film density
(3) High contrast
(4) Low contrast
(5) Poor definition
(6) Fog
(7) Light leaks
(8) Artifacts
Film density
(t) Step-wedge comparison film
(2) Densitometers

TT

]U IIR
PACE
44 of 49

PT. AI(URA BINA CITRA

DATE
0r

-08-2012

PAGE
45 of 49

WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

3.

Indications, Discontinuities and Defects


a. Indications

b.

Discontinuities
Inherent

(l)

(2) Processing
(3) Service

4.

Manufacturing Processes and Associated Discontinuities


a. Casting processes and associated discontinuities
(l) Ingots, blooms and billets

b.

c.

(2)
(3)
(4)

Sand casting

(l)

Submerged Arc Welding (SAW)

Centrifugal casting
Investment casting
Wrought processes and associated discontinuities
(1) Forgings
(2) Rolled products
(3) Extruded products
Welding processes and associated discontinuities

(2) Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW)


(3) Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW)
(4) Flux Cored Arc Welding (FCAW)
(5) Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW)

5.

Radiological Safety Principle Review*


a. Controlling personnel exposure
b. Time, distance, shielding concepts
c. ALARA (as low as reasonably achievable) concept
d. Radiation-detectionequipment
e. Exposure-device operating characteristics

*Topics may be deleted ifcourse participants hold valid National Nuclear Regulatory Body's Radiography
Level l/llllll or Radiation Prctection Officer Certificates.

Total hours of instruction for this course:


i. High school graduate or equivalent - 20 hours
ii. Completion with passing $ades of at least two years of engineering or science
study at university, college or technical school - 15 hours

il.
l.

Radiographic Evaluation and Interpretation Course


Radiographic Viewing
a. Film-illuminator requirements
b. Background lighting
c. Multiple-composite viewing
d. Image Quality Indicator placement
Personnel dark adaptation and visual acuity
f. Film identification

NiIASTI}UIR
PT. AIruRA BINA CITRA

DATE

0l 08 2012

PAGE
46 of 49

WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALIFICATION AN D CERTIFICATION

g.
h.

2.

3.

4.

Location markers

Film-density measurement
Film artifacts
Application Techniques
a. Multiple-film techniques
(l) Thickness variation parameters
(2) Film speed
(3) Film latitude
b. Enlargement and projection
c. Geometricalrelationships
d. Geometrical Unsharpness
(l) IQI sensitivity
(2) Sourceto-film distance
(3) Focal-spot size
e. Triangulation methods for discontinuity location
f. Localized magnification
g. Film hand ling techniques
Evaluation of welds
a. Welding method review
b. Welding discontinuities
Origin and typical orientation of discontinuities
d. Radiographic appearance
e. Welding codes/standards - applicable acceptance criteria
(l) ASME BPV Sect. V and Sect. VIII

i.

f.

(2) Aws Dl.1

Reference radiographs or pictograms


Standards, Codes and Procedures for Radiography

A. ASTM 894/8142
b. Acceptable radiographic

techniques and setups

c. Applicable Akura's procedures


d. Procedure for radiograph parameter
e. Radiographic reports

verification

Total hours of instruction lor lhis course:


i. High school g@duate or equivalent - 20 hours
ii. Completion with passing $ades of at least two years of engineering or science
study at university, college or technical school 20 hours

MIAbqT'j[] R
PT. AI(URA BINA CITRA
WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL
QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFlCATION

Level III Topical Outline


1.

Principles/Theory
a. Nature ofpenetrating radiation
b. Interaction between penetrating radiation and matter
c. Imaging by film
d. Radiometry

2. EquipmentMaterials

a.
b.

Particulate radiation sources


Gamma-ray radiation sources
(1) Exposure devices

(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Source changers

Remote handling equipment

Collimators
Specific characteristics
o Half lives
o Energy levels
o Halfvalue layers
o Tenth value layers
c. Radiation detectors
(l) Imaging
o Film principles properties
. Fluoroscopy
o TV and optical systems
o Other non-film devices
(2) Non-imagingdevices
o Solid state detectors
r Gaseous ionization detectors
. Gauging and control processes
3. Techniques/Calibration
a- Imagingconsiderations
(l) Sensitivity
(2) Contrast and definition
(3) Geometric factors
(4) Intensifying screens
(5) Scatteredradiation
(6) Source factors
(7) Detection media
(8) Exposures curves
b. Film Processing
(1) Darkroom procedures
(2) Darkroom equipment and chemicals
(3) Film processing

DATE
01

-08-2012

PAGE
47 of 49

iMil/d S
PT, AI(IIRA BINA CITRA

DATE

01 08

2012

WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL


QUALIT'ICATION AND CERTIFICATION

c.

Viewing of radiographs
I) Illuminator requirements
(2) Backgroundlighting
(3) Optical aids
Judging radiographic quality
(l) Density
(2) Contrast and definition
(3) Artifacts
(4) IQIs
(5) Causes and correction of unsatisfactory radiographs
Exposurecalculations
Radiographictechniques
(1) Blocking and filtering
(2) Multi-filmtechniques
(3) Enlargement and projection
(4) Stereo-radiography
(5) Triangulationmethods
(6) Autoradiography
(7) Flash radiography
(8) In-motion radiography
(9) Fluoroscopy
( l0) Electron emission radiography
(11) Micro radiography
(12)Neutron radiography
(13) Control of diffiaction effects
(14) Pipe welding exposures
. Contact
. Elliptical
o Panoramic
(15) Gauging
( I 6) Real time imaging
(

d.

e.

f.

:f

(17) Image analysis techniques


( I 8) Image-object relationship

4.

Interpretation/Evaluation
a. Material consideration
(1) Materials processing as it affects use of items and test results
(2) Discontinuities, their cause and effects
(3) Radiographic appearance of discontinuities
(4) Non-relevant indications
(5) Film artifacts

5.

Procedures

lEl lit.
PAGE
48

ol49

PT. AI(URA BINA CITRA


WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR NDE PERSONNEL
QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

6.

Safety and Health in Radiography examination


a. Exposure hazards
Occupational dose limits
b. Methods ofcontrolling radiation exposure

(l)

(l

Time

(2) Distance (3) Shielding

c.
d.
e.

Inverse square law

o
o

Half value layers


Tenth value layers
Operational and emergency procedures
Dosimetry and film badges
Transportationregulation

PAGE
49 of 49

PT. AKT]RA BINA CITRA

AMENDMENT NOTES
oflssue

Date

June 2010

Affected Document : MT

- OCTC

02

The document divided into 4 (four) procedures as revision 01 in the following titles:

. ABC MT 0201 Yoke-Non Fluorescent Dry Powder Technique


. ABC MT - 0202 Yoke - Wet Fluorescent Particle Technique
. ABC MT - 0203 Coil - Continuous Fluorescent Particle Technique
. ABC - MT - 0204 Coil Residual Fluorescent Particle Technique
The applicable and relevant standard was changed from:

.
.

ASME BPV Sect. V Article 7,2004 Edition


AXME BPV Sect. V SE709

To be:

. ASTM E 709, 208 Edition


. DS I Volume 3, January 2004
. API RP 7G - 2, August 2009
All

sections and contents were totally different.

Issued by,

s{\.

\&,
.H
'\)

QA Department

I\,gAST'ER.
DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

04-01 -

MAGNETIC PART]CLE EXAM]NATION PROCEDURE


FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Ydre - Non Fluorescent Dry Powder Technique)

PAGE

2010

I of8

DOC. NO.
ABC-iVIT-0201

REV
I

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

MAGNETIC PARTTCLE EXAMINATION PROCEDITRE


FOROCTG INSPECTION
(Yoke - Non Fluorescent Dry Powder Technique)

DOCITMENT NO. : ABC

MT

NAME

SYAIFI]DIN ZJHRI

0201

REVIEWED BY

PREPARED BY
NAME

APPROYED BY
NAME

ARIANI WIDIAWATI

BONNIE F- AMRIL

POSITION
OPERATIONS MANAGER

QAMANAGER

ASNT

_NDT,I-EIEL III

TTJRE

ffi
DATE

:M-01-2010

DATE

:04- 01-2010

DATE

:04 -01-2010

M^&STER"
PT. AKURABINACITRA
MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDTIRE
FOR OCTG ]NSPECTION
(Ycfte - Non Fluorescell Dry Powdr Techique)

TABLEOFCONTENTS

SECTION

CONTENT

l-0

PAGE

2.0

CODES AND REFERENCES

3.0

PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION

4.0

EQUIPMENTS AND MATERTAL

5.0

SIIRFACE PREPARATION

6.0

CALIBRATION

7.O

EXAMTNATION PROCEDURE

8.0

ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS

9.0

DEMAGNETIZATION

10.0

POST EXAMINATION CLEANING

.7

1r.0

EXAMINATION REPORT

t2.o

SAFETY PRECAT]TIONS

ATTACHMENT
E)C{IBIT A

: Eleotromagoetic Yoke Calibration Report

S[AST'ER
PAGE

PT. AKI]RA BINA CITRA

3 of 8

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR OCTG ]NSPECTION
(Yoke - Non Fluorescent Dry Powder Technique)

1.

SCOPE

l.l

.2

This procedure covers Magnetic Particle Examination of slip and upset extemal
surfaces of used steel drill stem elements for transverse and three-dimensional flaws
using combination ofAC Yoke and Non Fluorescent Dry Powder Technique.

This procedure only govems Magnetic Particle Examination on surfaces with


temperature within 5'C

200'C.

1.3 This procedure shall be utilized upon the

performance

of

Magnetic Particle

Examination by PT. Akura Bina Citra (Akura)

1.4
,|

The materials, shapes, or sizes to be examined and the extent of the examination
shall be as specified by the Customer's Requirements.

CODES AND REFERENCES

2.1 ASTM E-709, Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination, 2008 Edition.
2.2 DS-l Volume 3, Drill Stem lnspection Standard, 3'd Edition January 2004.
2.3 NS-2 Volume l, Drill String Inspection Standard, I't Edition October 2005.

2.4
2.5

API RP 7G-2, Recommended Practice for Inspection and Classification of Used


Drill Stem Elements, 1"t Edition August 2009.
Akura Written Practice for NDT Personnel Qualification and Certification Doc. No.:
ABC-WP-o1 latest revision.

PERSOIINEL QUALIFICATION

All

personnel carry out Magnetic Particle Examination under this procedure shall be
qualified and certified in accordance with Akura Written Practice for NDT Personnel
Qualification and Ce(ification Doc. No.: ABC-WP-01 latest revision.

EQUIPMENTS AND MATERIAL

4.1

MagnetizingEquipment
Equipment used under this procedure shall be the Altemating Current (AC) Yokes
type. The equipment shall satisfactorily meet the requirement defined in Par.6.2 of
this procedure.

4.2

Examination Medium
Table I shall be used in the performance of Magnetic Particle Examination under
this procedure. At all times, valid materials certificates shall be available to any
conceming parties for verification between the batch number stated in the certificate
against the one printed on the aerosol cans.

&&ASTMR
PT. AKURABINACITRA
MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Yoke - Non Fluoresced Dry Powder Techrdque)

Table I

5.

Ready-tGrse Magnetic Particle Examination Medium


Color Under

Manufacturer

I)ry Particle

MAGNAFL{'X

#1 Gray

Gray or Off-white

MAGNAFL1IX

#8A Red

Dark red

CIRCLE
SYSTEMS

SIR.CIIEM DUSTING
POWDER63

Dark red

lilhite Lisht

SURFACEPREPARATION

5.1

Area to be examined shall be determined based on the customer request or as per the
requirement ofthe technical shndard used.

5.2

Examination shall only be conducted on uncoated (free from non-magretic coatings)


surfaces. The shiny metal surface shall be visible to the naked eye.

5.3

Prior to magnetic particle examination, the surface to be examined and all adjacent
areas within at least 1 inch {25 mm) shall be dry and free of all dirt, grease linr,
scale, oil, or other extraneous matter that could interfere with the examination- Wire
buffing wheels or soft grinding wheels may be used if necessary to remove hevy
deposits of mud or scale.

5.4

Temperature on the surface of the prt to be examined shall be within 5"C


This shall be verified by the use of a calibrated infrared thermometer.

200"C.

6. CALIBRATION

Calibration of Lifting Weight Standard


Each lifting weight standard shall be weighe.d with a scale from a reputable
manufacturer or independent laboratory and stenciled with the applicable nominal
weight. A certificate of the lifting stendard stating its nominal weight shall be
maintained on file. A weight standard shall be have its weight verified every 5
(five) years or when damaged in a manner that could have caused potential loss of
material, whichever comes first.

6.2

Lifting Power of Yokes


Prior to use, the magnetizing power of electromagretic yokes shall be checked
within the past year. Each AC yoke shall be able to Iift a standard weighr of at leas
10 lb (4.5 kg) at minimum 6 inch pole spaeing that will be ased for miuimum of 3
seconds. This calibration shall be verified every 6 (six) months or whenever the

6.

IVNASTER
PT. AKTIRA BINA CITRA
MAGNETIC PARTICI"E EXAMINAT]ON PROCEDURE
FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Yoke - Non Fluorescefi Dry Porvdr Techdque)

DATE

PAGE

04-01-2010

DOC. NO.
ABC-MT-O2OI

RETd

of8
t

electromagnetic yoke is suspected to have been damaged or after being repaired At


the minimum, the last calibration report (see Exhibit A) from that one that is
presently applicable shall be maintained on file.
6.3

Calibration of Visible Light Meter


Visible Light meter shall be calibrated at last every I (one) year or *;trenever the
meter has gone through major repair. Calibration shall be conducted by a reputable
agencyflaboratory. If meters have not been in used for I (one) year or more,
calibration shall be done before being used. At the minimum, the last calibration
report from the one that is presently applicable shall be mainlained on file.

6.4

Calibration of Infrared Thermometer


lnfrared Thermometer shall be calibrated at least once a year or whenever the meter has
gone tkough major repair by a reputable agencyllaboratory. If meters have not been in
used for one year or more, calibration shall be done before being used At the
minimum, the last calibration certificate from the one that is presently applicable shall
be maintained on file.

EXAMINATION PROCEDURE

7.1

Viewing Conditions
minimum light intensity of 100 fc (1000 lx) is required on the surface to be
examined to ensllle adequate sensitivity during the examination and evaluation of

indications.

7.2

MethodofExamination
Examination shall be done by the contifluous method. The dry particles must be
applied directly on the surface ofthe part while the AC Yoke's magnetizing curent
is tumed "on".

7.3

Method of Particle Application


Dry powder magnetic particles are to be lightly dusted or sprinkled onto the
examination surface. They are not to be applied by pouring, throwing or spreading
with fingers. The approved method is with a powder bulb u/ith multiple holes in the
end cap. Accumulation of excess particles ir the examination shall be removed by
slightly blowing or with other source of low pressure dry air. The ex*mination
current or power shall be maintained while removing the excess partiel$.

7.4

Magnetizing Field Adequacy and Direction


All examinations shall be conducted with sufficient overlap to asssre lt[P/o
coverage at the required sensitivity. For determinatior of yoke's overlap and
verification of magretic field adequacy due to reduction of contact surface between
the yoke leg and the part, a magnetic flux strip indicator (Burmah Castrol Type 1
containing three artificial defects) shall be used. Attach one flux indicator on the

SAAST'ER
PT. AKURABINACTTRA
MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Yoke - Non Fluorescetrt Dry Powder Technique)

part sudace snder examination so that its length is at right angles to the direction of
the applied flux. Magnetize the work piece by *re use of 6 inch maximum pole
spacing and contact area as the ones to be used for the examination. The
magnetization time shall not be less than 3 seconds. While the work piece is being
magnetized apply the magnetic particles. It is essential that the application of
magnetic particles stops before the end of magnetization. The direction and field
adequacy of t}te induced magnetic field is seen readily from fie response of the flux
indicators. The exact direction can be checked by re-orienlating the indicators with
respct to the direction ofthe field. The direction and field adequacy are considered
sufficient when 3 (three) lines on the strip axe clearly defined.
The yoke may overheat if energized for a long period. Indication of mit overheating
is the unit becomes too warm to hold comfortably. Normal operation is
intermittent, 50% duty cycle, with a maximum "on" time of 80 seconds.

if

7.1

Evaluationoflndication(s)
Discontinuities are indicated by the retention of the examination medium. However,
localized surface irregularities due to machining marks, magrretic permeabili$
variations such as at the edge ofheat affected zones or oths surface condition may
produce non-relevant indications. Broad areas of particle accumulation, which miglrt
mask indications from discontinuities, are prohibited, and such areas shall be
cleaned and reexamined.

8.

ACCEPTANCESTANDARDS
An indication ofan imperfection may be larger than the imperfection thal causes
the size of the indication is the basis for acceptance evaluation.

a.
b.

i{

hov*eyer

Indication characterized as cracks are unacceptatrle.


Hairline cracks in hard facing are acceptable so long as they do not extend into the
base metal-

Should Akura's customers have their own specific acceptance criteria for speific
application, they shall be thoroughly followed and upon conflict with this procedure,
customer's acceptance criteria shall prevail.

9.

DEMAGNETTZATION
Unless specified in the contract documents, demagnetization is not necessary to be done.
If the part is to be heat-treated after examination, it is also not necessary to colduct
demagnetization of the part previously examined.

N/IASTER.
PT. AKURABINACITRA
MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Yolce

Non Fluorescern

Dy

Powder Technique)

In

cases where demagnetization is specified, the AC yoke may be used to obhin a


satisfactory level of demagnetization- As applied in the initial exaninatian,
demagnetization is accomplished by placing the part across the poles while the *rrent is
flowing and slowly withdrawing it from the lield to a distance of at least 18 inches before
tuming the magnetizing current off.

10. POST

EXAMINATION CLE,ANING

After the examiration has been performed and all examination records have been
collected, post examination cleaning shall be done as soon as practical using a process that
doesn't adversely affect the part. Cleaning shall be done using simple water rinse or solvent
spray.

11.

EXAMINATION REPORT
OnIy rejectable indications need to be recorded. As a minimum, the type of indications and
their location shall be recorded on aprpropriate inspection report form. The report form shall
be custom made to suits the object being inspected and to meet customer's Quality
Assurance requirements. A copy of the inspection report shall be stored by Akura tbr at
least 5 (five) years or even longer if it is stated irt the contracting documents.

12.

SAFf,TYPRECAUTIONS
12.1 Care shall be exercised during examination for magnetic parlicle matoials, which are
relatively toxic.
12.2 Manufacturer's directions shall be followed at all times.
12.3 Electrical hazards like opened electrical wire from lighting source or magnetizing
equipment and the presence of short circuiting medium shall be trsted wit}l care.

N{AST'ER.
PT. AKURABINA CITRA

DAT.E

04-01 *

2010

MAGNETIC PARTTCLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


(Yok

FOR OCTG INSPECfiON


Non FluorssceDt Dry Powdex Techdque)

Exhibit A - ELECTROMAGNETIC YOKE CALIBRATION REPOBT

CALIBMTION OT ELECTROMAGNETIC YOKES

model
Yoke's serial no.
Yoke's make and

Referenced weight standard

:
:

ID

YOKE'S LIFTING POWER TEST RESULT


POWER SOURCE

This is

REFERENCED

WEIGHT

POLE SPACING

UFTING
TIME

to confirm thol the instrument obove meet the requirement of Document No.

Calibrated by

Date of Calibration
Next recommended calibration

RESULT

MASTER
DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

01

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMTNATION


PROCEDURE FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Yoke

PAGE

1of10

-06-2010

DOC. NO.
ABC _MT _ O2O2

Wt Fluorescent Particl Technique)

REV
I

PT. AKI]RA BINA CITRA

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Yoke

Wet Fluorescent Particle Technique)

DOCUMENT NO : ABC

PREPARED BY
NAME

POSITION

QA MANAGER

APPROVED BY

BONNIE F. AMRIL

OPERATIONS MANAGER

t,"*rrw

0202

NAME

ARIANI WIDIAWATI

POSITION

REVIEWED BY
NAME

SYAIFTJDIN ZUHRI

MT

ASNT NDT

LEVEL III

ffi
DATE

:01

-06-2010

DATE

:01

06

2010

DATE

:01

06

2010

MASTER
I,,I. AIruRABINA CITRA

DATE

0l 06 2010

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMTNATION


PROCEDI-]RE FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Yoke

Wet Fluorescent Particle Technique)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION

CONTENT

PAGE

1.0

scoPE..............

2.0

CODES AND

6.0

REFERENCES.........
PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION....
EQUIPMENTS AND MATERIAL
SURFACE PREPARATION...........
CALIBRATION

7.0

EXAMINATION ENVIRONMENT & VIEWING

8.0

CONDITION
EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
ACCEPTANCE STANDARD

3.0
4.0
5.0

9.0
10.0

.........
.....,....
..........
..........,3

3
3
3

_4

....,....

...........

-7
........... 7 -8
6

.................

EXAMINATION OF AREAS FROM WHICH


IMPERFECTION HAVE BEEN REMOVED.....................

I 1.0

RE-EXAMINATION OF REPAIRED AREA.....................

12.0

DEMAGNETIZATION

13.0

POST EXAMINATION CI,EANING

14.0

EXAMINATION

15.0

.................

REPORT...............
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS..............
ATTACHMENT

EXHIBIT A : Electromagnetic Yoke Calibration Report

9
9

9
9

PAGE

2ofl0

&,flAST'&R

ffi
I.

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE

0l

06

PAGE

2010

of l0

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION


PROCEDURE FOR OCTC INSPECTION
(Yok - Wet Fluorescent Particle Iechnique)

SCOPE

1.1

This procedure covers Magnetic Particle Examination of extemal surface


elements for transverse, longitudinal and three-dimensional flaws.

ofdrill

stem

1.2 This procedure only govems Magnetic Particle


temperature within 5"C
Particle Technique.

Examination on surfaces with


52"C using combination of AC Yoke and Wet Fluorescent

1.3 This

procedure shall be utilized upon the performance


Examination by PT. Akura Bina Citra (Akura).

1.4

2.

of

Magnetic Particle

The materials, shapes, or sizes to be examined and the extent of the examination shall
be as specified by the Customer's Requirements.

CODESANDREFERENCES
2.1

2.2
2.3
2.4

ASTM E 709" Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination, 2008 Edition.
DS-1 Volume 3, Drill Stem Inspection Standard, 3'd Edition January 2004.
API RP 7G-2, Recommended Practice for Inspection and Classification of Used Drill
Stem Elements, I't Edition August 2009.
Akura Written Practice for NDT Personnel Qualification and Certification Doc. No.:
ABC-WP-0l latest revision.

PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION

All

personnel carry out Magnetic Particle Examination under this procedure shall be
qualified and certified in accordance with Akura Written Practice for NDT Personnel
Qualification and Certification Doc. No.: ABC-WP-01 latest revision.

EQUIPMENTS AND MATERIAL

4.1

MagnetizingEquipment
Equipment used under this procedure shall be of the Altemating Current (AC) Yokes
type. The equipment shall satisfactorily meet the requirement defined in Par.6.2 of
this procedure.

4.2

Exarnnation Medium

Table 1 and Table

shall be used

Examination under this procedure.

in the performance of

Magnetic Particle

&&AST'ER
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE

PAGE

0l -06-2010

4of10

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION


PROCEDURE FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Yoke

Wet Fluorescent Particle Technique)

For material in Table 1 , the magnetic particle bath shall be checked for its strenglh as
specified in Par. 6.6 of this procedure.

For materials in Table 2, these products are prepared by their manufacturers and
therefore they are ready to be used without additional verification.

Table 1
Manufacturer
MAGNAFLUX

Self-prepared Magnetic Particle Examination Medium

Magnetic Particle
vehicle
Carrier

II or

Fluorescent
Maonetic Particle

Color Under

14A

Brown

20B

Brown

Kerosene

Water

MAGNAFLUX

Table 2

5.

white Lioht

Color Under
Black Lioht
Yellow-green
fluorescence

Yellow-green
fluorescence

Ready-to-use Magnetic Particle Examination Medium


color Under
Black Lioht

Manufacturer

Fluorescent Magnetic
Particle Bath

Color Under

MAGNAFLUX

14AM

Brown

Yellow-green
fluorescence

MAGNAFLUX

144 Aqua-Glo

Brown

Yellow-green
fluorescence

white Lioht

SURFACEPREPARATION
5.1

Determination of Examination Area


The customer shall be consulted to designate which part ofthe drill stem elements are
subject to examination. This can be referenced from the applicable standards, specific
engineering analysis or for prove-up purposes.

5.2

Examination shall only be conducted on uncoated (free from non-magnetic coatings)


surfaces. The examination area and all adjacent area within at least I inch (25 mm)
shall be re-conditioned to the degree where the shiny metal surface is visible to the
naked eye and no traces of other extraneous matter that could interfere with the
examination are detectable by wiping with a dry, unused white paper towel or tissue.

5.3

Wire buffing wheels or soft grinding wheels may be used if necessary to remove
heavy deposits of mud or scale.

5.4

Temperature on the surface of the part to be examined shall be within 40"F 125"F
(5'C - 52'C). This shall be verified by the use ofa calibrated infrared thermometer.

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

rffi

DATE

PAGE

0l -06-2010

5of10

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION


PROCEDURE FOR OCTG INSPECTION

(Yoke

Wet Fluorescent Particle Technique)

6. CALIBRATION

6.1

Calibration of Lifting Weight Standard


Each lifting weight standard shall be weighed with a scale from a reputable
manufacturer or independent laboratory and stenciled with the applicable nominal
weight. A certificate of the lifting standard stating its nominal weight shall be
maintained on file. A weight standard need only be calibrated again if damaged in a
marmer that could have caused potential loss of material.

6.2

Lifting Power of Yokes


Prior to use, the magnetizing power of electromagnetic yokes shall be checked within
the past year. Each AC yoke shall be able to lift a standard weight of at least 10 lb
(a.5 kg) at minimum 6 inch pole spacing that will be used for minimum of 3
seconds. This calibration shall be verified every 6 (six) months or whenever the
elechomagrretic yoke is suspected to have been damaged or after being repaired. At
the minimum, the last calibration report (see Exhibit A) from that one that is
presently applicable shall be maintained on file.

6.3

Calibration of Visible Light Meter


Visible Light meter shall be calibrated at least every 1 (one) year or whenever the
meter has gone through major repair. Calibration shall be conducted by a reputable
agency/laboratory. If meters have not been in used for I (one) year or more,
calibration shall be done before being used. At the minimum, the last calibration
report from the one that is presently applicable shall be maintained on file.

6.4

Calibration of Black Light Meter


Black light meter shall be calibrated at least every 6 (six) months or whenever the
meter has gone through major repair. Calibration shall be conducted by a reputable
agency/laboratory. If meters have not been in used for 6 (six) months or more,
calibration shall be done before being used. At the minimum, the last calibration
report from the one that is presently applicable shall be maintained on file.

6.5

Calibration of Infrared Thermometer


Infrared Thermometer shall be calibrated at least once a year or whenever the meter has
gone through major repair by a reputable agency/laboratory. If meters have not been in
used for one year or more, calibration shall be done before being used. At the minimum,
the last calibration certificate from the one that is presently applicable shall be
maintained on file.

6.6

Wet Particle Bath Concentration (Strenglh)


Bath concentration checks shall be done at the beginning of the examination day,
every 4 hours of usage, whenever a new batch is prepared, and upon finishing the
examination ofthe day.

N/[AST'ER
DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

01

06

2010

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION


PROCEDURE FOR OCTG TNSPECTION
(Yoke - Wet Fluorescent Particle Technique)

This is accomplished through the use of an ASTM Test Method D 96 pear-shaped


ceatrifuge tube with 0.05-mL divisions (see Fig. 1). Before sampling, vigorously
agitate the container from which the bath is placed to ensure thorough mixing of all
particles. Flow the bath mixture through hose and nozzle at least two times to clear
the hose.

Take a 100-mL portion of the suspension from the hose or nozzle; allow it to settle
for approximately 60 minutes with petroleum distillate suspensions or 30 minutes
with water-based suspensions. The settled volume shall be between 0.1-mL to 0.4mL in a 100-mL bath sample. This measurement shall be done under visible light.

mt

-50

='?s
-:"/
ia/

Figure 1

7. EXAMINATION
7

.1

ASTM Test Method D 95 Pear-Shaped Centrifuge Tube

(Shaded areas shows settling range)

ENVIRONMENT & VIEWING CONDITIONS

Viewing Conditions

All examination performed under this procedure shall

done in a darkened area. It shall


be ensured that the ambient visible light intensity in the area of examination does not
exceed 2 fc (21.5 lux).

NEASTER

ffi

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE

0l -06-2010

PAGE
7

of l0

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION


PROCEDURE FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Yoke

Wet Fluorscent Particle Technique)

7.2

The examiner shall be in the darkened area for at least 2 minutes prior to performing
the examination to enable their eyes to adapt to dark viewing. If the examiner wears
glasses or lenses, they shall not be photosensitive.

7.3

The black light shall be allowed to warm up at sufficient time to ensure it emits a
stable UV light intensity. A minimum light intensity of 1000 pWcm2 at 15 inches
from the light source is required on the surface to be examined to ensure adequate
sensitivity during the examination and evaluation of indications.

7.4

Both the black (UV) light intensity and ambient visible light intensity shall be
verified using the proper light meter at the start of examination, whenever power
source ofthe black light is changed, after every 8 hours of operation and at the end of
examination or series of examinations-

8. EXAMINATION
8.1

PROCEDURE

Method of Examination for Transverse Oriented Flaws


After the requirements of Par. 7.1 and Par. 7.2 are satisfted, place the yoke
longitudinally oriented to the pipe length on the outside surface of the drill stem
elements. Examination shall be done by the continuous method. While the
magnetizing current is tumed on, apply the wet particle to the examination surface by
gently spraying the magnetic particle bath in the magnetized area (the whole area
between the yoke pole and 50 mm on either side of the axis of the yoke pole.
Maintain the yoke energized for at least 3 seconds while the wet particles are still
wetting the surface. Any particle application shall cease before the source of the
mugnetizing current is removed. Accumulation of excess particles shall be removed
by blowing or othff source of low pressure dry air. The magnetizing current shall
be maintained while removing the excess particles.

with overlap
pipe
not more than 100 mm throughout the
circumference. Mark any relevant
Repeat the above mentioned technique and continue to move the yoke

indications found using indelible markers.

8.2

Method of Examination for Longitudinally Oriented Flaws


After the steps described in Par 8.1 have been completed, tum the yoke right angle to
its previous orientation (transverse across the pipe) and rcpeat the procedure as
describe in Par. 8.1 .

8.3

Magnetizing Field Adequacy and Direction


All examinations shall be conducted with sufficient overlap to assure 100% coverage
at the required sensitivity. Yoke's overlap shall not exceed that detailed in Fig. 1.
Verification of magnetic field adequacy due to reduction of contact surface between
the yoke leg and the part, a magnetic flux strip indicator (Burmah Castrol Type I

A/nAST'ER
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA
MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION
PROCEDURE FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Yoke - Wet Fluorescent Particle Technique)

DATE

0t

06

PAGE

2010

DOC.NO.
ABC _MT

O2O2

of l0

REV
I

containing three artificial defects) shall be used. Attach one flrx indicator on the
part surface under examination so that its length is at right angles to the direction of
the applied flux. Magnetize the work piece by the use of the same pole spacing and
contact area as the ones to be used for the examination. The magnetization time
shall not be less than 3 seconds. While the work piece is being magnetized apply the
magnetic particles. It is essential that the application of magnetic particles stops
before the end of magnetizalion. The direction and field adequacy of the induced
magnetic field is seen readily from the response of the flux indicators. The exact
direction can be checked by re-orientating the indicators with respect to the direction
of the field. The direction and field adequacy are considered sufficient when 3 (three)
lines on the strip are clearly defined.

8.4

9.

Evaluation of Indication(s)
Discontinuities are indicated by the retention of the examination medium. However,
localized surface inegularities due to machining marks, magnetic permeability
variations such as at the edge of heat affected zones or other surface condition may
produce non-relevant indications. Broad areas of particle accumulation, which might
mask indications from discontinuities, are prohibited, and such areas shall be cleaned
and reexamined.

ACCEPTANCESTANDARDS
An indication of an imperfection may be larger than the imperfection that causes it; however
the size of the indication is the basis for acceptance evaluation.

a.
b.

10.

Indication characterized as cracks are unacceptable.


Hairline cracks in hardfacing are acceptable so long as they do not extend into the base
metal.

EXAMINATION OF AREAS FROM WHICH IMPERFECTION HAVE BEEN


REMOVED
Upon request, the area in which the defect has been removed (prior to making any repairs)
shall be re-examined in accordance with this procedure to ensure that the defect has been
removed or reduced to an acceptable size of imperfection.

1I. RE-EXAMINATION OF REPAIRED AREA

After the repair is completed and the surface has been smoothly finished, the reexamination of repaired area shall be performed in accordance with this procedure.

N6ASTE$&
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE

PAGE

0l -06-2010

9of10

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION


PROCEDURE FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Yoke - Wet Fluorescent Particl Techniquo)

12.

DEMAGNETIZATION
Unless specifred in the contract documents, demagnetization is not necessary to be done. If
the part is to be heat-treated after examination, is also not necessary to conduct
demagrretization of the part previously examined.

it

is specified, the AC yoke may be used to obtain a


demagnetization. As applied in the initial examination,
demagnetization is accomplished by placing the part across the poles while the current is
flowing and slowly withdrawing it from the field to a distance of at least 18 inches before
tuming the magnetizing current off.
In

cases where demagnetization

satisfactory level

13. POST

of

EXAMINATION CLEANING

After the examination has been performed and all examination records have been collected,
post examination cleaning shall be done as soon as practical using a process that doesn't
adversely affect the part. Cleaning shall be done using simple water rinse or solvent spray.

14.

EXAMINATION REPORT
Only rejectable indications need to be recorded. As a minimum, the type of indications and
their location shall be recorded on appropriate inspection report form. The report form shall
be custom made to suits the object being inspected and to meet customer's Quality
Assurance requirements. A copy of the inspection report shall be stored by Akura for at
least 5 (five) years or even longer if it is stated in the contracting documents.

15.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
15.1 Care shall be exercised during examination for magnetic particle materials, which are
relatively toxic and highly flammable.
15.2 Manufacturer's directions shall be followed at all times.
15.3 Smoking is prohibited while performing magnetic particle examination.
15.4 Electrical hazards like opened electrical wire from lighting source or magnetizing
equipment and the presence of short circuiting medium shall be treated with care.
15.5 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each magnetic particle materials shall be
consulted in determining the proper method for the disposal ofused pressurized spray
cans and liquid residue waste.

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE

01

*06-2010

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION


PROCEDURE FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Yoke

Exhibit A

Wet Fluorescent Particle Technique)

- ELECTROMAGNETIC YOKE CALIBRATION

REPORT

CALIBRATION OF ELECTROMAGNETIC YOKES

Yoke's make and model


Yoke's serial no.
Referenced weight standard ID

YOKE'S LIFTING POWER TEST RESULT


POWER SOURCE

This is

REFERENCED

WEIGHT

POLE SPACING

LIFTING
TIME

RESULT

to confirm thot the inslrument obove meet the requirement of Document

No.

Calibrated by

Date of Calibration

Next recommended cal ibration

MASTElR.
DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITBA

04-01 -

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR OCTG INSPECTION
{Coil - Continuous Fluotescent Particle Tectrnique)

PAGE

2010

l ofI0

DOC-NO,

REV

ABC-MT.T}203

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDTXRE


FOROCTG INSPECTTON
(Coil

Continuous Fluorescent Particle Technique)

DOCUMENT NO. : ABC

PREPARED BY

REVIEWED BY

MT

0203

APPROWI} RY

NAME
SYAIFUDIN ZIIHR]

POSITION

ARIANI WIDIAWATI

BONNIE F. AMRIL

POSIIION

OPERATIONS MANAGER

QAMANAGER

ASNT _ NDT - LE\'EL

I]I

SIGNATTJRE

DATE

ffi
:04- 0l -2010

w;';,,"

DATE

|04-0l-2010

DATE-

..3

ii*rr,.1"-

:04-0t-2010

n/flASTER.
PT. AKURABINA CITR.A
MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR OCTG INSPECTION
{Coil - Continuous Fluorescent Particle Technique)

TABLEOFCONTENTS

SECTION

CONTETTT

PAGE

1.0

.,.......

2.0

CODES AND REFERENCES

3.0

PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION

4.0

EQTIIPMENTS AND MATERIAL

5.0

SURIACE PREPARATION

6.0

CALIBRATION

7.4

EXAMINATION ENVIRONMENT AND VIEWINC

CONDITIONS

8.0

EXAMINATION PROCEDURE

9.0

ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS

10.0

DEMAGNETZATION

I
I

11.0

POSTEXAMINATION

t2.o

EXAMINATION REPORT

10

13.0

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

lo

A/[ASTMR
PT. AKURABINA CTTRA
MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR OCTG INSPECTION
{Coil - Co*inuous Fluorescent Particle Technique)

1.

SCOPE
1.

This procedure covers the performance of Magnetic Particle Examination in


ferromagnetic connections for transverse surface flaws using combination of mdtiturn HWDC coil (longitudinal magnetization) tecfudque with {Iuoresceli wet
particles.

l-2

This procedue shall be applied to detect discontinuities that are open to or near the
surfacq oriented transvercely to th length of the tubular product and is not intnded
to replace visual examinati on.

1.3

This procedure is to be used utilizing continuous (active field) magnetization.

1.4 This procedure shall be utilized upon the performance of

Magnetic Particle

Examination by PT. Akura Bina Citra (Akura).

L5

This procedure only govems Magrretic Particle Examination on surfaces with


temperature within 5'C

1.6

52"C.

The materials, shapes, or sizes to be examined and the extent of tlre examination
shal1 be as specified by the Customer's Requirements.

2.

CODESANDREFERENCES

2.1
2.2
2.3

ASTM E 709, Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination, 2008 Edition.
DS-l Volume 3, Drill Stem Inspection Standaxd, 3d Edition January 2004.
Akura Written Practice for NDT Personnel Qualification and Certification Doc. No.:
ABC-WP-0 I latest revision.

PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION

All

personnel carry out Magnetic Particle Examination under this procedure shall be
qualified and certified in accordance with Akura Written Practice for NDT Personnel
Qualification and Certification Doc. No.: ABC-WP-OI Iatest revision,

EQTMMENT AND MATERIAI-S

4.1

MagnetizingEquipment
Equipment used under this procedure shall be a pro-wound mllti-turn fixed
EWIIC coil. The current output shall be clearly marked on the equipment The

&4iAST'MR.
DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CTTRA

04-01 -

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Coil * Conrinuous Ffuorescert Particle Technique)

PAGE

2010

4ofl0

DOC.NO.

REY

ABC-MT.O203

accuracy of unit's current ouhut shall be verified as specified in Par. 6.3


procedure.

4.2

of this

Examination Medium

Table 1 and Table

shall be used

in the

perfonnance

of Magretic

Particle

Examination under this procedure.


For material in Table 1, the magnetic particle bath shall be checked for its strength as
specified in Par. 6-5 ofthis procedure.

For materials in Table 2, these products are prepared by their manufacturers and
therefore they are ready to be used without addjtional verification.
Table

Magnetic Particle
Vehicle
Carrier II or

Manufacturer

MAGNAFLIIX

Fluorescent
Masnetic Particle

Color Under
lYhite Lisht

144'

Brown

208

Brovrn

Kerosene

MAGNAFLUX

Water

Table

Manufacturer

5.

Self-prepared Magnetic Particle Examination Medium

Color lInder

BlackLisht
Yellow-green
fluorescence
Yellow-green
fluorescence

Ready-to-use Magnetic Particle Examiration Medium

Fluorescent Magnetic
Particle Bath

Color Under
lYhite Lisht

MAGNAFLUX

14AM

Brown

MAGNAFLUX

I4A Aqua-Glo

Brown

Color Under Black

Lisht
Yellow-green
fluorescence
Yellow-green
fluorescence

SURf,'ACf, PREPARATION

5.1

Examination shall only be conducted on uncoated (free from non-magnetic coatings)


surfaces. The shiny metal surface shall be visible to the naked eye and no traces of
grease or thread dope are detectable by wiping with a dry, unused white paper towel
or tissue.

5.2

The examination surface includes the entire machined areas of both pin and bori
including the entire pin ID for a lenglh exceeding the threaded length, a minimum of
1 inch beyond the Iast thread in a non-stress relieved box and tle external surfaces of
the box drill pipe tool joint from the shoulder to the taper.

MASTMR
PT. AKURA BINACITRA

DATE
04

-41

-ml{}

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Coit

5.3

Continuous Fluorescent Particle Technique)

Wire buffing wheels or soft grinding rl,heels may be used if necessary to rsmove
heaqr deposits of mud or scale.

5.4

Temperature on the surface of the part to be examined shall be within 40"F


125"F
(5"C - 52'C). This shall be verified by the use ofa calibrated irfiared thermometer.

CALIBRATION

Calibration of Visible Light Meter


Visible Light meter shall be calibrated at least every I (one) ymr or whenever the
meter has gone through major repair. Calibration shall be condrrted by a reputable
agency/laboratory. If meters have not been in used for 1 (one) year or more,
calibration shall be done before being used. At the minimurq the last calibratiotr
report {iom the one that is presently applicable shall be maintained on file.

6.2

Calibrafion of Black Light Meter


Black light meter shall be calibrated at least every 6 (six) months or whenever t}le
meter has gone tkough major repair. Calibration shall be conducted by a reputable
agencyflaboratory. If meters have not been in used for 6 (six) months or morc,
calibration shall be done before being rxed. At the minimum, &e last calibration
report from the one that is presently applicable shall be maintained on file.

6.3

DC Coil Current Output Calibration


The DC coil shall be calibrated at least every one year iaterval or whenever the unit
has gone tlrough major repair. Number of coil-turn shall be clearly marked on tlre
unit and manufacturer's technical statement documenting the actual number of coilturn shall be maintained on file.

6.

coil being utilize by Akura has fix cunent ouprfr and number
of coil tum, the calibration conducted by the agency/laboratory shall contain the
following information:
Since the type of DC

Voltage being used


The current output for each voltage being used

The DC coil magnetizing field strength (ampere-turns) shall be determined by


multipllng the number of coil tum in the unit with the current output stated in the
calibration report.

6.4

Calibration of Infrared Thermometer


lnfrared thermometer shall be calibrated at least once a year or trihenever the meter has
gone through major repair by a reputable agurcyllaboratory. If meters have not been in
used for one year or mole, calibration shall be done before being used. At the

NflASTMR
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA
MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
rOR OCTG INSPECT]ON
(Coil - Continuous Fluorescer* Particle Tecluique)

minimum, the last calibration certificate from the one that is presently applicable shall
be maintained on file.

6.5

Wet Paricle Bath Corcentation (Strengfh)


Bath concentration checks shall be done at the beginning of tlre examination day,
every 4 hours of usage, whenever a new batch is prepred, and upon finishing the
examination of the day.

This is accomplished through the use of an ASTM Test Method D 96 pear-shaped


centrifuge tube with 0.05-mL divisions (see Fig. I). Before s*mpling vigorously
agitate thc contairer Ilom which the bath is placed to ensure thorough mixing of all
particles. Flow the bath mixfure through hose and nozzle at least two times to clear
the hose.

Take a 100-mL portion of the suspension from the hose or nozle: allolv it to settle
for approximately 60 minutes with petroleum distillate suspe{Biors or 30 minutes
with water-based suspensions. The settled volume shall be betyeen 0.1-mL to 0.4mL in a 100-mL bath sample. This measurement shall be done urder visible light.

-50
-a

;=l
-.1

Figs.e 1 - ASTIq Test Metfiod O 96 Pcar-Shapd Certrifsge Trrb


(shaded areas shows settling range)
1

EXAMINATION EIYVIRONMENT & I'IEWING CONDITIOilS

7.1

Viewing Conditions
All examination performed under this procedure shall done in a darkened area lt
shall be ensured that the ambient visible light intensity in the area of examination
does not exceed 2 fc (2 1 5 lwr).
.

&fiASTM]R
PT. AKURABINA CITRA

DATE

04-01-20t0

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Coil - Continuous Fluoresetrt Particle Tehniquo)

7.2

The examiner shall be in the darkened area for at least 2 minutes prior to performing
the examination to enable their eyes to adapt to dark viewing. If the examiner wears
glasses or lenses, they shall oot be photosensitive.

7.3

The black light shall be allowed to warm up at suffrcient time to ensure it emits a
stable UV light intensity. A minimum light intensity of 1000 pWcm2 at 15 inches
from the light source is required on the surface to be examined to ensure adsquate
sensitivity during the examination and evaluation of indications.

7.4

Both the black (IJV) light intensity and ambient visible light intensity shall be
verified using the proper light meter af the start of examination, whenwer power
source of the black light is changed, after every I hours of operation and at tlre end
of examination or series ofexaminations.

EXAMINATIONPROCEDURE

8.1

Preparation of Magnetization System

8.1.1

Check for Pre-existing Magnetic Field


Check the inspection surfaces for the presence and direction of any residual
pocket magnetometer (Gauss rneter). The
magnetic field using
magnetometer shall be placed at the furthest end oftbe tubular product. Mark
each end "N' (north pole) or "S" (south pole), whichever applies.

8.1.2

Magoetizing Requirements

8.1.2.1 Selection of Coil Dmension


The coil to be selected in aay exarnination under this procedure
shall have maximum inside diameter dimension twicc the crosssectional area (including hollow portions) of the part under test

8.1.2.2 Placement of Coil


The coil shall be placed directly over the midpoint of the area to be
examined and in such a manner as to rcinforce (mt oppose) any
existing longitudinal magnetic field as described in Par. 8.1.1. For
the purpose of this paragraph the coil should be placed so that the
pipe is practica-lly centered at the coil opo,ing-

8.1.2.3 Determination of number of coil fums and current


The magnetic field required is specified ir ampereturus and
determined using Equation I below.

SfiASTER
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA
MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Coil - Continuous Fluorescent Particle Tech.uique)

= 1200 Dp (+l0o/ol

Equation I

where:

Dp = Pipe OD (inch)
N : Number of coil tums
: Current applied to the coil (amps)
I
8.2

Magretizing Field Adequacy


Proper field magnitude and orientation shall be verified under black light with using
a magnetic flux strip indicator (Burmah Castrol Type I coutaining three
artificial defects). The magnetic flux indicator shall be placed on the internal
surface of each corurection while the wet particle suspension is being applied and the
current activated. The direction and field adequacy are considered sufficient when 3
(three) lines on the strip indicator are clearly defined. If the proper fleld is not
present on any examinalion surface, the componenl shall be considered nol
applicable for examination under this procedure.

8.3

Method of Examination
Examination shall be done by the continuous method. After the requirernents ofPar.
8-l and Par 8.2 are satisfied, magnetize the connection so as to reinforce the preexisting magnetic fie1d (as per 8.1.1). While the magnetizing current is tumed orq
apply the wet particle to the examination surface until no visible gaps is seer
Maintain the current on for at least 3 seconds while the wet particles are still wetting
the surface. Any particle application shall cease before the source ofthe magnetizing
current is removed.

8.4

Excess Particle Removal

Accumulation of excess particles shall be removed by blowing or other source of


low pressure dry air. The magnetizing current shrll be maintained wkile
removing the excess particles.
8.5

Evaluation of Indication(s)
Examine the examination surfaces under black light (meeting the requirements of
Par. 7) after the excess wet fluorescenl particles have been removed- Unless the
tubular product is vertical, each length shall be rolled to allow 360' observation and
to allow areas under the wet bath "puddles" to be examined, A mirror shall be used
to examine box thread roots. Particular attention should be given to the la^st ergaged
thread roots of pin and box.

N&ASTER
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA
MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Coil

9.

Continuous Fluorescent Particle Technique)

ACCEPTANCESTANI}ARDS
An indication of an imperfection may be Iarger than the imperfection that causs ig however
the size of the indication is the basis for acceptatrc evaluafion-

a- lndication characterized as cracks are unacceptable.


b. Hairline cracks in hardfacing are acceptable so long as they do not extend into the base
metal.

c.

Heat checking cracks on the box tool joint surface, excluding hardbardi
rejectable if any one ofthe following criteria axe met:

o
r
.
10-

&

are

Linear indications cover 30olo or more of the tool joint surface's circumference or
lotal area.
Any linear indication is equal to or greater thal 1/8 inch in lengthAly linear indication is located within % inch ofthe bevel.

DEMAGNETIZATTON
Unless specified in the contract documents, demagnetization is not necessary to be done. If
required, demagnetization shall be done using an AC coil having the same inside diameter
as the HWDC coil previously used to magnetiza the paf', The de-magnetization current
used shall be at least equal to current used in Par 8.1.2.3 of this procedure. The coil shall
be withdrawn from the tubular product while magnetizing current is tumed on to a
distance of approximately I (one) meter *om the end ofthe tubular prodrrct.

Demagnetization is considered satisfactory when the residual magnet measured at the end
of the tubular product, verified by the use of a pocket magnetometer (Gauss meterl is not
more than 5 Gauss.

11. POST

EXAMINATION CLEANING

After the examination has been performed and all examination records have been
collected, post examinafion cleaning shall be done as soofl as practical ming a process that
doesn't adversely affect the part. Cleaning shall be done using simple water rinse or soivent
spray.

Ail

acceptable connections shall be coated with an API Tool Joint Compound over all firead
and shoulder surfaces, including the end of the pin. Tkead protectors shall be applied and
secured using 50 to 100 ftlbs oftorque. The tkead protectors shall be free ofxry debris.

NIAST'ER
DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

04*0t -

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Coil

12.

Contiruous Fluoresceu Particle Tochnique)

2010

DOC,NO.
ABC.MT-0203

PAGE

l0 of l0
,REV
1

EXAMINATION REPORT
Only rejectable indications need to be recorded- As a nrinimum, the type of indications and
their location shall be recorded on appropriate inspection report form. The report form shall
be custom made to suits the object being inspected ard to meet customer's Qualiry
Assurance requirernents- A copy of the inspection report shall be stored by Akura for at
Ieast 5 (five) years or even longer if it is stated in the contracting docrunents.

13. SAFETY PRE,CAUTIONS

13.1 Care shall be exercised during examination for magnetic particle materials, *trich are
relatively toxic and highly flammable.
13.2 Manufacturer's directions shall be followed at all times.

13.3 Smoking is prohibite while performing magnetic particle examination


13.4 Elecrical hazards like opened electrical wire from lighting source or magnetizing
equipment and the presence of short circuiting medium sltall b trtated with care.

I3.5 Controlled condifions shall be established for


callls.

correct disposal of pressurized aerosol

S/flASTER
DATE

PAGE

0l -06-2010

I of l0

DOC. NO.
ABC _MT _ O2O4

REV

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA


MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION
PROCEDT]RE FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Coil ResidualFluorescentParticleTechnique)

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Coil

Residual Fluorescent Particle Technique)

DOCIIMENT NO : ABC

- MT -

REWEWED BY

PREPARED BY
NAME

ARIANI WTDIAWATI

SYAIFUDIN ZUHRI

POSITION

BONNIE F. AMRIL

OPERATIONS MANAGER

QA MANAGER

APPROVED BY
NAME

NAME

POSITION

0204

ASNT NDT

_ LEVEL III

SIONATURE

DATE

ffi

:01-06

'frATE

:01-06-2010

DATE

:0t -

06

2010

EflAST'ER.
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE
01

PAGE

-06-2010

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION


PROCEDURE FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Coil - Residual Fluorescent Particle Techniquo)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION

1.0

2.0
3.0

CONTENT

scoPE............
coDEs AND REFERENCES......

.............
..............
PERSONNELQUALTFTCATTON... ............

6.0

MATERIAL
SURFACEPREPARATION.
CALIBRATION

7.0

EXAMINATION ENVIRONMENT & VIEWING

4.0
5.0

8.0
9.0
10.0
I 1.0
12.0
13.0

PAGE

EQUTPMENTS AND

............3

3
3
3

-5
5

..............5-7

CONDITION
7
EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
............ 8_9
ACCEPTANCESTANDARD .................. 9
DEMAGNETIZATION.........-,..,
9
POSTEXAMINATIONCLEANING ................
iO
EXAMINATION REPORT...,.,....
IO
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.........,.
IO

2of10

A/flASTmR
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

ffi]
1.

DATE

01

,06 -

PAGE

2010

3ofl0

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION


PROCEDURE FOR OCT6 INSPECTION
Residual FluorescentParticle Technique)

(Coil

SCOPE
I

.1

This procedure covers the performance of Magnetic Particle Examination in


ferromagnetic tubular products using combination of multi-turn HWDC coit
(longitudinal magnetization) technique with fl uorescent wet particles.

1.2

This procedure shall be applied to detect discontinuities that are open to or near the
surface oriented transversely to the length of the tubular product. Residual method
shall be used and is not intended to replace visual examination.

1.3 This

procedure shall be utilized upon the performance


Examination by PT. Akura Bina Ciffa (Akura).

2.

Magnetic Particle

This procedure only govems Magnetic Particle Examination on surfaces with


temperature within 5'C

i.5

of

52"C.

The materials, shapes, or sizes to be examined and the extent of the examination shall
be as specified by the Customer's Requirements.

CODES AND RET'ERENCES


2.1

2.2
2.3
2.4

ASTM E 709, Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination, 2008 Edition.
DS-1 Volume 3, Drill Stem Inspection Standard, 3'd Edition January 2004.
API RP 7G-2, Recommended Practice for Inspection and Classification of Used Drill
Stem Elements, lst Edition August 2009.
Akura Written Practice for NDT Personnel Qualification and Certification Doc. No.:
ABC-WP-01 latest revision.

PERSONNEL QUALTFICATTON

All

personnel carry out Magnetic Particle Examination under this procedure shall be
qualified and certified in accordance with Akura Bina Citra Written Practice for NDT
Personnel Qualification and Certification Doc. No.: ABC-WP-O1 latest revision.

EQUIPMENT AI\D MATERIALS

4.1

MagnetizingEquipment
Equipment used under this procedure shall be a pre-wound multi-turn {ixed HWDC
coil. The cuffent output shall be clearly marked on the equipment. The accuracy of
unit's current output shall be verified as specified in Par. 6.3 of this procedure.

NflASTER
DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

0l

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION

06

PAGE

4ofl0

2010

DOC.NO.

PROCEDURE FOR OCTG INSPECTION


Residual Fluorescent Particle Technique)

ABC

(Coil

,MT -

O2O4

The HWDC coil shall be either the fixed current output type or the adjustable current
output rype. The dimension ofthe coil shall be 8 inch ID or 10 inch ID.

Table 1

Longitudinal Magnetizing Force for Inside-diameter Inspections

Labela

Outside diameter

Ampere turns

Minimum gauss in
air at centre of coll

in

8 in lD coil

10 in lD coil

2 3t8

6 400

7 400

270

2 7ta

2 7t8

6 700

7 800

285

31t2

3 1t2

7 200

300

305

7 600

B 700

320

4112

4'1t2

7 900

100

335

a 200

600

350

10 000

365

10 900

400

51t2
6 s/8

6 5/8

600
N/A

Labels a.e fgr inlormatron and assistanc in ordenng.

4.2

Examination Medium

Table

2 and Table 3 shall be used in the performance of

Magnetic Particle

Examination under this procedure.


For materials in Table 2, the magnetic particle bath shall be checked for its strength as
specified in Par. 6.5 ofthis procedure.

For materials in Table 3, these products are prepared by their manufacturers and
therefore they are ready to be used without additional verification.

Table 2
Manufacturer
MAGNAFLUX
MAGNAFLUX

Self-prepared Magnetic particle Examination Medium

Magnetic Particle
vehicle
Carrier

II or

Kerosene

Water

Fluorescent
Maonetic Particle

Color under

t4A

Brown

Yellow-green
fluorescence

208

Brown

Yellow-9reen
fluorescence

White Lioht

Color Under
Black Lioht

NIAST]ilR
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE

PAGE

0l -06-2010

5ofl0

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION


PROCEDURE FOR OCTG TNSPECTION
(Coil - Residual Fluorescent Panicle Technique)

Table 3

5.

Ready-to-use Magnetac Particle Examination Medium

Manufacturer

Fluorescent Magnetic
Particle Bath

Color Under

MAGNAFLUX

144M

Brown

Yellow-green
fluorescence

MAGNAFLUX

14A Aqua-Glo

Brown

Yellow-green
fluorescence

White Lioht

Color Under
Black Lioht

STJRFACEPREPARATION
5.1

Area to be examined shall be determined based on the customer request or as per the
requirement ofthe technical standard used.

5.2

Examination shall only be conducted on uncoated (free from non-magnetic coatings)


surfaces. The shiny metal surface shall be visible to the naked eye.

5.3

Prior to magnetic particle examination, the surface to be examined and all adjacent
areas within at least 1 inch (25 mm) shall be dry and free ofall dirt, grease, lint, scale,
oil, or other extraneous matter that could interfere with the examination. Wire buffrng
wheels or soft grinding wheels may be used if necessary to remove healy deposits of
mud or scale.

5.4

6.

Temperature on the surface of the part to be examined shall be within 40"F 125"F
(5'C - 52"C). This shall be verified by the use ofa calibrated infrared thermometer.

CALIBRATION
6.1

Calibration of Visible Light Meter


Visible Light meter shall be calibrated at least every 1 (one) year or whenever the
meter has gone through major repair. Calibration shall be conducted by a reputable
agency/laboratory. If meters have not been in used for 1 (one) year or more,
calibration shall be done before being used. At the minimum, the last calibration
report from the one that is presently applicable shall be maintained on file.

6.2

Calibration of Black Light Meter


Black light meter shall be calibrated at least every 6 (six) months or whenever the
meter has gone through major repair. Calibration shall be conducted by a reputable
agencyllaboratory. If meters have not been in used for 6 (six) months or more,
calibration shall be done before being used. At the minimum, the last calibration
report from the one that is presently applicable shall be maintained on file.

S{ASTTMR
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE

PAGE

0l -06-2010

6of10

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION


PROCEDURE FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Coil - Residual Fluorescent Particle Technique)

6.3

DC Coil Current Output Calibration


The DC coil shall be calibrated at least every one year interval or wtrenever the unit
has gone through major repair. Number of coil-tum shall be clearly marked on the
unit and manufacturer's technical statement documenting the actual number of coiltum shall be maintained on file.

The calibration conducted by the agency/laboratory shall contain the following


information :
Voltage being used
The current output for each voltage being used

6.4

Calibration of Infrared Thermometer


Infrared thermometer shall be calibrated at least once a year or whenever the meter has
gone through major repair by a reputable agencyllaboratory. If meters have not been in
used for one year or more, calibration shall be done before being used. At the minimum,
the last calibration certificate from the one that is presently applicable shall be
maintained on file.

6.5

Wet Particle Bath Concentration (Strength)


Bath concentration checks shall be done at the beginning of the examination day,
every 4 hours of usage, whenever a new batch is prepared, and upon finishing the
examination of the day.

This is accomplished through the use of an ASTM Test Method D 96 pear-shaped


centrifuge tube with 0.05-mL divisions (see Fig. 1). Before sampling, vigorously
agitate the container from which the bath is placed to ensure thorough mixing of all
particles. Flow the bath mixture through hose arld nozzle at least two times to clear
hose.

Take a 100-mL portion of the suspension from the hose or nozzle; allow it to settle
for approximately 60 minutes with petroleum distillate suspensions or 30 minutes
with water-based suspensions. The settled volume shall be between 0.1-mL to 0.4mL in a 100-mL bath sample. This measurement shall be done under visible light.

MAST}O]R
DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

01

05

2010

PAGE

7ofl0

MACNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION


PROCEDURE FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Coil - Residual Fluorescent Particle Technique)

mL

*b
-50

Figure

7.

I - ASTM Test Method D 96 Pear-Shaped

Centrifuge Tube
(Shaded areas shovys settling range)

EXAMINATION EIYVIRONMENT & VIEWING CONDITIONS


7

.l

Viewing Conditions

All examination performed under this procedure shall done in a darkened area. It shall
be ensured that the ambient visible light intensity in the area of examination does not
exceed 2 fc (21.5 lux).
7

.2

The examiner shall be in the darkened area for at least 2 minutes prior to performing
the examination to enable their eyes to adapt to dark viewing. If the examiner wears
glasses or lenses, they shall not be photosensitive.

.3

The black light shall be allowed to warm up at suffrcient time to ensure it emits a
stable UV light intensity. A minimum light intensity of 1000 pWcm2 at 15 inches
from the light source is required on the surface to be examined to ensure adequate
sensitivity during the examination and evaluation ofindications.

7.4

Both the black (UV) lieht intensity and ambient visible light intensity shall be
verified using the proper light meter at the start of examination, whenever power
source of the black light is changed, and at the end of examination or series of
examinations.

E/HASTER
PT. AKT]RA BINA CITRA
MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION
PROCEDURE FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Coil - Residual Fluorescefi Panicle Technique)

8.

DATE

0l -

06

PAGE

2010

DOC. NO.

ABC _MT _

O2O4

8ofl0
R.EV
I

EXAMINATIONPROCEDURE

8.1

Magnetization ofthe Tubular Product

8.1.1

Check for Pre-existing Magnetic Field


Check the inspection surfaces for the presence and direction of any residuai
pocket magnetometer (Gauss meter). The
magnetic field using
magnetometer shall be placed at the furtltest end ofthe tubular product.

8.1.2

Magnetizing the Component


After the completion ofthe step in Par. 8.1.1, the coil shall be placed directly
over the midpoint of the area to be examined and in such a manner as to
reinforce (not oppose) any existing longitudinal field. The elfective area of

the coil shot shall extend for a maximum distance of 9 inches from the
center of the coil on both sides.
For each tubular product dimensions (see column 1 ofTable 1), the minimum
arnpere-tums established by the coil shall follow column 3 and 4 of Table 1
for each type of coil ID. The DC coil magretizing field strenglh (ampero.
turns) shatl be determined by multiplying the number of coil tum in the unit
with the current output shown on the ammeter. The magnetization current
shall remain "on" for at least 3 seconds.

After the minimum 3 seconds magnetization time has elapsed, the coil is
withdrawn from the component while magnetizing current is tumed on.
Higher magnetizing current may be used.

8.2

Magnetizing Field Adequary


After the requirements of Par. 8.1 are satisfied, verift the residual magnetic field
magnitude and orientation using a magnetic flux strip indicator (Burmah Castrol
Type 1 eontaining thrce artificial defects). The magnetic flux indicator shall be
placed in areas least likely to have been magnetized (such as the furthest area from
the coil center in the area being examined). Apply the particle bath and examined the
strip indicalor. The direction and field adequacy are considered sufficient when .3
(three) lines on the strip indicator are clearly defined. If the proper field is not present
on any examination surface, the component shall be corsidered not applicable for
examination under this procedure.

8.3

Application of Wet Particle Bath and Excess Particle Removal


lJiler the field adequaq, has been rerified, agtate the particle bath suspansion prior to
use to ensure even particle distribution Under normal working visible light conditiorl
apply the wet bath by spraying over the area examined to the extent that the surface
being examined is wet without any visible gaps.

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA


MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION
PROCEDURE FOR OCTC INSPECTION

(Coil-Residual Fluorescent Particle Technique)

8.4

DATE

PAGE

0l-06-2010

9of10

DOC.NO.

REV

ABC _MT _

O2O4

Evaluation of Indication(s)
Examine the examined surfaces under black light (meeting the requirements of Par. 7)
after the wet fluorescent particles have been applied. Unless the tubular product is
vertical, each length shall be rolled to allow 360' observation and to allow areas
under the wet bath "puddles" to be examined. A mirror shall be used to examine box
thread roots. Particular attention should be given to stress concentration areas (such as
the base of stabilizer blades, thru-wall holes, grooves, and welds).
Areas with magnetic permeability variations (i.e.: at the edge of heat affected zones
or at the joint between magnetic and non-magnetic materials) may show non-relevant
indication sue to sudden change of permeability.

9.

ACCEPTANCESTANDARDS
An indication of an imperfection may be larger than the imperfection that causes it; however
the size of the indication is the basis for acceptance evaluation.

a.
b.

c.

Indication characleized as cracks are unacceptable.


Hairline cracks in hardfacing are acceptable so long as they do not extend into the base
metal.
Heat checking cracks on the box tool joint surface, excluding hardbanding, are
rejectable if any one ofthe following criteria are met:
Linear indications cover 3070 or more of the tool joint surface's circumference or
total area,
Any linear indication is equal to or greater than 1/8 inch in length.
Any linear indication is located within % inch ofthe bevel.

.
r

10.

DEMAGNETIZATION
Unless specified in the contract documents, demagrretization is not necessary to be done. If
required, demagnetization should be done using the AC coil technique. The demagnetization current used shall be at least equal or greater to the current used in Par. 8.1
of this procedure. The coil shall be withdrawn from the tubular product while magnetizing
cunent is tumed on to a distance of approximately 1.5 meter from the end of the tubular
product. Other demagnetization technique is acceptable if the method gives out comparable
results to the AC coil demagnetization technique.

Demagnetization is considered satisfactory when the residual magnet measured at the end
of the tubular product, verified by the use of a pocket magnetometer (Gauss meter), is not
more than 5 Gauss.

&[ASTm]R
PT. AKT]RA BINA CITRA
MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION
PROCEDURE FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Coil

11. POST

Residual Fluorescent Particle Technique)

DATE

0l -06-2010
DOC.NO.
ABC _MT _ O2O4

PAGE
10

of l0

REV
1

EXAMINATION CLEA}IING

After the examination has been performed and all examination records have been collected,
post examination cleaning shall be done as soon as practical using a process that doesn't
adversely affect the part. Cleaning shall be done using simple water rinse or solvent spray.

All

acceptable connections shall be coated with an API Tool Joint Compound over all thread
and shoulder surfaces, including the end of the pin. Thread protectors shall be applied and
secured using 50 to 100 ft-lbs oftorque. The thread protectors shall be free ofany debris.

12.

EXAMINATION REPORT
Only rejectable indications need to be recorded. As a minimum, the tlpe of indications and
their location shall be recorded on appropriate inspection report form. The report form shall
be custom made to suits the object being inspected and to meet customer's Quality
Assurance requirements. A copy of the inspection report shall be stored by Akura for at
least 5 (five) years or even longer if it is stated in the contracting documents.

13.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
13.1 Care shall be exercised during examination for magnetic particle materials, which are
relatively toxic and highly flammable.
13.2 Manufacturer's directions shall be followed at all times.
13.3 Smoking is prohibited while performing magnetic panicle examination.
13.4 Electrical hazards like opened electrical wire from lighting source or magnetizing
equipment and the presence of short circuiting medium shall be keated with care.
13.5 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each magnetic particle materials shall be
consulted in determining the proper method for the disposal ofused pressurized spray
cans and liquid residue waste.

DATE

PT. AIORA BINA CITRA

03

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR STEEL STRUCTURES, DRILL STEM ELEMENTS,
HOISTING EQI-IIPMENT, PRTSSURE VESSEL & PARTS
CONTAINING PRXSSI'RE
(Yoke Wet Particle NoD Fluorescent Techrique)

PAGE

2013

-01 -

I of

DOC. NO.

REV

ABC_MT_0206

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR STEEL STRUCTURES, DRILL STEM ELEMENTS,
HOISTING EQUIPMENT, PRESSURE VESSEL &
PARTS CONTAINING PRESSURE
(Yoke

- Wet Particle

Non Fluorescent Technique)

DOCUMENT NO. : ABC

PREPARED BY
NAME

- MT -

REVIEWED BY

ANDI SETYO BUDIANTO

POSITION

QAMANAGER

ARIANI WIDIAWATI

POSITION

0206

APPROWD BY

NAME

NAME

OPERATIONS MANAGER

BONNIE F. AMRIL

POSMON

ASNT NDT - LE\'EL III


SIGNATI]RE

DATF.

DArE
/:03-01-20tJ

:03-01-2013

13

DATE

:03

0l -2013

DATE

PAGE

03-01 -2013

2of13

DOC.NO.
ABC *MT_0206

REV

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA


MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAM]NATION PROCEDURE
FOR STEEL STRUCTURES, DRILL S]EM ELEMENTS,
HOISTING EQUIPMENT. PRESSURE VESSEL & PARTS
CONTAINING PRESSURE
(Yoke

Wet Particle Non Fluorescent Technique)

TABLE Otr'CONTENTS

SECTION

CONTENT

PAGE

1.0

SCOPE

2.0

CODES AND REFERFNCES

3.0

PERSONEL QUALIFICATION

4.0

EQUIPMENTS AND MATERIAL

5.0

SURI'ACE PREPARATION

4-5

6.0

CALIBRATION

5-6

7.0

EXAMINATION ENVIRONMENT AND VIEWING


CONDITIONS

8.0

EXAMINATION PROCEDURE

9.0

ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS

10.0

6-7

EXAMINATION OF AREAS FROM WHICH IMPERFECTION


HAVE BEEN REMOVED

l0

ll.0

RE-EXAMINATION OF REPAIRED AREA

l0

t2.o

DEMAGNETIZATION

l0

13.0

POST EXAMINATION CLEANING

10

14.0

EXAMINATION REPORT

l0

15.0

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ll

ATTACHMENT

EXHIBITA

: Electromagnetic

Yoke Calibration Report

l3

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA


MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR STEEL STRUCTIJ'RES, DRILL STEM ELEMENTS,
HOISTING EQUIPMENT, PRESSURE !'ESSEL & PARTS
CONTAINING PRESSURE
(Yoke - Wet Particle Non Fluoroscent Technique)

1.

DATE

03-01 -2013

PAGE
3

of

13

DOC. NO.

REV

ABC_MT_0206

SCOPE

1.1 This

procedure covers Magnetic Particle Examination of extemal surface for


transverse, longitudinal and thrce-dimensional flaws for below applications:
- Welds in structures made from the commonly used carbon and low-alloy
consfuctional steels.

Drill

stem elements.

Hoisting equipment used in drilling and production operations.


Wellhead and Christmas Tree Equipment.
Pressure Vessels.

1.2 This procedure only govems

Magnetic Particle Examination on surfaces with


52"C using combination of AC Yoke and Wet Non

temperature within 5'C


Fluorescent Particle Technique.

1.3 This procedure shall be utilized upon the performance of

Magnetic Particle

Examination by PT. Akura Bina Citra (Akwa).

1.4

2.

The materials, shapes, or sizes to be examined and the extent of the examination
shall be as specified by the Customer's Requirements.

CODESANDREFERENCES
2.t
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5

2.6
2.7
2.8

ASTM E 709, Standard Guide .for Magnetic Particle Examination,200! Edition.


AWS Dl.l, Structural Welding Code - Steel,zl"r Editior, 2010.
DS-l Volume 3, Drill Stem Inspection Standard,4s Edition May 2012.
API RP 7G-2, Recommended Practice for Inspection and Classification of Used
Drill Stem Elemerrrs, 1't Edition August 2009.
API Recommended Practice 88, Recomnended Practice for Procedures for
Inspections, Maintenance, Repair and Remanufaclure of Hoisting Equipment, Tfi
Edition, March 2002.
API Specification 6A, SpeciJication for Wellhead and Christmas Three Equipment,
20s Edition, October 2010.
ASME B & PV Code Section VIII Div. 2, Alternative Rules for Constuction of
Pressure Vessels,2010 Edition 2011 Addenda.
Akura Written Practice for NDT Personnel Qualification and Certification Doc. No.:
ABC-WP-OI latest revision.

PERSOIIITEL QUALIruCATION

All

persorurel carry out Magnetic Particle Examination under this procedure shall be
qualified and certified in accordance with Akura Bina Citra Written Practice for NDT
Personnel Qualification and Certification Doc. No.: ABC-WP-0I latest revision.

PT. AI(URA BINA CITRA


MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR STEEL STRUCTURES, DRILL STEM ELEMENTS,
HOISTING EQI-IIPMENI PRESSURX \CSSEL & PARTS
CONTAINING PRESSURN
(Yoke - Wet Particle Non Fluorescent Techniqu)

4.

DATE

PAGE

03-0l-2013

4ofl3

DOC.NO.

REV
z

ABC_MT_0206

EQUIPMENTS A]\D MATERIAL

4.1

MagnetizingEquipment
Equipment used under this procedure shall be ofthe Alternating Current (AC) Yokes
type. The equipment shall satisfactorily meet the requirement defined in Par. 6.2 of
this procedure.
Table 1

4.2

Magnetic Particle Examinataon Uedium

Manufacturer

White Contrasting Paint

Prepared Black
Ink Bath

Temp, Range

MAGNAFLUX

wcP-2

7HF

s'c - 52'c

CIRCLE SYSTEM

MI-GLOW WCP

OIKOSH

M-47

CIRCLESAFE

820AX

t-72

5"c

- 52'c

5'C

52"C

Examination Medium
Table 1 shall be used in the performance of Magnetic Particle Examination under
this procedure. At all times, valid materials certificates shall be available to any
conceming parties for verification between the batch number stated in the certificate
against the one printed on the aerosol cans.

SURFACE PREPARATION

5.1

Examination shall only be conducted on uncoated (free from non-magnetic coatings)


surfaces.

5.2

Surface to be examined and all adjacent areas shall be dry and free of all dirt, grease,
lint, sca1e, welding flux and spatter, oil, or other extraneous matter that could

interfere with the examination.

5.3

Determination of Examination Area


For welding area, the examination area and all adjacent area within at least 1 inch
(25 mm) shall be re-conditioned to the degree where the shiny metal surface is
visible to the naked eye and no traces of dirt, grease, lint, scale, welding flux and
spatter (for welded products), oil, or other extraneous matter that could interfere with
the examination are detectable by wiping with a dry, unused white paper towel or
tissue.

For other area other than welding, such as drill stem elements, hoisting, this shall be
referenced from the applicable standard recommended practice, specific
engineering analysis / drawing or for prove-up purposed. When necessary, customer
shall be consulted to designate which parts those are subjected to examination.

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA


MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMTNATION PROCEDURE
FOR STEEL STRUCTURES, DRILL STEM ELEMENTS"
HOISTING EQTJ]PMENI PRESSURE YESSEL & PARTS
CONTAINING PRESSURE

(Yoke

Wet Particle

03

DATE
-01 -2013

DOC.NO.
ABC _ MT- 0206

PAGE

5of13
REV
2

No[ Fhorescent Technique)

5.4

Surface preparation by grinding or machining may be neaessary where surface


irregularities could mask discontinuities indications by false indications.

5.5

Cleaning shall be accomplished using detergents, organic solvents, de-scaling


solutions, paint removers, sand or water blasting.

if

5.6

Wire buffing wheels or soft grinding wheels may be used


healy deposits of mud or scale.

5.7

Temperature on the surface of the part to be examined shall be within that specified
in Table 1. This shall be verified by the use ofa calibrated infrared thermometer.

necessary

to remove

6. CALIBRATION

6.1

Calibration of Lifting Weight Standard


Each lifting weight standard shall be weighed with a scale from a reputable
manufacturer or independent laboratory and stenciled with the applicable nominal
weight- A certilicate of the Iifting standard stating its nominal weight shall be
maintained on file. A weight standard shall be have its weight verified every 3
(tlree) years or when damaged in a manner that could have caused potential loss of
material, whichever comes first.

6.2

Lifting Power of Yokes


Prior to use, the magnetizing power of electromagnetic yokes shall be checked
within the six months. Each AC yoke shall be able to lift a standard weight of at
least 10 lb (4.5 kg) at minimum 6 inch pole spacing that will be used for minimum
of 3 seconds. This calibration shall be verified at in the last 6 (six) months or
whenever the electromagnetic yoke is suspected to have been damaged or after being
repaired. At the minimum, the last calibration report (see Exhibit A) from that one
that is presently applicable shall be maintained on file.

6.3

Calibration of Light Meter


Visible light meter shall be calibrated at in the last 6 (six) month a year or whenever
the meter has gone through major repair by a reputable agency/laboratory. If meters
have not been in used for one year or more, calibration shall be done before being
used. At the minimum, the last calibration certificate from the one that is presently
applicable shall be maintained on file.

6.4

Calibration of Infrared Thermometer


Infrared Thermometer shall be calibrated at least once a year or whenever the meter has
gone tfuough major repair by a reputable agencyflaboratory. If meters have not been in
used for six months or more, calibration shall be done before being used. At the
minimum, the last calibration certifcate from the one that is prcsently applicable shall
be maintained on file.

DATE

PT. AKT]RA BINA CITRA

03

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR STEEL STRUCTURES, DRILL STEM ELEMENTS,
HOISTING EQUIPMENT, PRESSI]RE VESSEL & PARTS
CONTAINING PRESSURE
(Yok - Wet Particle Non Fluorescent Technique)

7. EXAMINATION EIIVIRONMENT & YIEWING


7.1

Viewing Conditions
A minimum light intensity

7.2

Surface Contrast Enhancement

-o1 -2013

PAGE

6ofl3

DOC.NO.

REV

ABC-MT-0206

CONDITIONS

100 fc (1000 lx) is required on the surface to be


examined to ensure adequate sensitivity during the examination and evaluation of
indications.

of

Nonmagnetic coatings shall be applied temporarily to uncoated surfaces only in the


amounts sufficient to enhance viewing contrast. The material used as contrast
enhancer shall be ofthe white paint type and shall follow those specified in Table 1
for each particle manufactuer. After surface preparation in accordance with Par. 5,
shake the contrasting paint to ensure uniform distribution of particles. Apply a
uniform thin film of the contrasting paint to the test surface. Wait at least 15
seconds to allow the contrasting paint fitm to dry. Apply magnetic particles to the
test surface.

8. EXAMINATIONPROCEDURE
8.1

Method of Examination
Examination shall be done by the continuous method; that is, wet magnetic particles
applied from aerosol spray cans shall be applied after the magnetizing current is
applied. Accumulation of excess particles during examination shall be removed by
blowing or other source of low pressure dry air. The examination current or
power shall be maintained while removing the excess particles. Observe any
indications formed.

8.2

Direction of Magnetization and Field Adequacy Verification

8.2.1

Weld Parts
separate examinations shall be performed on each area. In any
yoke's
pole spacing shall not be less than 3 inch nor exceed the
case, the
spacing verified during lifting power check as per pat. 6.2.

At least two

All examinations shall be conducted with suffrcient overlap to assure 1007o


coverage at the required sensitivity. Yoke's overlap shall not exceed that
detailed in Fig. 1. Verification of magnetic field adequacy due to reduction
of contact surface between the yoke leg and the part, a magnetic flux strip
indicator @urmah Castrol Type 1 containing three artificial defects)
shall be used. Attach one flux indicator on the part surface under
examination so that its length is at right angles to the direction of the applied
flux. Magnetize the work piece by the use of the same pole spacing and
contact area as the ones to be used for the examination. The magnetization
time shall not be less than 3 seconds. While the work piece is being
magnetized apply the magnetic particles. It is essential that the application of

PT. AKTJRABINA CITRA


MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR STEEL STRUCTURES, DRILL STEM ELEMENTS,
HOISTTNG EQUIPMENT. PRESSUR.E VESSEL & PARTS
CONTAINING PRESSURE
(Yoke - Wet Particle Non Fluorescent Technique)

DATE

03-01 -2013

PAGE
7

of

13

DOC.NO.

REV

ABC-MT*0206

magnetic particles stops before the end of magnetization. The direction and
field adequacy of the induced magnetic field is seen readily from the
response of the flux indicators. The exact direction can be checked by reorientating the indicators with respect to the direction of the field. The
direction and field adequacy me considered sufficient when 3 (three) lines on
the strip are clearly defined.
tt > 'to

b3dlz
d.,

atl

9Oo

,O

Usdln
b2<

dr-5o

d2>15

For tren9versa

crad
Atz

(O

de> 76

bt<4D
bz<d2-fi

Fo. loogitudin.l cracl(3

42z tO
b, < d112
b^ < d4- 50

Figure 1 -Yoke Placement and Orientation for Detection of Flaws


IDimensions in mmI

PT. AI(UR,A BINA CITRA

DATE
03

-01 -

2013

PAGE

8oft3

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDT-IRE


FOR STEEL STRUCTUR-ES, DRILL STEM ELEMENTS,
HOISTING EQUIPMENT, PRESSURE VESSEL & PARTS
CONTAINING PRXSSURE
(Yoke Wet Particle Non Fluorescnt Technique)

DOC.NO.

REV

ABC_MT_0206

The yoke may overheat if energized for a long period. Indication of unit
overheating is if the unit becomes too warm to hold comfortably. Normal
operation is intermittent, 50% duty cycle, with a maximum "on" time of 80
seconds.

8.2.2

Pafis Other than Weld


The whole meas between the yoke's poles and 50 mm on either side of the
axis of the yoke pole will be the "area of interest" during each yoke shot.
Maintain the yoke energized for at least 3 seconds while the wet particles are
still wetting the surface. Any particle application shall cease before the
source of the magnetizing current is removed. Accumulation of excess
particles shall be removed by blowing or other source of low pressure dry air.
The magnetizing current shall be maintained while removing the excess
particles. Repeat the above mentioned technique and continue to move t}te
yoke with overlap not more than 100 mm throughout the whole area to be
examined. Mark any relevant indications found using indelible markers.

After the steps above have been completed, tum the yoke right angle to its
previous orientation and repeat the steps above throughout the whole area to
be examined.

9.

PROVE UP OF INDICATIONS

9.1

Discontinuities are indicated by retention of the examination medium. However,


localized surface irregularities due to machining marks, magretic permeability
variations such as at the edge of heat affected zones or other surface condition may
produce non relevant indications. Broad areas of particle accumulation, which might
mask indications from discontinuities, are prohibited, and such areas shall be
cleaned and reexamined.

9.2

Whenever doubtful indication appear, surface reconditioning is required in the area


being considered. Light grinding or machining may be performed on the suspected
area taking consideration as not to exceed the dimensional tolerances of the part
being examined. After surface reconditioning has been done, repeat the magnetic
particle examination on that area and observe any indications found.

9.3

Other method of NDE may also be used to determine whether those particular
doubtfirl indications are truly relevant or not. In such cases, the acceptance criteria to
be used shall be taken from the applicable acceptance standard for the NDE method
being used.

10.

ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS
10.1 STEELSTRUCTURES

DATE

PT. AKT]RA BINA CITRA


MAGNETIC PART]CLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR STEEL STRUCTURES, DRILL STEM ELEMENTS,
HOISTING EQUIPMENI PRESSURE VESSEL & PARTS
CONTAINING PRESSI'RE
(Yoke - Wet Padcle Non Fluorescent Technique)

03-01 -

2013

PAGE

9ofl3

DOC.NO.

REV

ABC_MT_0206

An indication of an imperfection may be larger than the imperfection that causes it;
however the size of the indieation is the basis for acceptance evaluation.
Acceptance standard for any indication found on steel structural welds shall be
evaluated againstTable 2 of this procedure, as applicable.

10.2 DRILL STEM ELEMENTS & HOISTING EQUIPMENT


An indication of an imperfection may be larger than the imperfection that causes itl
however the size ofthe indication is the basis for acceptance evaluation.
10.2.1 Indication characterized as cracks are unacceptable.
10.2.2 Hairline cracks in hard facing are acceptable so long as they do not extend
into the base metal.

10.3 WELLHEAD AND CHRISTMAS TREE EQUIPMENT FOR BODDIES,


BONNETS, END AND OUTLET CONNECTION AND CLAMP HUB END
CONNECTORS
10.3.1 PSL 2,3,3G& 4 ST]RFACENDE
No relevant indication with a major dimension equal to or greater than 5
mm ( 3/16 in )
2. No more than ten relevant indications in any continous +0 cm2 16 i#;
area
3. Four or more relevant indications in a line separated by less than 1.6mm
(l/16 in ) ( edge to edge ) are unacceptable
4. No relevant indications in pressure contact sealing surface

l.

10.3.2 PSL 2, 3. 3G & 4 WELDING SURTACE NDE


1. No relevant linear indication
2. No rounded indication greater than 3mm 1/8 in ) for welds with
thicknesses from 16 mm ( 5/8 in ) and below or 5 mm (3/16 in ) for welds
with thicknesses greater than 16 mm ( 5/8 in )

10.4 WELDS IN PRESSURE VESSELS


All surfaces to be examined shall be free of:
a. Relevant linear indication
b. Relevant rounded indications greater than 3/16 inch (5 mm)
c. Four of more relevant rounded indication in a line separated by l/16 inch (1.5
mm) or less, edge to edge
Terminologies used in the paragraph above are defined as follow:
a. Only indications which have major dimension greate( than 1.5 mm shall be
considered relevant.
b. A linear indication is one having a length greater than three times of the width.
c. A rounded indication is one of circular or elliptical shape with a length equal to
or less than three times its width.

PT. AI(URA BINA CITRA


MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURX
FOR STEEL STRUCTI,'RES, DRILL STEM ELEMENTS,
HOISTING EQUIPMENT, PRESST'RE VESSEL & PARTS
CONTAINING PRESSIIRE
(Yoke - Wet Particle Non Fluorescent Technique)

11.

DATE

03-01 -

2013

PAGE

l0 of

13

DOC.NO.

REV

ABC_MT_0206

EXAMINATION OF AREAS FROM WHICH IMPERtr'ECTION HAVE BEEN


REMOVED
Upon request, the area in which the defect has been removed (prior to making any repairs)
shall be re-examined in accordance with this procedure to ensure that the defect has been
removed or reduced to an acceptable size of imperfection.

12.

RE.EXAMINATION

OT'

REPAIRED AREA

After the repair is completed and the surface has been smootl

finished, the re-

examination of repaired area shall be performed in accordance with this procedure.


13.

DEMAGNETIZATION
Unless specified in the contract documents, demagnetization is not necessary to be done.
If the part is to be heat-treated a.fter examination, it is also not necessary to conduct
demagnetization of the part previously examined.

In

is specified, the AC yoke shall be used to obtain a


demagnetization. As applied in the initial examination,

cases where demagnetization

satisfactory

level

of

demagnetization is accomplished by placing the part across the poles while the current is
flowing and slowly withdrawing it from the field to a distance of at least 18 inches before
tuming the magnetizing current off

14. POST

EXAMINATION CLEAI{ING

Unless directed otherwise by the contracting documents, all parts and objects that have
been examined by magnetic particle method are not necessary to be cleaned. When
required by the contracting document, post examination cleaning should be conducted as
soon as practical using a process that doesn't adversely affect the part. Typical post
examination cleaning employed are:
Drying of wet particles and subsequent removal by brushing or with compressed air.
Removal of wet particles by flushing with chlorine free and volatile solvents.

15.

EXAMINATION REPORT
Inspection result shall be recorded. Rejectable indications as a minimum, the tlpe of
indications, location and extent (ength or diameter or aligrred) shall be stated on the
inspection reports. The record shall be stored for minimum 5 (five) years unless otherwise
stated in the contracting documents.

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA


MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDT]RE
FOR S'IEEL STRUCTURES, DRILL STEM ELEMEN'Is,
HOISTING EQUIPMENT, PRESSTJRE VESSEL & PARTS
CONTAINING PRESSI'RE
(Yoke

16. SAFETY

DATE

PAGE

03-01 -2013

ll

of

13

DOC.NO.

REV

-MT-

ABC

0206

Wet Particle Non Fluorescert Technique)

PRECAUTIONS

16.1 Care shall be exercised during examination for magnetic particle materials, which are
relatively toxic and highly flammable.
16.2 Manufacturer's directions shall be followed at all times.
16.3 Smoking is prohibited while performing magnetic particle examination.
16.4 Electrical hazards like opened electrical wire from lighting source or magnetizing
equipment and the presence of short circuiting medium shall be treated with care.
16.5 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each magrretic particle materials shall be
consulted in determining the proper method for the disposal of used pressurized
spray cans and liquid residue waste.

PT. AKT]RA BINA CITRA


MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR STEEL STRUCTURES, DRILL STEM ELEMENTS,
HOISTING EQUIPMENT, PRESSURE VESSEL & PARTS
CONTAINING PRESSURE
(Yoke - Wt Paticle Nor Fluorescent Technique)

Table 2

DATE

03-01 -

2013

DOC.NO.
ABC _ MT- 0206

- AwS D1.1 visual Inspection Acceptance Criteria

PAGE
12

of

13

REV
2

DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA


MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR STEEL STRUCTI]RES, DRTLL STEM ELEMENTS,
HOISTING EQUIPMENT, PRESSURE VESSEL & PARTS
(Yoke

CONTATNING PRESSURE
Wet Particlo Non Fluorescent Technique)

Criteria

13

REV
2

CYIicflll,

Loadcd

I,oadcd

Tubular

No,lorbulai

NDotr*ular

Coflffctiols

Conae$i,ras Cof,aeationj

{rld

rDehl

(Jl Crnler Cross Sactiou


All crarets shal] be fillcd to prc\i& rtle sperified \told srzr. ercepl for the cAds ol
ia(eluinear frllcr $clds ourside of drell cfie{ri\c le,Igrh.
{.1} $-ald Profilcs

dull

1['rld

lre tu confonDarrcE

rtith

5. 1.1.

{51 Ti|lle oflrspechon


Visual iDspf.ctrolr of $ elds ia a.ll steels crlr Legir] irNuediatel] .fter tlre .orrrplElDd s elds
alnbiefi telupelanrlc. .{ccepaalce ffiteria for' AST}I .{ 51 1, .{ 517. aad
A 709 Gradc l0O aad 100 \l'steels sh.dl be based orl r'rsucl irslxctio[ peltbr1)red r1ot less
tlun -18 hours afrer
of tlle \lcld.
)ral e cooled to

(6) UrderBizd \1 clds


a tillet $ Eld

Thc sizo of

i[

aD]"

colrtiiluous { cld ura;- be tess tlan tLe spcified ooruiaal

size {L) $jtbout colEctiod LrI tlle follo$'ing atrrorllrrs

LU.

spccified $orrrirt"{ {eld size. i$.


< Jll6

lil

Jrurul

rt:)l

allo( abte d.crEas fioru L. ilr.

hn

'l

< 1/16 []l


<
[].51
> 5/16 t8l
< 1/S []l
Ia r.ll casrs, the utle8ize portio[ oJ the $eld shall not 6:rceed 10ot of rhc $'eld leu$hOa 1{ eb-io-flaq8E q'olds oo eiirde$ , uudefi:ulr shali l,E prohil{icd at ihc euals for a le.rlith
equal Io (1\'ice tllo {'idth of thc flarrge.

ilit

t/1161

(7) UDdercut
(,q,) For rraerial less ihaa I kL

[]i rx. ]l thicl. Lllrdr.rcltl sh{rll lrot exceed 1/]: nr. u ,rDl,
eMc?iior uDdercur shnll l1ot crcccd 1/16 h. [2 lnrrll for anv
acctuularcd ler$h up ro ) u:. [50 [uu] m a[r. 1 ) ir1. []fi rrl,u] . For urarerial cqu8l ro o[
draE 1 ir. rhrcL uDdErrur sll.dl r.at erceed 1116 . [.] 1l1rul for
il ith tlre lbllos iil8

ro

orc thar0-01in- [0.15 lrrru] deep 1lheo


s eld is trausgerse to tensilc stress rmder tr1v desi8r loxding coodirioD. Urdercut sball
bc Do arore drao
i[. [1 i] ddcp fo1 allotha fascs.

lBr lopdtrrtu-T relubers. uodarrut sLall be

tlc

llil

(El PorositlI

A , CIP

lfoolc

\r

cl& ilr

joio(s 6ars\'ersc to thc

dirctioli of colupfied tc[sile

\isible piping porosig. For all odrer g,rolE $'elds alrd for frlle(

sncss

slull

ha1'e Bo

$![

of tlle \isil)lE pipiug polDsi[ l/J] ir. [1 Dnnl or lae.rer itl diarD.tsr sbB]l roi ercesl
[10 ,]u[] io 311y hiesr i,1ch of \{ld and slmll ao( erceed iA iI1. []0 lrnul ur ally 1 I iD.

\r olds. the

l,8 irr.

[300 l1nnl

of $-o1d.

he

icqrreocy of pipiag potlsiq ir filler $'elds shrll not esceed oue ir1 each -l iD.
jl]] iu- [-].5 tuml.
1100 nx}ll of Reld lergtb ard dlc ui txrr diameler slall uor crceed
E\ceptioa for fil1et x'elds coD.secairrg st{'fen,rs ro \l'eb. tlre srur of thr diaNeters of
pipirg porcsitv slrall oot cxcced 3/8 rn. [l0 :run] i! aa]' linrar inch of 11 cld aDd sball oo(
erced 3l-+ io. []0 DDrl ir ar!' 1l i]r. [J00 lrim] leo$L of il.eld.
I C ) CJP Sroore $?lds in brtt joints traas'en to thc di.r'crtroD of conrp[rcd re.nsile slrss
t

B t

drall lli\? no piplDg porosir.y. For {11 o rer groo\.e wc}ds. ih. frcqueoc}. of pipi[g porosn
sLall nor c\cecd oDe in -l h. [100 oar] of lengih rnd E rn&\ilDutD diBr,reEr s!{ll roi
c-rc.rd 31.]l ir- [].5 o1rrrl.
Note: .1dr 'X ' radi.ares applic.b{kv ro! the roll,r{tiolr B po: n slr.lbd are irdi.atcr oD!-npplcabiliE.

Exhibit A

13

DOC. NO.

(11 Crhck Pmhiblliol


crR(k shall be mrncceptable. reg{dless Df size or locadon.
(.?) ltr'ld/Bnse. f lctnl E&ioD
lLorough firsioo sh.ill eri$ benreen djacclrr la)'ers of \ltld ,1et3l .orl t cr$cn

of

ABC-MT-0206

S(aii('allt

ar)d

PAGE

03-01 -2013

- ELECTROMAGNETIC YOKE CALIBRATION

REPORT

A.ll I-,oadr t

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA


MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAM]NATION PROCEDURE
FOR STEEL STRUCTURES, DRILL STEM ELEMENTS,
HOISTING EQUIPMENT, PRESSI-iRE VESSEL & PARTS
CONTAINING PRESSURE
(Yoke

DATE

03-0t-2013

PAGE
'14

of

13

DOC.NO.

REV

ABC_MT_0206

Wet Particle Non Fluorescent Technique)

CALIBRATION OF ELECTROMAGNETIC YOKES

Yoke's make and model


Yoke's serial no.
Referenced weight standard ID

YOKE'S LIFTING POWER TEST RESULT


POWER SOURCE

This is

REFERENCED

WEIGHT

POLE SPACING

LIFTING
TIME

to confirm thot ihe insirument obove meel the requiremenl of Document No.

Calibrated by

Date of Calibration

Next recommended calibration

RESULT

S/flAST&R
DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

PAGE

r5-01 -2010

Full-length Electromagnetic Inspection


Procedure

1of

DOC. NO,

REV

ABC_MT_0205

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

ELECTROMAG1YETIC INSPECTION PROCEDURE

DOCUMENT NO. : ABC

PREPARED

BY

MT

NAME

SYAIFT'DIN ZIIHRI

POSITION

0205

POSITION

APPROVED BY
NAME

ARIANI WDIAWATI

QA MANAGER

OPERATIONS MANAGER

SIGNATURE

DATE

REVIEWED BY

NAME

BONNIE F. AMRIT,

POSITION

ASNT _ NDT

I,EVF,I, III

15

-01 -2010

SIGNAT,I/B,E

l5 0l

2010\

:15-01 -2010

13

DATE

A6ASTER

rGt

r&i

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

15

DATE
01

PAGE

,2010

2of13

Full-length Electromagnetic Inspection


Procedure

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Sf,CTION

CONTENT

PAGE

1.0

SCOPE

2.0

CODES AND REFERENCES

3.0

PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION

4.0

EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

5.0

SURFACE PREPARATION

6.0

CALIBRATION

7.0

EXAMINATION PROCEDURE

8.0

ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS

9_0

EXAMINATION REPORT

-4
4

5-7

ATTACHMENT
EXHIBIT A

Table 3.5.1 & 3.5.2 of DS-l Vol. 3

EXH]BIT B

Table 3.6.1 of DS-1 Vol. 3 (Dimensional Acceptance


Criteria for Used Normal Weight Drill Pipe Tubes)

EXHIBITC

Table 3.6.2 of DS-l Vol. 3 (Dimensional Acceptance


Criteria for Used Thick-wall Drill Pipe Tubes)

EXHIBIT D

Table 8.18 of API RP 7G Part-2 (Classification


Used Drill Pipe)

EXHIBIT E

Table C.4 of API RP 7G Part-2 (Dimensionat Values for


Classification of Drill Pipe Tubes)

of

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

rffi

DATE

l5-0t - 2010

PAGE
3

of l3

Full-length Electromagnetic Inspection


Procedure

SCOPE

l.l

1.2

This procedure covers the upset-to-upset scanning of ferromagnetic steel drill pipe
tubes for locating transverse flaws (holes / cracks / sharp pits) over the pipe extemal
surface using magnetic flux leakage detection equipment.

This procedure shall be utilized upon the performance

of

Electromagnetic

Inspection by PT. Akura Bina Citra (Akura).


1.3

2.

The pipe to be inspected shall have nominal outside diameter of either 2-318 inch or
3-ll2 inch or 4-Ll2 inch or 5 inch.

CODESANDREFERENCES
2.1

2.2

2.3

DS-l Volume 3, Drill Stem Inspection Standard, 3'd Edition January 2004.
API RP 7G-2, Recommended Practice for Inspection and Classification of Used
Drill Stem Elements, 1't Edition August 2009.
Akura Written Practice for NDT Personnel Qualification and Certificalion Doc.
No.: ABC-WP-01 latesl revision.

PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION
A1l personnel carry out Electromagnetic Inspection under this procedure shall be qualified
and certified in accordance with Akura Written Practice for NDT Personnel Qualification
and Certification Doc. No.: ABC-WP-01 latest revision.

EQUIPMENT AI\D MATERIALS

4.1

Electromagnetic InspectionEquipment
Equipment covered in this procedure is Computerized Dual Function EMI System

Model-4500 manufactured by Oilfield Equipment Marketing, Inc. (OEM).


Imperfections are detected by passing the magnetized part by propelling the
encircling sensors along the length ofthe pipe body.

4.2

Inspection Head and Shoes


The inspection heads contain 8 (eight) induction search coils in 8 (eight) inspection
shoes for transverse flaw detection.

4.3

EMI Reference Blocks for Equipment Set-up


This type of reference blocks are supplied by Oilfield Equipment Marketing, Inc.
(OEM) and to be used according to each nominal pipe diameter to be inspected. See
Figure I for detailed information. This block is used for EMI equipment set-up and
not for field examination standardization.

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA


Full-length Electromagnetic Inspection
Procedure

DATE
l5 -01 - 2010

4of13

DOC. NO.

REV

ABC-MT-0205

PAGE

IETHPE
NOrC'r

LBlcrH(@)

WA! IHrod66[ndt)

OEBPIlCN
resr

Hpe2l,u-

9N:7610

rd.gw27ta
gN:8527
lest Bpe 3

2374

2315

2374

2.881

2&

2@4

3lA

?z'

9N6281

Id

frW41lZ'

SN:6179

Iet Flpe

s',

SN:6180

lr:O,s'llLandh

5tm

L
1Sa 5

153

2361

1525

630

3.503

2.87

t6.5

305

668

4510

3 900

19a.2

25.4

64.5

190

24.4

65.3

563

713

71

11,W

6.1

56

02fi

0.235

0 011

11

95

6.3

o.2g

o 235

0@7

9.942

65

0 250

o235

0.006

8,123

7.4

53

025o

o2&

o.@7

8,@5

't5

51

o250

o241

Lr: Length from $oulderto scratch l: Lenghf.omsfioudrto n{e6t hote Ii:tngth from $orddertotr hde
ld innr dieneiersof lhe lest pip q ,13 : point of frpe wdl thidgleG nEas.,rrner[6

B- Ps:Dll,6d holeisdrilledconnoclinglhsoulr

Figure

4.4

Dimensioned Sketch of EMI Reference Block for Equipment Set-up

EMI Reference Blocks for Field Skndardization


This type ofblock shall be prepared from a length of pipe of the same nominal
diameter as the pipe to be inspected. The reference indicators shall be 1.5 mm,
+ 0.4 mm through-wall drilled holes. These holes shall be arranged in a spiral
pattem so that each hole can be seen independent ofthe others. The length of
the pipe shall be at least 2000 mm. At least, 100 mm from each end of the pipe
shall be free from any reference indicator.

The response from each hole (the "kick" on the screen) shall be similar
(average indication +10% of screen height) and shall be verified at the time of
manufacture and at ieast once every 2 (two) years thereafter.

5.

SURFACEPREPARATION
5.1

All pipes shall

5.2

All

be sequentially numbered.

surfaces from upset-to-upset shall be cleaned to a degree that the metal surfaces
are visible and the pipe surface is not sticky to the touch. Any condition interfering
with the detector ride on the pipe shall be corrected.

MAST'ER.

ffi
6.

PT. AKURA BINA CTTRA

DATE

PAGE

l5-01 -2010

5ofl3

Full-length Electromagnetic lnspection


Procedure

CALIBRATION
6.1

Ammeter and Coils


Ammeter and its coil shall be calibrated at least once a year, or whenever the
equipment has been subjected to major electric repair, periodic overhaul, or damage. If
equipment has not been in use for a year or more, calibration shall be done prior to first
use. The accuracy of the writ's Ammeter shall be verified annually by equipment
traceable to a rn;tional standard. Comparative readings shall be taken for at least three
different current output levels encompassing the usable range. The rurit's meter
reading shall not deviate by more than +10% of firll scale, relative to the actual curent
value as shown by the test meter.

6.2

EMI System Set-up Prior to Field Standardization


The following steps shall be done to prepare the EMI system prior to examination
calibration. Use the reference block as described in Par. 4.3 of this procedure.
1. Click OPTIONS (menu bar)

2.

CIiokCALIBRATE
Click PIPE SIZE

3.
4. Click Yes to confirm pipe size
5. Click FLAWS
6. Click OK for default Calibration Level
7. Click COIL Power button on screen
8. Run Buggy over Holes ONLY using the up arrow I

key. Press once to start,

once to stop. DO NOT HOLD THE KEYS DOWNI


9. Observe gain numbers and make sure they are close in value
10. Press the down arrow J to back the drive unit up
I 1. Click OPTIONS (menu bar)
12. Click Check Calibration
13. Click YES to confirm
14. Run Buggy over Holes ONLY with up arrow key
15. Result will display on the Wall Chart (red) - See Figure 2

6.3

for sample display.

EMI System Standardization for Examination


The following steps shall be done after the requirements of Pat. 6.2 are satisfied.
Use the reference block as described in Par. 4.4 ofthis procedure.
1. Click OPTIONS (menu bar)
2. Click Inspect Mode
3. Run Buggy up and down the reference pipe with the up arrow 1 and down arrow
J keys. Press once to start, once to stop. DO NOT HOLD THE KEYS DOWN!
4. Click COIL Power button on screen as needed to cycle the DC coil amperage.
The coil power adjusted shall produce cofllmon reference amplitude (minimum
10 mm) from each detector whenever a drilled hole is scanned. There shall be 8
(eight) signal amplitudes. The minimum signal-to-noise ratio shall be 3 to 1 .
This indication height shall be set as the reference level.

n/flASTER
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA
Full-length Electromagnetic Inspection
Procedure

5. After step (4) is completed, the reference


four times at the speed to

block shall be dynamically scanned


used
for
inspection,
with no changes in any
be

settings.

6.

Each signal channel must produce indications of at least 80o% reference level,
with minimum signal-to-noise ratio of 3 to 1 .
Upon completion of step (a) and (5), press F12 or click SAVE button on screen.
Failure to meet the requirements of step (4) and (5) will result the whole EMI
system to be obselete.

tCPril I

0,1

lr:(+l$l x ..arFergi lrrii- Fu},.Err.

rr-ii=l

JS'
lEi I
&r2.'l

rts!

LTd I{.
ErditUI flL
,

I rcPm' lE!

rl-i-l

!e!#

r[ t!ll$
'll7

oil I

*rf,

ffi:jii*-

I
BA

0ff

TE

50

[n!
|

Bil

[d*

I*

9t

-lr!q 5!*

-!Fxr

tcffi
r?1t

h*lbFl

Frn

mmrr

na

i*"ml
r

Figure 2 - Typical Display of the Equipment Set-up Result

illt(

I\flAST'ER.
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

iffi
6.4

DATE

l5-01 -

2010

PAGE

7of13

Full-length Electromagnetic Inspection


Procedure

Periodic Calibration Verifi catron


The EMI system shall be calibrated (in accordance with Par. 6.2 aad 6.3) at
the following intervals:
At the start ofeach inspection
After each 50 length ofpipes
Each time the EMI unit is tumed on
When any mechanical or electrical changes or standardization setting
adjustments are made
When the validity of the last standardization is questioned
Upon completion of the inspection.

o
.
.
o
o
.

EXAMINATION PROCEDURE

7.1

Each pipe length shall be scanned from upset-to-upset. The detectors (inspection
shoe) shall ride on the surface of the pipe without any visible gap.

.2

The scanning rate shall be the same for production and calibration runs and shall be
documented on the inspection report. The inspection head shall be propelled into the
near tool joint with the detectors leading and then the head turned around and
propelled full length into the opposite tool joint.

7.3

At the start of examination, each indication exceeding 50% of the reference level (+
5 mm screen height) shall be marked until a minimum of l0 areas are marked.

7.4

Each area found in Par. 7.3 above, shall be proved-up using visual, mechanical
measurement, magnetic particle, ultrasonic, or other techniques as required to
identifu, if possible, the type of imperfection, is depth, orientation and proximity to
the OD surface.

8. ACCEPTAI\ICE STANDARDS

a.

Pipe with imperfections (found during proved-up) exceeding the following specified
limits shall be rejected:
Table ].5.1 or 3.5.2 of DS-1 as applicable (see Exhibit A)
Table 3.6.1 of DS-l as applicable (see Exhibit B)
Table 3.6.2 of DS-1 as applicable (see Exhibit C)
Table B.18 of API RP 7G Part-2 (see Exhibit D)
Table C.4 of API RP 7G Part-2 (see Exhibit E)

b.

The area in which an indication exceeds reference level but no imperfections can be
found shall be re-scanned. Repeatability ofthe indication shall be cause for rejection.

NflAST'MR
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

tffi
9.

PAGE

8of13

Full-lenglh Electromagnetic Inspection


Procedure

E,XAMINATION REPORT
The records specified in Par. 9.1 and 9.2 below shall be maintained by Akura for a minimum
retention period of 5 (five) years. These records shall be available for review to its customer
or its designated representative upon request.

9.1

The following information shall be recorded digitally (in softcopy) and printed out
for each joint inspected:

o
.
o
9.2

Permanent serial number or metal-stamped identification number.


End from which scanning began
Print out of strip chart from each pipe run.

Any strip chart exhibiting initial calibration and periodic calibration verification
shall be recorded in their digital format (softcopy) and printed out.

DATE

PT. AKIIRA BINA CITRA

r5-01

PACE

9ofl3

2010

Full-length Electromagnetic Inspection


Procedure

EXHIBIT A

Table 3.5.1 & 3.5.2 of DS-l Vol. 3

zo+F

t\J a
d.(,

9g g
<f da

oi',=

r! 4, (,)

(!

o
o

sf
]_I
39e
.qU(J
-o-o oo

7
!

SEBP
(o() 6 6
NNtrn
5 8ts:s:(P
o ArvrMvl:z6
lu<z

.E

!E
:P

;g
;g
E1'
.Eo

esi-9N
qrOO

soo

at,

I
(rl
f
=l
UJ
=
E

o.

09

6F_

.=o

.= ;q^

99.

8-EE
F
dr.E
ei,EE

vt

I &8 .'JE
v!- n
>PX6
-o-ooo
ts88sP
;EAP
.oF(9(rO
cOOa6
N vl vr vrZ

Al\r<z

ip
6!:

sE3

gEE
P.eE

!5:

!Dor=

:E
E.ts';

c)

E.!+.o.n!!

=6i5i5o

cE

E,
a.2

IE.,
.96bi
-55

a
OE
JF

oo

o)

.cI

P
(,
.s
(L
.E

a
$

i!;
co

dE

c!

EP o

?83

Ei

g=8

x.o

(I,

Irt

'6
i8
EE

9: I

i!;

-.-?I;

kB

9o-

w<2
=rE

3HB

HErdg
/\lwwvrZ

,EE

E6

E;

z+

*E
,,

r-*

E=E
EN 6

-9
36

=t

:6

5'E
rn (\l

et

Eq.3

2a

F
E
o
o

rr}

r^E9

*g

sl

s'

g
o

;$g

.ta

EBE

o
IU
o
)

.o

:U
c:

a,

E9g
l

".:

E.

.g

no

?eB

2 'E
o :E8p
a:.:
F El4rDO
o
2 qEEE*

o,

*e*:s

P
E
tr

i;T
ES-P

.ao
.9v

.E

F.iE

o
c
o

S-e

5S
E9.bs

o
?

;E 9
si
c
a5n

gs;

o?

.i

9: E
o.
<ri

o!.,^
-oX6

or

..:

E^
EE
:'
cr.!o

GI

.;t=E8

g3

'69

i.';C

Ee
iE8
r6 k I
$*Ef
B ETE
/v M Z
vt<z

."E

v1

E;

vr

6.E

q:1

o?

iE
o'9
aci

:e

ro
.9v
E

9b

.Ea.';
'6 (!:.:

'd

gq

qEEE* 9rr o
q.!+(!d!!
>66i50 d5d

PP
iE
EE

Be
E}
3E
PO

at

JF
a\2

pa

NIASTER
DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

l5-01 -

PAGE

l0ofll

2010

Full-length Electromagnetic Inspection


Procedure

EXHIBIT B - Table 3.6.I of DS-l Vol.3 (Dimensional Acceotance Criteria for Used
Normal Weieht Drill Pipe Tubes)

lls

a
a
o

"l=
E;!
lo
.q

Le

2B

t"
I(E
l>

a
o
J
o

oi
ol

"

l=

tl,
=

c
o-

ae
o
seF

oooo
OOlFort

ooaoo
r-o)tr(o@
.ao)(oF(o
cvoi<.jsr

oooao
q!o@sN
otN(-)@(,

CU

dd(od

l.-

oi

cri

c.i

<'i

oooo
A@a(o
@
<\r
$rt(,(o

qrq
(t o,
':eo

N(?
'n !r)
aq
oo

@@9
Nll)
.:o!.2ooo

(., F(O

Q@ro
q)(rQrr)
;<\r(')c)
cjci dd

(.)(ro
r\(Do
;
c)t,)lr)
(\l
'rror
NN ai) <\l N
cj ci d
ddd

mO
ri 6,
!\N
,jcj

orJ)
(,
(o
':qqe
lr)rJr(o@

l/)

Cit

olrr@to
ro
oq!2qa (,
9U)tolo

a')

au

(o?tt)o
it(oQ6J
!o)(oa\.1
N

(t

ao(r(o
.: al(\l
d crcj

\t

!,orno'o
o@q)@@

a\r?0gq
<\r
<\t

3s

(')

(V)

(o

d)

aarn

gffig $[B Eg
qe HPH
H3 d6i
83R
n83H
qiri
ni{\i
oi
aiiit'i
ctai
++a;;;,r;,r;;;
--

t og
6-d
z=?

(rrr,
oqq
+@

oa1
2--

.=

r.r

oo

:s is3 rs3 ElsE EBE IrE 38 Es

z_a

*aa

oi

.oo
,l)c? o
u? ulao
0q9 c)q1
.oQ\
@o oitnd - <rri
F

qSe{
?rir.'
ototer+

9ry
oco aea
c{rh @ ooo
6Jo)n
c'irriqcu
ot-+
(VCri dqtd
F(!(\t
larQ
r'- (o
-;

-FN

q'rFFui

EQE
,4l;"6

HE

oo
oo
s(,
NF.
<.jd
dF
al (V <v 6t

I'VriASTlf,R
DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

PAGE

l5-01 -2010

1l of

13

Full-length Electromagnetic Inspection


Procedure

EXHIBIT

(v

Table 3.6.2 of DS-1 Vol. 3 (Dimensional Acceptance Criteria for Used


Thick-wall Drill Pipe Tubes)

ooo
a
ra) |r, rr, (,
oooo
rt d d,r;

(r)(orJ)loln
9rl\t!9
(!t
(., c', (t ("
l,r-, (, ra, |r) u,
ro (, r, |,) v', g, oq)
o, o,
,rj d r; d Lri rri Lrj tri rj r:

or
o) dt
at ar, aD G) dr
(o(o(o(i)(o
(o(o
(o
.o <o ,o <ci to tr; ro to

q=

ooroo
F*lr'FC,
NNi\N

z
o
z
;l
o

O
- OritO
OOrO@N
oNN-F
d6'.i'.c,d

rornral,)()
tN OF. ra,
(c|@@rrrl,)
ddd'rrd

o)rar(o()q)c,tOc)
rn(!-N(OrrrNO
9 s s (Yr(rai(Y)a)
<ci<o<ri<id<i<id

3-

ooQolo
A-A(,lr,
{ t(o(o(o
ci cictdci

oQooo
OoqOrr)
t lr) rrr(o
cidcjcjd

NO@OATOOO
(frO-O-lr}Ot.)
(r, I i ro(') rar(o (o

ooQo
(OOF-O
I rr)rn (o
ocidci

l(t'

oooo
(, rl) t')
r,
q ggq
ln lo (, ro

rr,LLarror.)
tr a <r<r r
u) ln r, u) rr, (r) (i, (a e) (i
d,
o) 6) cD cD cr, o) a,t
,4qq'4l.|
qqqqq196Q
olo!etolot
l.., l') r.o rJ) rr} to r, ro ra, rr, (o (o (o (o (o (o (o (o

l,,

O(OOOI@(.) l..)OOLrN
Oqrrr!
rlt CY)(O(9(', NtottotNt\NNN

a
a

lE

J
J
J

a
)o
J

l=
sl
::1
at
ol-

t>

ra, F- O
@Ntl)I()
@@@@

+te!

g,

octdc,
:E=s
2

tO(,<V
.-(OloN ra) OOIl)-l')F.t--(9
Lrta)(o(g
{!<Or:N

a
<t)

t(!

)
)
J

_l>
g

-t
ot

ol
LE

J
=

z
z
g)

dddrtd

dcicicicicicid

(v (,
- O r^. (D ra, (v
<GlN60,cor-@
{4)tr)Lrrllrt
tl t rC

dd<idd<<icid

6
z

so

66ddd

(o

cicicio o

() atOL,(V
lr)(OOl...('
t lJ) (O(Ot\

cicicidci

:' c) c) d) (O crr ro(v


r\(Ot-(ON;r-(,
(Y) .c tt u)LO (O (O t-

c;c;doc)ood

oooo
rr, rn ro rr,

rr, (t lr, L, lr)

!t9qt9

aY)@qr(.,
i (, <\l O,
olcqq
ril$rt!'

g,
O(OrOlJ) !i Ol (\ .q9aaa
l,)trru)rJ)l,)

lr)(?@OV
(!-OOO)
qeqog\
rtrro()ra!',

nrD(r<.)F(OO{
(O(Dl..)rr)=
o)l.rrQ re
u1 ,/.?
't? 'r')
'4,Q
(o
(o<o(o (o
(o (o (o

(OtF-e)
torF.qu?q\

l,)(O<rr-({
F. or l" rt) F.

oooo

1a\\t
o oooo

rt \tFttOr
For!tFF,
u'lqr:\

<l rl, (O!i @ (', (t


g)F
o)ororoc?.r.aq9q\\

OO\lO
rnrO i- O
0q\aq

O(DOOTO
OlLO6lFqtqo?0c

r.r,

(,
lOrr)d)
(VOIF-{
F
qq'.?c?At

(r)!', ? rO (O O rr) O)
<r ulNO)
O)(\J@l.(\!,:
,: <q qc? c?

L)
o
NN-tr)
Lo(or\N
cicici ci

oNoo(t
OOJUTO) *
to
rot- t- @
cjcjdctd
$to@
ra,

rar.l) o (') rooot(r)o@o(,


o
Ooii-rrrr
-O(\(\lvcO.nlr)(o(or- @ -r
ro(r)(D (o(or\
cjciddd
ooodcidcjc;

lt la) rJ) Ll o c) (r, (,, <, o, o) o, 6) d) cD o) (D


qq9 g r')
,4'r?'q'q'4
olo?qolol qqq9q!qqq
.o rJ) o ra, rrl.)ro(?lr) lJ)r',trrU:rro (o (o (o (o (o (o (o (o

l=
E

7-7
'E

3.E

a
aaaoo

dJ

F.

ooo<>oooo

=
c^

6o.E
z'-

(C (a (i:l (,
r.o

2=ERC
z"-

(rr

lr)-Fu)

{tr+C)(Y)

rt<ttstrt

ut

o)

r.,rO lOr.)(., u) 1r).l"

(o

NflASTlflR
DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

PAGE

l5-01 -2010

12

of

13

Full-length Electromagnetic Inspection


Procedure

EXHIBIT D - Table 8.18 of API RP 7G Part-2 (Classification of Used Drill Pipe)

Classificalian conditign

Class 2:

Premium class:
two white bands

Class 3:
one orange band

one yellow band

Exterior conditions
OD wear

Re0ainrnq wall not less lhan 80 % Remaining wall nol less


than 70 o/"

Remaining wall less


lhao 70 6A

Denls and mashes

OO nol less lhan 97 Y!

OD nol ,ess lhan 96

",,;

OD less lhirn 96

Crushrng and nckrng

O[J nol less lhan 97 o/.

OD flol less lhan 95

o/"

OO less than 96 7"

Slip area cuts and gouges

Depth nol more than '10 o/. of


average adjacenl wall a aod
remaining wall not less than 80

Deplh not rnore than


20 Yo ol avetage
adJacent wall a. and
remaining wall nol less
than 80 % for transverse
(70 o/o lor longitudinal)

Depth more than 20 Yo


of ave,age adraceot
wall a. or remain,ng wall
less lhan 80 o/" tor
lransverse (70 o/o for

OD rpt less than 96

OO less than 96

o/o

e/o

Slretching

OD nol less than 97

String shot

OD not more ihan 103

Exlernal corrosaon

Remaininq wall not less than 80

OD oot more than 104

70
o/o

Remaaning

than 70
Longitudinal cuts aod gouges

o/o
o/o

wall not less

o/"

Remaining wall not less than 80 % Remaining wall nol less

T.ansverse cuts and gouges

Remaining wall not less than 80

Cracks

None b

7o

9i.

lonqitudana,)
o/o

OD more lhan 104

o/"

Remaifling wall les6


lhan 70 o/o
Rernaining wall less

fl'aa 70 7o

than 70 o/"

Remaining wall not lgss


than 80 o/o

Remaining wall less


lhao 80 o/o

None

None

lnisrnai conditions
Co.rosion pitting

Remaining wall not less


than 70 o/o

Remaining wall less


lhan 70 o/o

Erosion and intemal wall \rtear Remaining wall not less than 80 % Remaining wall nol lesg
than 70 %

Remainina wall less


lhao 70 o/o

Remaining wall not less than 80

None b

Cracks

o/o

None

None

' Average adjacenl wall is dstermi.red by measuring the wall thic*ness on eaci srde of the cul or gouge adlacent to deepest
tlenRlraliofl
b tn any classitic?tron where cracks o{ washouts appear. the pipe i5 ideotified with a red band and considered unfit for fllrts}er drilling
-

ftAASiiiEtrPAGE

DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

t5-0r

'13

-2010

Full-length Electromagnetic Inspection

DOC. NO.

Procedure

ABC_MT_0205

of l3

EXHIBIT E - Table C.4 of API RP 7G Part-2 (Dimensional Values for Classification


of Drill Pipe Tubes)

Label

Label

lryeight
code l'

OD

Nominal

Nominal
wall

linear

1l

17

OD at percent

OD at percent

remaining

increase

decrease

mm

mm
0/"

0t"

Innl

8A

.22

4.83

386

3.38

62 74

62.13

5A.52

57.91

7.11

569

4.98

62.7 4

62.13

58,52

5/

91

5.21

70 84

70

10

5.21

70.84

70.10

86.23

85.34

o/o

70

0/"

kg/m

4 't"

\ia

4.85

60.32

2 3'rl

665

60.32

ItB

6.85

3.O2

10.19

5.51

442

3.86

2 1ta

10.40

73.02

'15.48

9.19

.37

6.43

75.95

31t2

9.50

88.90

14.14

6,4 5

516

4.52

92.46

3 1t2

13.30

88.90

747

6.55

92.46

91 .57

86.23

85.34

15.50

88.90

23.07

11

9.12

7.98

92.46

9t,57

86.23

85.34

11.85

101,60

17,63

b.b5

5.33

4.65

105.66

104.65

98.55

97

14 00

101,60

20.83

8,38

6.71

5.87

105.66

104.65

98.55

97 .54

15.70

101.60

23.36

9.65

7.72

6,76

105.66

104,65

98.55

97 .54

112

13,75

114,30

20.46

6.88

4,83

18.87

't't 7 .73

110.87

109.73

412

16.60

114.30

24.70

8,56

6,86

5,99

118.87

117 ,73

110,87

109.73

41t2

20,00

14.30

29.76

10,92

I74

7,65

18,87

117 .73

110,87

109.73

'112

22.42

14,30

33.96

12.74

'10.16

8.89

118 87

117,13

110.87

109.73

1!2

24.66

14,30

36,70

13 97

1118

9.78

18.8 7

117,13

110.87

109.73

4 1t?

25,50

114.30

37 ,95

14.61

1,68

10.21

118.87

117 ,73

110.87

109.73

16.25

127 .OO

24,15

6.02

5.26

132.04

130.81

123.'19

121.92

19,50

127,OO

29,O2

6.43

132.O8

130.81

123,19

121.92

25.60

127 .O0

38,10

12,70

10.16

8,89

132.O8

130.81

123,19

121 .92

51t2

19.20

139.70

24.57

7.72

6,17

5.41

145.29

143.89

135,5't

134.11

51t2

21

139,70

32,59

q 17

,34

6,43

145.29

143.89

135,51

134.11

5 1t2

24.70

139.70

36,76

10,54

8.43

.37

145.29

143.89

135,5't

't34.11

25,20

168.28

37,50

8,38

6.71

5,87

17

5.01

173.33

163,22

16',t,54

,70

168,28

9,19

.37

6.43

17

5.01

173.33

163,22

161.54

?.

5r8

6 5/8

27

.90

.40

Labels are for into.matron and assistance io ordeaing.


b

1()

Wall at percent

masS
mm

Weighl code 2 designales siandard mass

fo.lhi!

pipe size.

.54

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

AMENDMENT NOTES
: 0l

Date of Issue

June 2012

Affected Document : ABC

MT

0206 and ABC

- MT

0207

Revision 0

Revision

ABC-MT_0206

ABC-MT_0206

Magnetic Particle Examination Procedure for Magnetic Particle Examination Procedure


Drill Stem Elements & Hoisting Equipment for Steel Structures, Drill Stem Elements,
(Yoke - Wet Non Fluorescent Pafiicle Hoisting Equipment, Pressure Vessel &
Technique)
Parts Containing Pressure (Yoke - Wet
Non Fluorescent Particle Technique)
Procedure changed

ABC-MT_0207

Replaced with ABC

MT

0206 Rev.

Magnetic Particle Examination Procedure For


Steel Structure (Yoke - Wet Non Fluorescent This number is used for Electro Magnetic
Particle Technique)

Inspection Procedure Rev. 0

PREPARED BY

REVIEWED BY

NAMF,

NAME

NAMF,

ANDI SETYO BT]DIANTO

POSITION

QA MANAGER

SIGNATURE

DArE

Vl

ARIAN I WIDIAWATI

POSITION

SIGNATURE

..

2orz

BONNIE F. AMRIL

DATE

:01

ASNT _ NDT

LEVEL III

src])A'

/'1'
:01-06

OPERATIONS MANAGER

/
//

APPROVED BY

06

2012

DA'I'E

:01 06

2012

PT. AKI]RA BINA CITRA

01

MAGNETIC PARTICI,I] EXAMINATION PROCEDURI]


FOR STEEL STRUCTURE:S. DRILL STEM ELEMENTS.
HOTSTINC EQUIPMEN'T, PRE]SSTJRE VESSEL & PARTS
CONTAINING PRESSURE
(Yoke - Wet Particle Noo F'luorescent Technique)

PAGE

DATE
- 06 - 2012

of

DOC. NO.

REV

ABC-MT_0206

hYl

/j\ s llt

i&t

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR STEEL STRUCTURES, DRILL STEM ELEMENTS,
HOISTING EQUIPMENT, PRESSURE VESSEL &
PARTS CONTAINING PRESSURE
(Yoke

Wet Particle Non Fluorescent Technique)

DOCIIMENT NO. : ABC

PREPARED BY

ANDI SETYO BUDIANTO

POSITION

QA MANAGER

MT

0206

APPROVED BY

REVIEWED BY

NAME

NAME

ARIANT WIDIAWATI

POSITION

OPERATIONS MANAGER

NAME

BONNIE F. AMRIL

POSITION

ASNT _ NDT

LEVEL III

SIGNATURE

DArn

,/

:01 - 06 -2012

DATE

:01 - 06 -2012

13

DATE

:01-06 -2012

]it

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA


MACNETIC PARTiCLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR STEEL S'IRUC'TURES, DRILL STEM ELEMENTS.
HOISTING EQUIPMENT, PRESSURE VESSEL & PARI'S

(Yoke

CONTATNING PRESST]RE
Wel Particle Non Fluorescent Technique)

DATE

2of13

DOC, NO,

REV

ABC_MT-0206

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION

PAGE

0l 06 2012

IMl A\ S ']i] H" tR

CONTENT

1.0

PAGE

2.0

CODES AND REFERENCES

3.0

PERSONEL QUA-I-IT'ICA'IION

4.0

EQUIPMENTS AND MATERIAL

5.0

SURFACE PREPARATION

4-5

6.0

CALIBRATION .........

7.0

EXAMINATION ENVIRONMENT AND VIEWING


CONDITIONS

8.0

EXAMINATION PROCEDURE

6-8

9.0

ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS

8-9

10.0

F,XAMINATION OF AREAS FROM WHICH IMPERIECTION

HAVE BEEN REMOVED

I 1.0

RE-EXAMINATION OF REPAIRED AREA

12.0

DEMAGNETIZATION

10

13.0

POST EXAMINATION CLEANING

10

14.0

EXAMINATION REPORT

t0

15.0

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

l0-t

ATTACHMENT
EXHIBIT A

Electromagnetic Yoke Calibration Report

t3

PT. AKI]RA BINA CITRA

0l

MACNETIC PAR'IICI,E DXAMINATION PROCtsDURE


FOR STEEL STRUC]]URF]S. DRILL STEM ELEMENTS,
FIOISTING tsQUIPMgNl', PRESSURE \'ESSEL & PARTS
CONTAINING PRESSURE
(Yoke Wet Particle Non F'luorescent Technique)

I.

SCOPE

DATE
06 -2012

of

13

DOC.NO.

ABC_MT_0206

Nll /ll, S

1.1 This

PAGE
3

procedure covers Magnetic Particle Examination

of

:l iCI lxt

external

for

transverse, longitudinal and three-dimensional flaws for below applications:

in structures made from the commonly used carbon and low-alloy


constructional steels.
Drill stem elements.
Hoisting equipment used in drilling and production operations.
Wellhead and Christmas Tree Equipment.
Pressure Vessels.
Welds

1.2

This procedure only govems Magnetic Particle Examination on surfaces with


temperature within 5'C
52"C using combination of AC Yoke and Wet Non
Fluorescent Particle Technique.

1.3

This procedure shall be utilized upon the performance of Magnetic Particle


Examination by PT. Akura Bina Citra (Akura).

1.4

The materials, shapes, or sizes to be examined and the extent of the examination
shall be as specified by the Customer's Requirements.

2.

CODESANDREFERENCES
2.1

2.2
L. t

2.4
2.5

l.o

2.7
2.8

3.

ASTM E 709, Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination, 2008 Edition.
AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel,21't Edition 2010.
DS-1 Volume 3, Drill Stem Inspection Standard, 41h Edition May 2012.
API RP 7G-2, Recommended Practice for Inspection and Classification of Used
Drill Stem Elements, l't Edition August 2009.
API Recommended Practice 88, Recommended Practice for Procedures for
Inspections, Maintenance, Repair and Remanufacture of Hoisting Equipment, 7th
Edition, March 2002.
API Specification 6.4, Specification for Wellhead and Christmas Three Equipment,
20th Edition. october 2010.
ASME B & PV Code Section VIII Div. 2, Altemative Rules for Construction o1
Pressure Vessels, 2010 Edition 201 1 Addenda.
Akura Written Practice for NDT Personnel Qualification and Certification Doc. No.:
ABC-WP-O1 latest revision.

PERSONNEL QUALItr'ICATION

All

personnel carry out Magnetic Particle Examination under this procedure shall be
qualified and certified in accordance with Akura Bina Citra Written Practice for NDT
Personnel Qualification and Certification Doc. No.: ABC-WP-0l iatest revision.

DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

0l ,06 -

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINAIION PROCEDURE


FOR STEEL S'IRUCTURES. DRILL STEM ELEMENTS,
HOISTING L]QUIPMENT, PRESSURE VESSEL & PARTS
CONTAINING PRESSUR.E

(Yoke

5-

Ml.1\ S Tl ifl, l

Magnetizing Equipment
Equipment used under this procedure shal1 be of the Altemating Current (AC) Yokes
type. The equipment shall satisfactorily meet the requirement defined in Par.6.2 of
this procedure.
Table 1

4.2

DOC. NO.

ABC_MT-0206

Wet Particle Non Fluorescent Technique)

4. EQUIPMENTSAND MATERIAL
4.1

PAGE

4of13

2012

Magnetic Particle Examination Medium

Manufacturer

White Contrasting Paint

Prepared Black
Ink Bath

Temp. Range

MAGNAFLUX

WCP.2

7HF

5"c - 52"c

CIRCLE SYSTEM

MI-GLOW WCP

CIRCLESAFE

azoAx

s'c - 52'c

OIKOSH

M-47

r-72

s"c - 52'c

Examination Medium
Table 1 shall be used in the performance of Magnetic Particle Examination under
this procedure. At all times, valid materials certificates shall be available to any
conceming parties for verification between the batch number stated in the certificate
against the one printed on the aerosol cans.

SUR"FACE PREPARATION

5.1

Examination shall only be conducted on uncoated (free from non-magrretic coatings)


surfaces.

5.2

Surface to be examined and all adjacent areas shall be dry and free of all dirt, grease,

lint, scale, welding flux and spatter, oil, or other extraneous matter that could
interfere with the examination.

5.3

Determination of Examination Area


For welding area, the examination area and all adjacent area within at least 1 inch
(25 mm) shall be re-conditioned to the degree where the shiny metal surface is
visible to the naked eye and no traces of dirt, glease, lint, scale, welding flux and
spatter (for welded products), oil, or other extraneous matter that could interfere with
the examination are detectable by wiping with a dry, unused white paper towel or
tissue.

For other area other than welding, such as drill stem elements, hoisting, this shall be
recommended practice, specific
referenced from the applicable standard
When necessary, customer
prove-up
purposed.
for
engineering analysis / drawing or
shall be consulted to designate which pa(s those are subjected to examination-

Ilii A S 'iI 1CI, lR


PT. AKI]RA BINA CITRA
MAGNETIC PARTICI-E EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR STEEL STRUCTURES. DRILL STEM EI,EMENTS.
HOIS'IING EQUIPMENT' PRESSURE VESSEL & PARTS
CONTAININC PRESSURE
(Yoke Wet Particle Non Fluorescent Technique)

0t -

DATE
06 * 2012

PAGE

5of13

DOC. NO.

ABC_MT_0206

5.4

Surface preparation by grinding or machining may be necessaty where surface


irregularities could mask discontinuities indications by false indications.

5.5

Cleaning shall be accomplished using detergents, organic solvents, de-scaling


solutions, paint removers, sand or water blasting.

6.

if

5.6

Wire buffing wheels or soft grinding wheels may be used


heavy deposits of mud or scale.

5.7

Temperature on the surface of the part to be examined shall be within that specified
in Tahle 1- This shall be verified bv the use of a calibrated infrared thermometer.

necessary

to remove

CALIBRATION
6.1

Calibration of Lifting Weight Standard


Each lifting weight standard shall be weighed with a scale from a reputable
manufacturer or independent laboratory and stenciled with the applicable nominal
weight. A certificate of the lifting standard stating its nominal weight shall be
maintained on file. A weight standard shall be have its weight verified every 3
(three) years or when damaged in a manner that could have caused potential loss of
material, whichever comes first.

6.2

Lifting Power of Yokes


Prior to use, the magnetizing power of electromagnetic yokes shall be checked
within the six months. Each AC yoke shall be able to lift a standard weight of at
least 10 lb (4.5 kg) at minimum 6 inch pole spacing that will be used for minimum
of 3 seconds. This calibration shall be verified at in the last 6 (six) months or
whenever the electromagnetic yoke is suspected to have been damaged or after being
repaired. At the minimum, the last calibration report (see Exhibit A) from that one
that is presently applicable shall be maintained on file.

6.3

Calibration of Light Meter


Visible light meter shall be calibrated at in the last 6 (six) month a year or whenever
the meter has gone through major repair by a reputable agency/laboratory. If meters
have not been in used for one year or more, calibration shall be done before being
used. At the minimum, the last calibration cerlificate from the one that is presently
applicable shall be maintained on file.

6.4

Calibration of Infrared Thermometer


Infiared Thermometer sha.ll be calibrated at least once a year or whenever the meter has
gone tkough major repair by a reputable agency/laboratory. If meters have not been in
used for six months or more, calibration shall be done before being used. At the
minimum, the last calibration certificate from the one that is presently applicable shall
be maintained on file.

IMI
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA
MAGNE'I'IC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
!-OR STEEL STRUCTURES, DRILL STEM ELEMEN'IS.
I]OISTING EQTJIPMENI PRESSURE VESSEL & PARTS

(Yoke

CONI'AINING PRESSURE
Wet Particle Non Fluorescent Technique)

7. EXAMINATION EIWIRONMENT & VIEWING


7

i0 lR

DATE

PAGE

0t - 06 -2012

6ofl3

DOC. NO.

ABC-MT_0206

CONDITIONS

.l

Viewing Conditions
A minimum light intensity

.2

Surface Contrast Enhancement


Nonmagnetic coatings shall be applied temporarily to uncoated surfaces only in the
amounts sufficient to enhance viewing contrast. The material used as contrast
enhancer shall be of the white painl type and shall follow those specifred in Table 1
for each particle manufacturer. After surface preparation in accordance with Par. 5,
shake the contrasting paint to ensure uniform distribution of particles. Apply a
uniform thin film of the contrasting paint to the test surface. Wait at least 15
seconds to allow the contrasting paint film to dry. Apply magnetic particles to the

100 fc (1000 lx) is required on the surface to be


examined to ensure adequate sensitivity during the examination and evaluation of
indications.

of

test surface.

8. EXAMINATIONPROCEDURE
8.1

Method of Examination
Examination shall be done by the continuous method; that is, wet magnetic particles
applied from aerosol spray cans shall be applied after the magnetizing current is
applied. Accumulation of excess particles during examination shall be removed by
btowing or other source of low pressure dry air. The examination current or
power shall be maintained while removing the excess particles. Observe any
indications formed.

8.2

Direction of Magnetization and Field Adequacy Verification

8.2.1

Weld Parts

In any
nor
exceed
the
case, the yoke's pole spacing shall not be less than 3 inch
spacing verified during lifting power check as per par. 6.2.

At least two

separate examinations shall be performed on each area.

examinations shall be conducted with sufficient overlap to assure 10070


coverage at the required sensitivity. Yoke's overlap shall not exceed that
detailed in Fig. 1. Verification of magnetic field adequacy due to reduction
of contact surface between the yoke leg and the part, a magnetic flux strip
indicator @urmah Castrol Type 1 containing three artificial defects)
shall be used. Attach one flux indicator on the part surface under
examination so that its larglh is at right angles to the direction of the applied
flux. Magnetize the work piece by the use of the same pole spacing and
contact area as the ones to be used for the examination. The magnetization
time shall not be less than 3 seconds. While the work piece is being
magnetized apply the magnetic particles. It is essential that the application of
A11

MIA\ST1,]R
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA
MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR STEEL STRUCTURES, DRILL STEM ELEMENTS,
HOISTING EQUIPMENT, PRESSURE VESSEL & PARTS

CON'IAININC PRESSURE

(Yoke

0t -

DATE
06 - 2012

PAGE
7

of

13

DOC.NO.

ABC_MT-0206

Wet Particle Non Fluorescent Technique)

magnetic particles stops before the end of magnetization. The direction and
ireld adequacy of the induced magnetic field is seen readily from the
response of the flux indicators. The exact direction can be checked by reorientating the indicators with respect to the direction of the field. The
direction and field adequacy are considered sufficient when 3 (three) lines on
the strip are clearly defined.
ca> lo

b<dtz
6!90"

h<dlz

For

b2 <

d2-

dz>

15

50

lraosve6e cracks
ct1

I 'lb

d2> ?5

< drlz
b" < d1- 5o

Fo. longitudiM qacks

bl < drlz
For lransverse cracks

bz<&,-5o

For longitudinal c{acks

Figure 1 -Yoke Placement and Orientation for Detection of Flaws


IDimensions in mm]

Nfl,A S :I
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA
MAGNETIC PAR'IICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR STEEL STRUCTURES. DRILL STEM ELEMENTS.
HOISTING EQUIPMENT, PRESSURL VESSEL & PARTS
CON'IAINING PRESSURE
(Yoke - Wet Particle Non Fluorescent Technique)

DATE

0l 06 2012

PAGE
8

of l3

DOC. NO.

REV

ABC_MT_0206

The yoke may overheat if energized for a long period. Indication of unit
overheating is if the unit becomes too warm to hold comfortably. Normal
operation is intermittent, 50% duty cycle, with a maximum "on" time of 80
seconds.

8.2.2

Parts Other than Weld


The whole areas between the yoke's poles and 50 mm on either side

of the

axis of the yoke pole will be the "area of interest" during each yoke shot.
Maintain the yoke energized for at least 3 seconds while the wet particles are
still wetting the surface. Any particle application shall cease before the
source of the magnetizing current is removed. Accumulation of excess
particles shall be removed by blowing or other source of low pressure dry air.
The magnetizing current shall be maintained while removing the excess
particles. Repeat the above mentioned technique and continue to move the
yoke with overlap not more than 100 mm throughout the whole area to be
examined. Mark any relevant indications found using indelible markers.

After the steps above have been completed, tum the yoke right angle to its
previous orientation and repeat the steps above throughout the whole area to
be examined.

8.3

9.

Evaluation of Indication(s)
Discontinuities are indicated by retention of the examination medium. However,
localized surface irregularities due to machining marks, magnetic permeability
variations such as at the edge of heat affected zones or other surface condition may
produce false indications. Broad areas of particle accumulation, which might mask
indications from discontinuities, are prohibited, and such areas shall be cleaned and
reexamined.

ACCEPTANCE STANDAR.DS

at

9.2

STEEL STRUCTURES
An indication of an imperfection may be larger than the imperfection that causes it;
however the size of the indication is the basis for acceptance evaluation.
Acceptance standard for any indication found on steel structural welds shall be
evaluated against Table 2 of this procedure, as applicable.

DRILL STEM ELEMENTS & HOISTING EQUIPMENT


An indication of an imperfection may be larger than the imperfection that causes i!
however the size ofthe indication is the basis for acceptance evaluation.

9.2.1 Indication characterized as cracks are unacceptable.


9.2.2 Hairline cracks in hard facing are acceptable so long as they do not extend
into the base metal.

Sylt/\ S ,T ie, R
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE

PAGE

0t -06-2012

9of13

DOC.NO.

REV

ABC_MT_0206

MACNE'I'IC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR S-I-EEL STRUCTT]RES. DRII,L SI}JM EI-EMENTS.

FIOIS'IING EQUIPMENT, PRESSURE VESSEL & PARTS


CONTAINING PRESSI]RE

(Yoke

Wet Particle Non Fluorescent Technique)

9.3 WELLHEAD AND CHRISTMAS TREE EQUIPMENT FOR

BODDIES,

BONNETS, END AND OUTLET CONNECTION AND CLAMP HUB END

CONNECTORS

9.4

9.3.1

PSL 2,3,3G & 4 SURFACENDE,


1. No relevant indication with a maior dimension equal to or greater than 5
mm ( 3/16 in )
2. No more than ten relevant indications in any continous 40 cm2 (6 in2)
area
3. Four or more relevant indications in a line separated by less than 1.6mm
(1/16 in ) ( edge to edge ) are unacceptable
4. No relevant indications in pressure contact sealing surface

9.3.2

PSL 2,3,3G & 4 WELDING SURIACENDE


1. No relevant linear indication
2. No rounded indication greater than 3mm ( 1/8 in ) for welds with
thicknesses from 16 mm ( 5/8 in ) and below or 5 mm (3/16 in ) for welds
with thicknesses greater than i 6 mm ( 5/8 in )

WELDS IN PRESSURE VESSELS


All surfaces to be examined shall be free of:
a. Relevant linear indication
b. Relevant rounded indications greater than 3i 16 inch (5 mm)
c. Four of more relevant rounded indication in a line separated by 1i16 inch (1.5
mm) or less, edge to edge
Terminologies used in the paragraph above are defined as follow:
a. Only indications which have major dimension greater than 1.5 mm shall be
considered relevant.
b. A linear indication is one having a lenglh greater than three times of the width'
c. A rounded indication is one of circular or elliptical shape with a length equal to
or less than three times its width.

10.

EXAMINATION OF AREAS FROM WHICH IMPERFECTION HAVE BEEN


REMOVED
Upon request, the area in which the defect has been removed (prior to making any repairs)
shall be re-examined in accordance with this procedure to ensure that the defect has been
removed or reduced to an acceptable size of imperfection.

11.

RE-EXAMINATION OF REPAIRED AREA

After the repair is completed and the surface has been smoothly finished, the reexamination of repaired area shall be performed in accordance with this procedure.

DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA


MAGNETIC PARTICI,E EXAMTNATION PROCEDURE
FOR STEEL STRUC'IURES. DRII,L STEM EI,EMENTS,
HOISI'ING EQUIPMENT. PRESSURE VESSEL & PARTS
CONTAININC PRESSURI]
(Yoke Wet Particle Non Fluorescenl Technique)

12.

0t *06-2012

PAGE

l0of13

DOC. NO.

ABC_MT_0206

DEMAGNETIZATION
Unless specified in the contract documents, demagnetization is not necessary to be done.
If the part is to be heal-treated after examination, it is also not necessary to conduct
demagnetization of the part previously examined.
shall be used to obtain a
the initial examination.
satisfactory level of
poles while the current is
placing
part
the
is
by
the
across
demagnetization
accomplished
flowing and slowly withdrawing it from the field to a distance of at least 1 8 inches before
tuming the magnetizing current off

In

is specified, the AC yoke


demagnetization. As applied in

cases where demagnetization

EXAMINATION CLEANING

13. POST

Unless directed otherwise by the contracting documents, all parts and objects that have
been examined by magnetic particle method are not necessary to be cleaned. When
required by the contracting document, post examination cleaning should be conducted as
soon as practical using a process that doesn't adversely affect the part. Typical post
examination cleaning employed are:
- Drying of wet parlicles and subsequent removal by brushing or with compressed air.
- Removal of wet particles by flushing with chlorine free and volatile solvents.

14.

EXAMINATION REPORT
Inspection result shall be recorded. Rejectable indications as a minimum, the type of
indications, location and extent (length or diameter or aligned) shall be stated on the
inspection reports. The record shall be stored for minimum 5 (five) years unless otherwise
stated in the contracting documents.

15. SAFETY
1

5.

15.2
15

15.4

PRECAUTIONS
Care shall be exercised during examination for magnetic particle materials, which
are relatively toxic and high.ly flammable.

Manufacturer's directions shall be followed at all times.

Smoking is prohibited while performirg magnetic particle examination.


Electrical hazards like opened electrical wire from lighting source or magnetizing
equipment and the presence of short circuiting medium shall be treated wit}r care.

NflAST"]ff,
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE
01

-06-20t2

IR
PAGE

1l of

13

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDI'RE


FOR STEEL STRUCTURES. DRILL STEM ELEMENTS.
HOISTING EQUIPMENI PRESSI]RE VESSEL & PARTS
CONTAINING PRESSURE
(Yoke - Wet Padicle Non Fluorescent Technique)

15.5 Material

DOC. NO.

ABC_MT_0206

Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each magnetic particle materials


shall be consulted in determining the proper method for the disposal of used
pressurized spray cans and liquid residue waste.

DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

01

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMiNATION PROCEDURE


FOR S-IEEL S'IRUCTLJRES. DR]t,L S'TEM ELEMENTS.
HOISTING EQUIPMENI', PRESSURE VESSEi, & PARTS
CONTAINING PRESSURE
(Yoke Wet Particle Non Fluorescent Tcchnique)

Table 2

AWS

06

sha1l be l.llmccepiRble.

of size or looarior.

'Iborousih firsio,r sL.ll eriisr benLeeir adJaceDr la)_els of \l_Eld r)rerrl arrd beN?er1 $eld nrelal

(.1) CrRter Cross Sectiou


crarers shall !e filled to prolrde rhe spe.ifie,l $eld siz. ercEpt for
in(er:rine[r frller \'elds olltside ol t]reir'effer 1e l.rfidr.

.{ll

ti.

e[dr ol

(.1, $'eld Profiles


rfi^ll l)e ;r .orrfonul.e irirh 5.].1.
$:eld
(5) Tnne of INpction
Yisoal inspectior ol $elds ifl au sree15 olay besair irxnediatEry afte1 tlle .orDpleted $e1d5
Lal e cooled ro arrbiEDr tel]lperatrtre. Acceptarce criteda for AST)[ -l 51-t, A 517. arrd
A 7@ Llade 100 arrd 100 $' ste.rls sl]all b based oir l1stlal inspecdor pelfbflned llot less
than .lg hous afrEr
of the \\ eld.

(6) Undersized lVeldg


Thr 5ize of a rlllet It eld ilr art cor iluous 1\ cld ura] be iEss ah:n th. specfie.d Do ri:ral
size lLl \1ifiour coftc(iofl by rhE follo{_iqf! allloutrrs {Ll]i

L.

L:.

allo\Lable d.crEase frop L,


< .jl16 [5]
< 1,116 []l
< -vil [].51
1l+ t6l
> 5i 16 I81
< 1/S [j]
L1all cises. rhe uDaie$ize poltiorr ol rhe \reld rhall ,ror e)rcEed 10c? ofthe $EId
Ch lteb-to-flaDge q i1d5 or gild.Is. urdelnm shall bE prohibiled ar lbe eDds for
eq[al ro tr{_ice t]re $ idrh of rhe flaDge.
17)

furuul

lrrm

ler1llh.
a

ngrh

l]uder.ut

1A,Fol

aterial less tha.$

I h. []i u!u] fiick..nrdeifltr

5h.11not erceed

1/ll u.

[1

adr].

\rirh dle t'olloNiry elceprioll] rmdercur stnll noi ericeed 1/16 ir [] tnrnl for aD,'"
acflu[]. ated leDgdr up ro I in- [50lrrln] in ar1)_ 1l fu. [-i001lxn]. For laierial equal io ot
tlr3n 1 iD. rblfk uuderclt slmll noi er(feed 1/16 ur. fl ruul for

pli aq DprubeE, rudercur si]all br lro nrorc rhax 0.01 i$. [0.]5 flxrtl deep \a11elr
{'eld is na,srer:e ro (el1sil srress tlllder ar1y desigr loadirg co[di.ion. Urderrur s]rall
be no ro1e rh. 1/Jl .1. [1 nID] dee2 for all otLer r.-ases.
i B ) II1

the

(8) Porolitrr.\, CJP $oo]-e \1 et& ir brrrjoirrs rfaIrsl_erse ro tlre dire.iiotr o, cor)rpfied rerlsile sotss
shall irarE ro usiblE pipir{i polosii}'. Fo{ al1 odrer'liloore wElds alrd for filler \1elds, rbe
sl.uD

ll8

of (ire ! isible pipiog porosir)" 11.)l in. [1 [uu] or glcaien" in diaBEler duJl oot crceed
[l0 ] ir snt tinear irclr of qeld aDd sball rot e:\ceed -l/.1 ri. E0 [uu] h ary- 1J itl.

ir1.

of11eld.

Tlle irqrlerrcy of pipiE polDsiq ir t_:11( \\lds s]ml1 1lot er.erd ooe ir} eacb J in.
[100 tlrln] of $cld lcDtrh ard rhr. n{inrx.lll diameEr s1ull Dor t\ceed i1-ll i . [].5 rr1orlE\ceptiofl for iiller $ elds colrnectilrg stiftenf,rs to q eb- dre sr1l]r of rhe dianreters of
piping porosir;" shal1 oor ericeed -i/8 in. u0 mrlrl rr1 ar-1 liAesr'tuir of $ e1d and stmll Dot
e,lceed 3/J irr. []0 l\r]tl ir an)'' 1l iu. [300 rrD] iergtll of \1 eld.
r

C ) CJP $oo1'e $ elds x} bt'tr jo rts tmnsrt*e ro tl1e ducctior oI coruptlted tcnsile s[ess
shall hare ro pipirg porosiq . For all other gloore $ elds. lhe frequeicl of PiPing pofosiq'
ehall ooi esceed olre ia J ilr. U00 1)r] oJ leligth aud dre aI,rDru1r dia etel sltall nol
{

e-rceed 31.31

Norc

0206

Dl.1 Visual Inspection Acceptance Criteria

(2) l1.eld/Bnse-l letnl Fusiou

specified uoq!4a! seld size. iu.

of l3

DOC.NO.

{1i Cmck Pmhibilio$


cm.k

-2012

ABC MT

Sraticall.\
Loaded

C'-1.eli..rlit

Iraded

Tr$ular

Nofiubullr

Nofltublrlar'

ColmecdoDs

C'offrecdo0s

.Ajrt.

PAGE
12

in. [2.5 ruu].

.{n I" rdi.ates appli.nblkv lor de cuMtim

.i

Fl

tr

.hoded alcn ddicntc: Doo rpphcnbilin

t.{ll Ilrnde

NIASTER
PAGE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA


MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR STEEL STRI]CTURES, DRILL STEM ELEMENTS,
HOISTING EQUIPMENT, PRESSURE VESSEL & PARTS
CONTATNING PRESSURE
(Yoke - Wet Panicle Non Fluorescent Technique)

Exhibit A

l3 of

13

DOC.NO.

ABC-MT_0206

- ELECTROMAGNETIC YOKE CALIBRATION

REPORT

CALIBRATION OF ELECTROMAGNETIC YOKES

Yoke's make and model


Yoke's serial no.
Referenced weight standard ID

YOKE'S LIFTING POWER TEST RESULT


POWER SOURCE

lhis

is

REFERENCED

WEIGHT

POLE SPACING

LIFTING
TIME

io confirm lhol the instrumenl obove meet the requirement of Documeni No.

Calibrated by

Date of Calibration

Next recommended calibration

RESULT

NflASTMR.
PT. AKI]RA BINA CITRA

DATE

PAGE

10-04-2012

I of

Full-length Electromagnetic Inspection

DOC.NO.

REV

Procedure

ABC_MT_0207

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

ELECTROMAGNETIC INSPECTION PROCEDURE

DOCUMENT NO. : ABC - MT

NAME

ANDI SETYO

POSITION

QA MANAGER

DATE /

30 '04 -2012

APPROWD BY
NAME

ARIANI WTDIAWATI

POSITION

{207

REVIEWED BY

PREPARED BY

NAME

14

POSITION

..

OPERATIONS MANAGER

DATE

:30

BONNIE F. AMRIL

04

-2012

ASNT.NDT _ LEVEL III

DATE

.30 04

2012

PT. AKURABINA CITRA

30

DATE
04

PAGE

-2012

2of14

Full-length Electromagnetic Inspection

DOC.NO.

REV

Procedure

ABC MT, O2O7

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

CONTENT

SECTION
1.0

SCOPE

2.0

CODE AND REFERENCES

3.0

PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION

4.0

EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL

5.0

SIJRFACE PREPARATION

6.0

CALIBRATION

7.0

EXAMINATION PROCEDURE.

8.0

ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS

9.0

EXAMINATION REPORT

ATTACHMENT
EXHIBIT A

Classification of Used Drill Pipe as per DS-l Vol. 3

EXHIBITB

Dimensional Acceptance Criteria as per DS-l Vol. 3

EXHIBITC

Dimensional Acceptalce Criteria

EXHIBIT D

Classification of Used Drill Pipe as per API RPTG-2

EXHIBIT E

Dimensional Values for Classification of Drill Pipe


Tubes as per API RPTC-2

as per

DS-l Vol. 3

Nf{ASTtrR
PAGE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

3of14

Full-length Electromagnetic Inspection


Procedure

I.

SCOPE

I.l

This procedure covers the upset-to-upset scanning of ferromagnetic steel drill pipe
tubes for locating transverse flaws (holes / cracks / sharp pits) over the pipe external
surface using magnetic flux leakage detection equipment.

1.2 This

procedure shall be utilized upon the performance


Inspection by PT. Akura Bina Citra (Akura).

.3

Electromagnetic

The pipe to be inspected shall have nominal outside diameter of either 2-718 inch,3-

l/2 inch, 4 inch, 4-1/2 inch,

of

5 inch, or 5-718 inch.

CODES A]\ID REFERE,NCES

2.1

2.2
2.3

DS-1 Volume 3, Drill Stem Inspection Standard,4'h Edition, May 2012


API RP 7G-2, Recommended Practice for Inspection and Classification
Drill Stem Elements, l"'Edition August 2009.

of

Used

VEDAQ-2000-C Operation and Calibration Procedure supplied by New Tech


Systems.

2.4

PT. Akura Bina Citra Written Practice for NDT Personnel Qualification and
Certification Doc. No.: ABC-WP-01 latest revision.

PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION

All

personnel carry out Electromagnetic Inspection under this procedure shall be qualified
and certified in accordance with PT. Akura Bina Citra Written Practice for NDT
Personnel Qualification and Certification Doc. No.: ABC-WP-O1 latest revision.

EQTIIPMENT AND MATERIALS

4.1

Electromagnetic Inspection Equipment


Equipment covered in this procedure is Computerized Dual Function EMI System
Model VEDAQ-2000-C manufactured by New Tech Systems. Imperfections are
detected by passing the magnetized part by propelling the encircling sensors along
the length ofthe tube.

4.2

Inspection Head and Shoes


The inspection heads contain 8 (eight) induction search coils in 8 (eight) inspection
shoes for transverse flaw detection and 4 (four) Hall Effect coils in 4 (four)
inspection shoes for wall loss detection.

4.3

DC Coil for Magnetization Purposes

V' ASTM,R
PT. AKTIRA BINA CITRA

DATE

PAGE

30-04*2012

4of14

Full-length Electromagnetic Inspection


Procedure

4.4

EMI Reference Standard for Field Standardization


EMI Reference standard are used to establish a common sensitivity for all the
detectors.
The reference standard shall:

a.

Be a length of pipe that the same specified outside diameter as the pipe being

b.

inspected
May have one or multiple reference (note: API RPTG-2) indicators that typicatly

c.

through-wall drilled hole with l/16 inch + l/64 inch in diameter arranged in
spiral pattem. lf multiple holes are used, they shall be spaced so that each
indication can be seen independent of the others. Figure I showed reference
pipe that used by Akura when calibration.
Have surface condition that clean and free from scale, mud and coating that can
interfere the detector ride or calibration

The response from every holes (the "kick" on the screen) shall be similar (average
indication +1070 of screen height or lOmm whichever greater) and shall be verified
at the time ofmanufacture and at least once every I (year) years thereafter.

o
3rol!

\o

6l

,,

.l-""
t2

tl

18.925

1l.l

0,364

0,362

Figure I

7A

13.525

?o-25

13.525

20,25

t9

D1

71.25

2,151

D2

D]

N,25
1.9

20.25

).5

N,2a

1.426
5

Dimensioned Sketch of EMI Reference Block for Equipment Set-up

huiA\srHiR
DATE

PT. AKIIRA BINA CITRA

30 04

?012

PAGE

5of14

Full-length Electromagnetic Inspection


Procedure

5.

ST]RFACEPREPARATION

5.1 All pipes shall be sequentially

numbered.

5.2 All surfaces

from upset-to-upset shall be cleaned to a degree that the metal surfaces


are visible and the pipe surface is not sticky to the touch. Any condition interfering
with the detector ride on the pipe shall be corrected.

6,

CALIBRATION

6.1

Ammeter and Coils

Ammeter and its coil shall be calibrated at least once a year, or whenever the

equipment has been subjected to major electric repair, periodic overhaul, or damage. If
equipment has not been in use for a year or more, calibration shall be done prior to first
use. The accuracy of the unit's Ammeter shall be verified annually by equipment
traceable to a national standard. Comparative readings shall be taken for at least three
different current output levels encompassing the usable range. The unit's meter
reading shall not deviate by more than +lOYo of full scale, relative to the actual curent
value as shown by the test meter.

6.2

EMI System Standardization for Examination

The following steps shall be done to prepare the EMI system prior to the
examination calibration. Use the correct reference pipe btock as described in Par.
4.3 ofthis procedure.
Re-standardization shall be performed prior

to making

adjustments

to DC coil

amperage.

6.2.1

Hardware and Mechanics Preparation


Set the correct size of standard pipe block on the stands with the arrow
up and pointing in the direction ofthe buggy travel.
b. Place the mag coil on the standard pipe making sure that the arrow on
the coil is pointing in the direction oftravel.
c. Choose the correct size of buggy head and clamp it onto the standard
pipe.
d. Place the buggy drive on the standard and adjust the arms for the size of
buggy head.
e. Attach the buggy head to the buggy drive and connect the signal and
buggy drive cables.
Place the coil on the buggy drive/head and connect the coil cable. Make
sure the main power is off before connecting or disconnecting any ofthe
cables to or from the console.
g. Connect cables to the electronic console.
h. Align the standard with the buggy head. Align hole #1 with shoe #1.

a.

f.

nwAs"T,i0 lR
PT. AKT-IRA BINA CITRA

PACE

6of14

Full-length Electromagnetic Inspection


Procedure

6.2.2 Electronic Start

Up Procedure

Upon completion of the steps in Par. 6.2.1, turn on the electrical source
supplying 110 V AC.

a. Double click the llnspection Program lcon] on the laptop/PC


controlling the equipment. The software will start in the REVIEW
b.

c.

6.2.3

mode-press Esc four times and click the on-screen switch to the RUN
position.
To begin acquiring data, press [C/r/-ft] or click on the white arrow at the
upper left-hand comer ofthe screen. To stop acquiring data, press Esc or
click on the red STOP button.
The buggy is energized (forward or reverse) by pressing the PgUpForwa and the PgDn-Reverse buttons on the keyboard or FWD/RVS
buttons on the screen.

Transverse (TV) Calibration


a- Align the standard with the buggy head. Align hole

#l with shoe #1.

b.

Turn TV Mag power ON.

c.

Press [C/r/-rR] to start data acquisition; the chart will scroll on the
monitor from left to right
Adjust the TV mag power supply by sliding the TV Mag Current bar.
This will adjust the amperage of the current passing through the Mag
Coil. For setup purposes, it is recommended to set the current to 3.5

d.

amps.

e.

f.
g.
h.

i.
j.
k.

I.

Press [Ctrl-R] to start data acquisition; the chart will scroll on the
monitor from left to right.
Press the PgUp button to move the buggy forward. After all eight drilled
holes on the EMI reference block have passed through the transverse
mag coil, press PgUp again to stop the buggy.
Press Fl button to pause chart scrolling (press Fl again to resume
scrolling).
Eight different color indications should be displayed on the transverse
(TV) chart display. Each color represents a mag flux leakage detector.
For example detector #1 is white, #2 is red and so on. Adjustments
should only be made based on indications acquired going forward.
To make adjustments to the indication heights, locate the corresponding
gain numbers. The gain controls are the same color as the corresponding
indications.
Adjust transverse indication heights by clicking on the gain control up
and down arrows next to the channels to be adjusted. Indications may
also be adj usted by clicking in the selected gain control boxes and typing
the desired value.
For setup purposes, set the signal height to 10 vertical-scale (+2) on the
transverse chart with maximal scale on 180.
Repeat steps 5 to l0 as necessary until all 8 (eight) of the transverse
indication heights are set at l0 vertical-scale (+2).

\v|
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

:-it

s 'll

E, lR
PAGE
7

of

14

Full-length Electromagnetic Inspection


Procedure

6.2.4

Wall Calibration
Position the buggy in the middle of the reference pipe block being
careful not to park on the wall-variation section.
b. Begin data acquisition by pressing lCtrl-Rl on the computer keyboard.
The wall chart will scroll left to right.
c. Adjust the baseline to obtain the nominal wall ofthe reference pipe by
clicking the Up or Down arrow. When baseline position is set, that line
on the screen represents the "no-wall loss" section of the reference pipe.
Now the system is ready to zero.
d. Adjust each channel's zero to the baseline level.
e. Position the buggy over the wall variation. Adjust the gain setting for
each channel individually to the selected setting for target wall loss.
f. Run the buggy FWD and REV (but only use forward run to adjust
settings) several times, adjusting the wall deflection (changing chart
scalling) to final preferred inspection position.
g. Wall setup is complete.

6.2.5

The minimum signal-to-noise ratio obtained when conducting the calibration


as per Par. 6.2.4 and 6.2.5 shall be 3 to l. After standardization adjustments,
the EMI reference standard shall be dynamically scanned four times at the
speed to be used for inspection, with no changes in any settings.

a.

6.2.6 'fhe detectors

shall be sized for the pipe being inspected and shall ride on the

surface ofthe pipe without any visible gap.

6.1

7.

Frequencl oI Standardization
The EMI system shall be calibrated (in accordance with Par. 6.2) dt the following
intervals:
. At the start ofeach inspection
. After each 50 length ofpipes in a continuous operations
. Each time the EMI unit is turned on or after any power interruption
o When any mechanical or electrical (detector, connector or current setting)
changes or standardization setting adjustments are made
. After each shift change or at the beginning ofinspection shift
. Prior to equipment shutdown during ajob
. Prior to resuming operation after repair of change to a system component that
can affect the system performance
. Upon completion ofthe inspection or equipment shutdown at the end ofjob

EXAMINATION PROCEDT]RE

7.1

Each pipe length shall be scanned lrom upset-to-upset. The detectors (inspection
shoe) shall ride on the surface ofthe pipe without any visible gap.

I\[
PT. AKI]RA BINA CITRA

At

S']r lE iR
PAGE

8of14

FullJength Electromagnetic lnspection


Procedure

.2

The scanning rate shall be the same for production and calibration runs and shall be
documented on the inspection repoft. The inspection head shall be propelled into the
near tool joint with the detectors leading and then the head tumed around and
propelled full length into the opposite tool joint.

7.3

Place the inspection head on the pipe facing the tool joint approximately 0,91 m (3
ft) from the near tooljoint, place the coil over the the travelling head and inspect the
last 0,91 m (3 ft) by propelling the travelling head towards the tool joint until it is
stopped by tooljoint.

7.4

Turn the travelling head around, place the coil back over the travelling head and
inspect toward the far tool joint until the travelling head is stopped by the tool joint.

7.5

For transverse flaw, at the start of inspection each indication exceeding 50% ofthe
reference level (5 vertical-scale) shall be marked until a minimum of l0 areas are

marked.

7,6

For wall loss, at the start of inspection each indication exceeding 100% of the
reference level shall be marked until a minimum of 10 areas are marked.

.7

Each area found in Par. 7.3 and Par. 7.4 above, shall be proved-up using visual,
mechanical measurement, magnetic particle, ultrasonic, or other techniques as
required to identify, if possible, the type of imperfection, its depth, orientation and
proximity to the OD surface.

7.8

API RPTG-2 Additional Requirements

7.8.1 Ifthe
7

8.

.8.2

speed varies by more than l0% from the standardization speed, the area in
question shall be re-inspected at the proper speed.
Each time the reference standard is inspected, all signals shall be within 20% of
the standardization amplitude. If the periodic check does not meet the above
standard, all pipe inspected between an unacceptable check and the most recent
acceptable check shall be re-inspected.

ACCEPTA}ICE STANDARDS

8.1

Pipe with imperfections (found during proved-up) exceeding the following specified
limits shall be rejected:
Table 3.5.1 or 3.5.2 of DS-l as applicable (see Exhibit A)
Table 3.6.1 ofDS-l as applicable (see Exhibit B)
Table 3.6.2 of DS-1 as applicable (see Exhibit C)
Table B.l 8 of API RP 7C Part-2 (see Exhibit D)

Table C.4 of API R? 7G Part-2 (see Exhibit E)

Ifii /-\ s 1r i0 ]R
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE

30 04

2012

PACE

9ofl4

Ful I-length Electromagnetic lnspection

Procedure

8.2

The area in which an indication exceeds reference level but no imperfections can be
found shall be re-scanned. Repeatability ofthe indication shall be cause for rejection
unless can be proven by either ultrasonic shear wave examination or thickness
measurement that the area in question doesn't exceed the limitations set in Par. 8.2
above.

9.

EXAMINATION REPORT
The records specified in Par. 9.1 and 9.2 below shall be maintained by Akura for a minimum
retention period of 5 (five) years. These records shall be available for review to its cutomer
or its designated representative upon request.

9.1

The following information shall be recorded digitally (in softcopy) and printed out
for each joint inspected:

.
o
o
9.2

Permanent serial number or metal-stamped identification number.


End from which scanning began

Print out ofstrip chart from each pipe run.

Any strip chart exhibiting initial calibration and periodic calibration verification
shall be recorded in their digital format (softcopy) and printed out.

:;ivi;

D:1

jU

R
PAGE

PT. AKURABINA CITRA

l0 of

Full-length Electromagnetic Inspection


Procedure

Exhibit A

Classification of Used Drill Pipe as per DS-l Vol.3

6'

E-

za
S{R

.q
a.-

-(.i

t::
ROcl
dOO
9E

<t dd
o-*
-oroo

f,

=(J
-..I;-o

if !^';1

zg

Ei

.EE

E5

8E

$$

oA

_s s

E-EE E f
.';-

dEiie
IEB,
/\l\avrvr:z
@F(r, lr6

6005

Nvt<Z

(,

:EE

9
Eg

B;

OE

&E:
&P

Ert

E{r

ECE

:EEE- g.E
EsssE

fiPF
sEg
E*E
E'E
*E.E

E$EE ?t=*
oi t
F*c

E8g

att

9E

EP.
.ieE8
.s E

E3i

o
?
!

E.i,

stsB
-"-:..E

fr

s
P

iv;

,s

rwuvrz

u<2

-.oco

ol

Ed
oq

;s

E 9.E

-BB

EE

E$
o!

^E

fr

:E
iE
a5

Ei

+6
!:
<5
9q

ii

io

69

lcI

-o?i!t
.Ea h

* EE
Ef;e

e,

e
!

AE

iE

EE,

E.s-EE
>(/)oo(JE EE
O-ooE

Ee

Ei

8E

H
=

'it I

-t5

SHEf
E 5fr8
/ir \, \,r vrZ
e<2

6O

Eg

d
9;
+\

9. [
so3

.=

t6

6(D

EgT

(,

,.;

d'

EE
E=E

o
c
o

,lt
6
F

hI
SS6:FP
EgP
or-z;6
066

oll

9:8

F
E
(l}

ai

EB
EP

.E

=oo
g
(J
.!
(,

w<Z
=gE

E'

-cr
o-

E'

..:

;95
Ei:
r* I

=iHts .s

'_=

kB

EeSf
Ar M vt v!Z

E
6

lr{,

EE:
Eoo
3=il

gE

c
E
a
E
P

5:
ts9

olct
Es-

i [g

i\';
c o

^l\

$88

{
;

9-: Io.
<qr

a,

g8;e!e P ^.XO
SqBP
F-(|rrro
@o6a
dMvrMz
<2

'-E.

o,

:'
H=o
P.i,8
.=E

;x
=
w
E
6.6

oi!;
id c

si

9*o

&i
!.

aE,

dE
oo
F-

ci

14

M."irSTlER
PAGE

PT. AKI]RA BINA CTTRA

llofl4

Full-length Electromagnetic Inspection


Procedure

Exhibit B - Dimensional Acceptance Criteria as per DS-l Vol. 3

=
6r

o6<>oo
Ngr.c(o@
ra<'r(or(o
6r(\r(r)iv

aqooo
9!D(OlN
(\l
(')
a\
<ri<rj<.i.dr

<tt

U)

o
ES
:o

5E

.E

2=

a!

a
o
J
o

O(9
(t
O)
- oo

t\t
OI(?
lr)14 @aO
F-r.rF
':q
'.Rl a2
oo
crct
d

(9-rf)o()
(o
ri

aqq.9
(\lNg)t\t

<)

l(Droo(,
eaq,(b(o
(rF(t(oct
cli
oiai

ooo6
oAlF.n
.!\':(b
lJ)
ra,

.rt

ln

ao

.,,

ocroo
o@lr(o
(o
$uid(.i

(\t

(6

(l) F(O

@dr(O
':(\1(\l
dcid

c,@-o
qr(.)c|l'l)
F^lc)(Y,
cicjcro

t-q,c,
c)(i'7,
6rN(r)
ddd

a.rero
-ui6
NN<\r
cidci

rrO
-C)
iri 6 ."r
(\,
GrN 6J rjd
ci ci 6ci

ol

(I,

o
rD

u:,

rr)

r.,

(o

(o

ort616
rO
qe?q9 C'
*roro(o

.D

AT

F(OO(D

(.)

UJ

(r E3'
o-

3
=g

qfi
rE 8sE
938 q(\tar!t
!t$8 58r
(\raia
olol cl qNe!
I<!o -cl
o
oo ..id ci ci qtd .j cj <j
ci ci
<j

q8f
(')..r(.j

ci

gES
3r
(il.nei ES
6 a,i ddi
octo

o ci d

cj

Eee
z-

HE qE
(\r HPH
Nolw

:E^

RBR
C3
Eq
RR
4E
8EE EEEA
&EE
(!,() EEq
t(O
(,jd ri
O)(.)tr, F{r,
cr@oN
tood
Ot-+
F-(\1

4==

(\r

E6r.. EAEST
.?tic.

o'e N.i.i+

qHE HF8 EE
BBEH
c)(rr..)(,, +{+
!+{
Cjd
--a\JA'

-NGt

ril'FFlO

EQQ

6'AA

HE
,rirj

OJN Nc\r

IVtl,
PT. AKT]RA BINA CITRA

ir

Si Tf ig, ,'R.

DATE

30-04

20t2

Full-length Electromagnetic Inspection


Procedure

Exhibit

Dimensional Acceptance Criteria as per DS-l Vol. 3


rr) (, lJt rJ) rt

rrtt!(ttc
(, (, c') (,t (Y,

r, ll, rlt tr,

u) rr, rr, rn rl,


8? u?
n?
',r? rJ)
'4 u)
(o tt) ul

OOul()
F.lr)FO
N F\ F- I\{$ttiq

<>-O!rl)
OCDO@i\
(DOrC!F F
rl)u?lorl)ro

U)tOlrtrrrO
F-(\lC,
l.- Ua
(0(orOu)u.)
rr(.)rorDU)

d) (r{o tl, CDo to o

QOOO
(oor'.-o(o
v tf) lo
oooci

O@O(\rO
O-OC?u)
{ !o (o (o (o
dc;cidd

OOOOO
ar<>{.Olr)
I ro r,(o<o
<!dodo

NO@OC\rOOO
(to-oFr,)Otr,
a?.r. a rr?qrJ.lqq
oocioctctcic;

OOOO

rD lr) ro

qqgq

ol

E;e
E=-

o
al,

o
J

B
J

z
=
o
z

rD

oooo
ra, rr, u] rlt
rlr rJ) rD n
oooo
ro (, rJ) (,
l.) lr) vt rJ, ta) lr, tt !r,

aJ)

o)
o, o, o) t,) o, att
(o or
ro (o (o (o to (o (o
(O ra) (O (O

(t

rO (O @

ln<r O rar N
O(OOOIaO
lr!iC,
OC,
F-rrrtiNtca?e?e?a?

(vrrrF ONto.oa\t

u,lQqq

gQrJr-(, N ,\ i'<D
{ <(of: Fdcidoo

Oc?
rt tO @ro(\l
O t- a,,

toa(t(Oo)()(\l
trn F- (O F! F F- .'l
.r, st \t.or,) (o (oF
c;dcidddctc;

oooo
qqqq

r.)(rl])rarra)
rD lJ) r, ra, l.,
rororo{a,lr,
rt'.iddd

!rrt+rt
{
c, (I, ci (., (a, <t
6, o, d, cD d,
(o or
(o<o
ot'rtDq)o,
<o @io (o
ridddlr,

d@d@idd<id

s)@O)ta,
SCT(\IN
oro)o)cD
t !, q rll

OaO(r-O,
lJrs NAIF
! !rt.crq
rD r') (, ro ra,

lnat@O<t
NFOoaD
@@qr@Fg, v, r/, rJ, rn

!t
(o

V) Ct a/,
<).\l
- (O
F- F- (o (o
Lnrr,
+

(o

(o(o(o (o

ro c, - <!
N
O)-U)r!rnF.FF.

rr,

s - c,(\t
a-oD9FF'
st/,(DF-F.
cicjctc;o

rr ra, (o n ao (r, ('r (v


o:rF
c)s o|)olrOlr)-N.
{rit(b<iNN
odoocrcicjd

oosto
u)L,
F- O
q\'4'Q
(.)cr(.r(t

o{oooLt
Ora,O(\/a\
ulaqqq
tsrac,rc,

rl, l(,r,Lo)

N
C\lO,N <t
qe'4c?q

+:trcit

(l)(!+rorr,orr'o,
d,nraOa\t11'(!6)
\<qqa?('?q-o
r/) (, !t ro (o r.o rt) f

rrrrr(ao
NNFl,)

ool(f
o?)
O<Vrar6,F

(rrnrrro(,

trrofirlr)oaoo(Y,

o,

<n

rl,
tl<r!'=ir
(n.it
.aI
ri dt 16
rr, ororo)olo)
ra, l.(, rn rr, tf, r..)

TO(\IFN(Orr,a\ro
!.!l{(9(9('r(r)(",
(o (o@ (o(o.o (o(o

lr, l,) F. o
@ l'- L) ro
@@6

*o :EEs

or (', o) or o, o, o) c',
qqolo)ol
9qqq(o.o{o@
rf) r., ro rt l..) (o to <o (o (o (o (o (o

\t (\1 6, odrOt- ao
u2q'4qaaaa
\l:\\\
rn ra, rt rn r,, r,) gt r,, r,, s) (0 !o (o rD (o (o (o (o

v1,)(o(otd ci ci cici

ar>

{o

J
J

3
J

z
o
z E
Etsro .E}E
o)

5
c^

bo.g

i5s
E6?

,oE

t F. (,
Y.!'t-|r,rJ)(oN
ctctcrd
(o

'4q\\
o(roct
roiFG

r,r)

octcicio

qq\ \q
oo{)oo
c{6.o
r,)|o(o

OOll'-(lF

ulqq\q
oo<roo

v, lllrora)r',rr,(iL
ao

(o ro

-O(\t(\l<t@tf)*
.a.,4..''lq9q\.o
oo(ro<)ooo

,.i S Tt IU, l-R,

r'triit

DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

30

Full-length Electromagnetic Inspection

Exhibit D

-04 -2012

DOC. NO.

ABC

Procedure

PAGE

l3 of

MT

14

REY
0

O2O7

Classification of Used Drill Pipe as per API RP 7G-2

Cbssincation conditioo

Class 2:
one yelrow band

Premium class:
two u,hite baods

Class 3l
one oaaooe band

Exlerior conditions
OD wear

Deits and mashcs

Remainrng wall nol less lhan 80

o/o

OD nol less than 97 '/"

Remaaning wall nol less

Remaining wall less

ihan 70 %

lhan 70 %
ol,

OD less than 96 %

OD nol less lhan 96 %

OD less lhan 96 %

Depth not more than


20 "/o of average
adjacent wall a, and
remaaniog wall not less
lhan 80 % for lransveIse
(70 oA for longitudinal)

Depth more lhan 20 o/o


of average adiacent
\4,all a. or remaining wall
less than 80 6/0 fo.
lransverse (70 7o for
longitudinal)

OD nol less lhan 96

o/o

Crushrng and necking

OD not less lhan 97

Slip area culs and gouges

Depth nol more than 10 % of


average adjacent walla. and
remaining wall not less than 80 %

Stretching

OD not less than 97

Sking shot

OD nol more than 103

Exlernal corrgsion

Remaining wall not less than 80

o/o

Longitudinal cuts and gouges

Remaining wall not less than 80

oA

o/o

OD not less than 96

Remaininq wall not less than 80

Cracks

None

OD less ihan 96 %

OD nol rno,e lhan 104 7o OD more than l()4

"/o

Traosverse cuts and gouges

o/o

d/5

o/"

Remaining wall nqt less


than 70 %

RemainirE watl less


than 70 0/6

Renraining wall nol less

lhao 70 %

Remainiog wall less


than 70 %

Remaining wall not less


than 80 o/.

Remainiog wall less


than 80 o/.

None

None

lntamal conditions
Remaining wall oot less than 80

o/.

Rernaining wall not less


than 70 0/6

Remaining wallless
than 70 o/o

Erosion and intemal well wear RemainirE wall not less lhan 80

o/o

Remsioing wall not less


lhan 70 o/o

Remaining srall less


than 70 o/o

Corrosion pitling

Clacks

None

None

None b

Average adjacent wall is determined by measu.ing lhe wall thickness on oach side ol the cul or gouge adracent to deepesl
frenelraljon.

to any classiticalion where c.acl(s or washouls appear. lhe pipe is idenlilied with a red band and consrdeEa, unfil fo. further ddlling

Ill. r', S ii

1,0

fit
PAGE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

14

of

14

Full-lenglh Electromagnetic Inspection


Procedure

Exhibit E-Dimensional Values for Classification of Drill Pipe Tubes as per API RPTG-2

Label
1a

Label
2a

Weight
code

OD

Nominal
linear
mass

Nominal
wall

lb/ft

in

4.85

0.190

2.375

6.65

2.875

4.8s

2 3!8

6.65

27tB

6.85

2 ztB

10 40

3 1t)

9.50

31j2

1'l

12

Wall at percent
remaining

0D al percenl

OD at percent

increase

reduction

in

in

:n

80

01"

4%

0.152

0 133

2 470

2.446

2.304

2.?8A

0 280

0.224

0.1s6

2.470

2.M6

2.304

2.?80

685

0217

0.17 4

0.152

2 990

2.96r

2.t89

2 760

2815

10.40

0.362

0.290

0.253

2.990

2.961

2.789

2.760

3 500

950

0.254

0.203

0 178

3.640

3.605

3.3Ss

3.360

3 500

13 30

0.368

a 294

0.258

3M0

3 605

3.395

3 500

15 50

0 449

0.35S

0.3'i4

3.640

3.605

4.000

1185

a 262

0.210

0183

4.'160

4.120

3 880

3.840

0.330

0.264

0.231

4.160

4.120

3.880

3.840

312

15.50

11 85

14.00

4.000

't4.00

15.70

4 000

15.70

0.380

0.304

0 266

4.160

4.120

3.880

3.840

41t2

lJ./5

4.500

13 75

4.271

0 217

0.190

4.880

4.635

4.365

4 324

4.365

432A

4,365

4 32A

4.365

4324

3.360

4 1t2

16.60

4.500

'16

60

0.337

o?70

0.236

4.680

4112

20.00

4.500

20 00

0.430

0.344

0.301

4 680

41t2

22.82

4 500

22.82

0.500

0.400

0.350

4.680

4.500

24.66

0.550

0 440

0.385

4.680

4.635

4 365

4.32A

4.500

25.50

0.575

0.460

0.402

4.680

4.635

4.365

4.324

0.296

0 237

0.207

5.200

4.8s0

4.800

4.850

4.800

4.850

4.800

4112

4.635

41t2

25.50

16.25

19.50

5 000

19.50

0.362

0 290

25.60

5.000

25.60

0.500

0.400

0.350

s 200

5.150

5.500

19.20

0.304

0.243

0.213

5 720

s.665

5.000

150

5.200

5|z

19.20

5 1t2

21.90

5.500

21.90

0 361

0.28S

4.253

5 7?0

5 1t2

24.10

s 500

24.70

0.415

0.332

0.290

5.724

5 665

6t8

25.20

6.625

25.20

0.330

0 264

D.?31

6 890

6.824

6 5/8

27.70

6.625

21.70

0.362

0.290

0.253

6_890

Labels are tor inforBration and assistance in ordering.


b

10

70,/.

IN

2 3t8

Weighr code 2 desgnales stardaro mass lor lhis p pe si7e.

5.280
5.280
5.280

D.+lo

6.360

6.426

6 360

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

AMENDMENT NOTES
:

Date of Issue

0'l .Iune 2012

Affected Document : ABC

- PT

0301 and ABC

PT

0303

New Revision
ABC-PT-0301 Rev.2
ABC-PT-0301 Rev. 1
Liquid Penetrant Examination Procedure for Liquid Penetrant Examination Procedure
for Steel Structures, Drill Stem Elements,
OCTG Inspection
(Visible - Solvent Removable Technique)
Hoisting Equipment, Pressure Vessel &
Parts Containing Pressure
(Visible - Solvent Removable Technique)
Previous Revision

Procedure changed

ABC

0303 Rev. 0
Liquid Penetrant Examination Procedure for
Steel and Aluminum Structures
(Visible - Solvent Removable Technique)

PT

NAME

NAME

ANDI SETYO BUDIANTO

POSITION

APPROWD BY

REVIEWED BY

PREPARED BY

NAME

Removed and replaced with

ABC-PT-0301 Rev.2

ARIANI WIDIAWATI

POSITION

n
SIGNATTIRE :

SIGNATURE

ffi,

DATE

/
:01

06

k\ Fj)
2012\ $Pf

BONNIE F. AMRIL

OPERATIONS MANAGER

QA MANAGER

ASNT, NDT _ LEVEL III

,/-1,

)/4
),

y'n:01

06

2012

DATE

:01

-06-2012

PT^

AI(]RA BINA CITRA

01

LIQUID PENETRANI EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR STEEL STRUCTURES. DRILL STEM
ELEMENTS, HOISTING EQUIPMENT, PRESSURE

&

'VTSSEL
(Visible

PARTS CONTAININC PRESSURE


- Solvent Removable Techrioue)

PAGE
l of 1l

DATE
06 -2012

REV

DOC.NO.

ABC

PT

O3OI

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR STEEL STRUCTURES, DRILL STEM ELEMENTS,
HOISTING EQUIPMENT, PRESSURE VESSEL &
PARTS CONTAINING PRESSURE
(Visible

Solvent Removable Technique)

DOCUMENT NO. : ABC

- PT - 0301

REWEWED BY

PREPARED BY

NAME

NAME

NAME

ARIANI WIDIAWATI

ANDI SETYO BUDIANTO

POSITION

POSTIION

DATE

:01

06

OPERATTONS MANAGER

QAMANACT

6\

-2012

APPROVED BY

:01-06 -2012

BONNIE F. AMRIL

POSITION

ASNT NDT _ LEVEL XI

DAl\//'

:01-06

2012

PAGE

PT. AKT]RABINACITRA

2of11

LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR SIEEL STRUCft]RTS, DRILL STEM
ELEMENIS, HOISTING EQUIPMENT, PRESSURE
VESSEL & PARTS CONTAIN]NG PRESSURE

TABLE OT'CONTENTS

PAGE

CONTENT

SECTION

............

......................

scoPE

CODE AND

PERSONNEL QUALTFICATION

PENETRANT

REFERENCES

.........................

MATERIALS
SURIACE PREPARATION
CALIBRATION

EXAMTNATTON PROCEDURES

ACCEPTANCE

EXAMINATION OF AREAS FROM WHICH

.........4
.........4'5
5_6

......................... 6 - 7
STANDARDS ............................8 - 9

...............

l0

posT EXAMINATION CLEANING ......................9

ll

EXAMINATTON REPORT

t2

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

IMPERFECTION HAS BEEN REMOVED

................................. I 0
................................... l0

ATTACIIMENT
EXHIBIT

Table 6.1 of AWS

Dl.l

I0

PACE

PT. AKT]RA BINA CITRA

3ofll

LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR S'I'EEL S'I-RUCTURES. DRILL STEM

ELEMENTS, HOISTINC EQUTPMENT, PRESSURE


VESSEL & PARTS CONTAININC PRESSURE

1.

SCOPE
1.t

This procedure covers the requirements of Color Contrast Solvent Removable dye
penetrant examination in detecting and evaluating material discontinuities which are
open to the surface for below application:

1.2

Welds (including their heat-affected zone) and materials in structures made


from carbon/low-alloy steels and aluminum.

Drill

stem elements,

Hoisting equipment used in drilling and production operations,


Wellhead and Christmas Tree Equipment and
Pressure vessel and any other equipment that connected to the vessel, such as
piping, pressure relief device, etc.

This procedure shall be utilized upon the performance of Liquid

Penetrant

Examination by PT. Akura Bina Citra (Akura)


r.3

This procedure only govems Liquid Penetrant Examination on surfaces with


tempemture within the standard temperature 40'F

1.4

2.

125'F (5"C

52'C).

The materials, shapes, or sizes to be examined and the extent of the examination
shall be as specified by the Customer's Requirements.

CODESANDREFERENCES

165, Standard Guide for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General

2.1

ASTM

2.2
2.3
2.4

Industry, 2012 Edition.


AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel, 21't Edition 2010.
DS-l Volume 3, Dritl Stem lnspection Standard,4th Edition May 2012.
API RP 7G-2, Recommended Practice for lnspection and Classification
Drill Stem Elements, l"'Edition August 2009.

2.5

2.6

2.7
2.8

of

Used

Recommended Practice 8B, Recommended Practice for Procedures for


Inspections, Maintenance, Repair and Remanufacture of Hoisting Equipment, 7fr
Edition, March 2002.
API Specification 6A, Specification for Wellhead and Christmas Three Equipment,
20th Edition, october 2010
ASME B & PV Code Section VIII Div.2, Alternative Rules for Construction of
Pressure Vessels,2010 Edition 201 I Addenda.
Akura Written Practice for NDT Personnel Qualification and Certification Doc.
No.: ABC-WP-01 latest revision.

API

PAGE

PT. AKT]RABINACITRA

4ofll

LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION PROCEDURT


FOR STEEL STRUCTURES, DRILL STEM
ELEMENTS, HOISTINC EQUIPMENT, PRESSURE
VESSEL & PARTS CONTAINING PRESSURE

3.

PERSON}I-ELQUALIFICATION

All

personnel carry out Liquid Penetrant Examination under this procedure shall be
qualified and certified in accordance with Akura Written Practice for NDT Personnel
Qualification and Certification Doc. No.: ABC-WP-OI latest revision.

4.

PEIIETRANTMATERIALS
The term penetrant materials, as used in this procedure are intended to include all penetrants,
solvent or cleaning agents and developers. A family of liquid penetrant materials consists of
the applicable solvent removable penetrant, solvent remover and developer as specfied by

each manufacturer shall be used. Intermixing of penetrant material from different


families is not permitted. Table I is a list of materials shall be used for the liquid penetrant
examination:
Table I

- Liquid Penetrant Families

Manufacfurer

Remover/Cleaner

Penetrant

Developer

MAGNAFLTIx

SKC.S

SKL-SP2

SKD-52

OIKOSH

c-36

H-41

D-78

When examining Nickel Base Alloys, the sulfur content shall not exceed l7o ofthe residue
by weight and when examining Austenitic Stainless Steet or Titanium, the total chlorine plus
fluoride content shall not exceed l%o of the rcsidue by weight. At all times, valid penetrant
materials certificates shall be available to any conceming parties for verification between the
batch number stated in the certificate against the one printed on the aerosol cans.

SURFACEPREPARATION

5.1

Examination shall only be conducted on uncoated (free from non-magnetic


coatings) surfaces.

5.2

Surface to be examined and all adjacent areas shall be dry and free of all dirt,
grease, lint, scale, welding flux and spatter, oil, or other extraneous matter that
could interfere with the examination.

5.3

Determination of Examination Area


For welding area, the examination area and all adjacent area within at least I inch
(25 mm) shall be re-conditioned to the degree where the shiny metal surface is
visible to the naked eye and no traces of dirt, grcase, lint, scale, welding flux and

PT.

PAGE

AI(]RA BINA CITRA

5ofll

LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR STEEL STRUCTURES, DR1LL STEM

ELEMENTS. HOISTING EQUTPMENT, PRESSURE


VESSEI, & PARTS CONTAINING PRESSI]RE

spatter (for welded products), oil, or other extraneous matter that could interfere
with the examination are detectable by wiping with a dry, unused white paper towel
or tissue-

For other area other than welding, such as drill stem elements, hoisting, this shall be
referenced from the applicable standard
recommended practice, specific
engineering analysis / drawing or for prove-up purposed. When necessary, customer
shall be consulted to designate which parts those are subjected to examination.

5.4

Surface preparation by grinding or machining may be necessary where surface


irregularities could mask discontinuities indications by false indications.

5.5

Wire buffing wheels or soft grinding wheels may be used


heavy deposits of mud or scale.

5.6

Cleaning shall be accomplished by one ofthe following methods:

5.7

.
'.

6.

necessary

to remove

Steam or hot water and detergent

Mineral Spirits
Cleaning solvents or removers recommended by each manufacturer (see Table I )

Temperature on surface of the part to be examined and the psnetrant materials itself

shall be within 40'F - 125'F (5"C


calibrated infrared thermometer.
5.8

if

52'C). This shall be verified by the use of a

Alter cleaning, the inspection surface shall be dried to a degree that a dry, unused
paper tower or tissue rubbed on the surface does not absorb any moisture. Ifother than
commercial penetrant solvent is used, the surlace shall receive final cleaning with
cleaning solvent or removers recommended by each manufacturer (see Table l).

CALIBRATION
6.1

Calibration of Visible Light Meter


Visible Light meter shall be calibrated at least every 6 (six) months or whenever the
meter has gone through major repair. Calibration shall be conducted by a reputable
agency/laboratory. If meters have not been in used for 6 (six) months or more,
calibration shall be done before being used. At the minimum, the last calibration
report from the one that is presently applicable shall be maintained on file.

6.2

Calibration of Infrared Thermometer


lnftared Thermometer shall be calibrated at least once a year or whenever the meter
has gone through major repair by a reputable agency/laboratory. If meters have not
been in used for one year or more, calibration shall be done before being used. At the

DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

01

PAGE

6ofll

-06 -2012

PENETRANT EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR STEEL STRUCTURES. DRILL STEM
ELEMENTS, HOISTINC EQUIPMENT, PRESSURE
VESSEL & PARTS CONTAINING PRESSLIRE

minimum, the last calibration certificate from the one that is presently applicable shall
be maintained on file.

7.

EXAMINATIONPROCEDTIRES
7

.1

7.2

Viewing Conditions
A minimum light intensity of 100 fc (1000 lx) is required on the surface to be
examined to ensure adequate sensitivity during the examination and evaluation of
indications.
Drying after Surlace Preparation

Following surface preparation as defined in Par. 5, surfaces being examined shall be


dried by normal evaporation to ambient temperature. A minimum of 2 (trvo) minutes
but not to exceed 5 (five) minutes, in the exposure to ambient temperature shall be
allowed before applying the dye penetrant in order to make sure that the cleaning
agents have evaporated since any liquid residue will hinder the entrance of the
psnetrant.
7.3

Penetrant Application

The dye penetrant may be applied by spraying or brushing to the surface of part being
examined. The entire parts being examined shall be maintained wet with the dye
penetrant for minimum dwell times as per Table 2.
Table 2 - Minimum Dwell Time

Dwell Times (min,)

It{ote ( 1)l

Materiel
Carbon steel

Product Form

Type of

Discontinuitv

Welds

Porosity, lack of
fusion, cracks
(all forms)

Wrought materialextrusions, pipe


(including bevel
preparation)

Laps, cracks (all


form), seams

(forged or rolled),
Aluminum (forged
or rolled)

Penetrant

10

(1O"C - 52"C).
Note: 1'lf
sr rrfa.e with
with temperature
lemnerafrrrp from
from 50'F
sO'F - 125"F
1)\"F (10"C
52"C) For
(1) For surface
temperature from 40"F - 50'F (5'C - 10oC), minimum penetrant dwell time
shall be 2 times the value listed.

7.4

Excess Penetrant Removal

After the penetration (dwelt) time has elapsed, any penetrant remaining on the surface
shall be removed by wiping with a cloth or absorbent paper, repeating the operation
until most traces of penetrant have been removed. The remaining traces shall be
removed by lightly wiping the surface with cloth or absorbent paper moistened with

PT. AKURABINACITRA

DATE
01

-06-2012

PAGE

Tofll

PENETRANT EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR STEEL STRUCTURES, DRILL STEM
ELEMENTS, HOISTINC EQUIPMENT. PRESSURE
VESSEL & PARTS CONTAININC PRESSTJRE

solvent. To minimize removal ofpenetrant from discontinuities, care shall be exercised


to avoid the use ofexcess solvent. It is prohibited to flush the surface with solvent,

following the application of the penetrant and prior to developing since it may
flush or dissolve the penetrant liom within the discontinuities.
7.5

Drying After Excess Penetrant Removal

The surfaces shall be sufficiently dried by normal evaporation, blotting, wiping, or


forced air. Before applying the developer, ensure that the surface of part being
examined is dry and clean. A minimum of 2 minutes is allowed before applying the
developer but not to exceed 5 minutes.
7.6

Developer Applications
After the excess penetrant has been removed and the surface has been dried, apply
developer by spraying in such a manner as to ensure complete part coverage with a
thin, even film or developer. These t1,pes ofdeveloper carrier evaporate very rapidly at
normal room temperature and do not, therefore, require special drying technique.
Developing time for final interpretation begins immediately after a wet developer

coating is dry. The minimum developing time shall be 10 (en) minutes but not to
exceed 30 (thirty) minutes.
Final Interpretation
Final Interpretation for evaluation shall be made within the allowable developing time
as specified in Par. 7.6. This will allow proper bleed-out of penetrant from
discontinuities into the developer coating. If the surface to be examined is large
enough to preclude complete examination within the time specified then examination
may be performed in increments.
7.8

Evaluation of Indication(s)

discontinuities are difficult to evaluate if the penetrant diffuses


excessively into the developer. Therefore, it is good practice to observe the bleed-out
while applying the developer as an aid in characterizing and determining the extent of
the indication(s). Surface discontinuities are indicated by bleed-out of the penetrant
which is normally a deep red color that stains the developer. Indications with a light
pink color may indicate excessive cleaning. On the contrary, excessive reddish
background may indicate inadequate cleaning.

The types

of

PT. AI(I]RA BINA CITRA

PACE

8ofll

PENETRANT EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR STEEL STRUCTURES. DRILL STEM
ELEMENTS, HOISTING EQUIPMENT, PRESSURE
VESSEI- & PARTS CONTAINING PRF,SSI]RF,

8.

ACCEPTAIICESTA}IDARDS
8.t

STEEL AND ALUMINIUM STRUCTURES


Any ofthe acceptance standards given below shall apply unless a more resffictive
specification is to be used. An indication ofan imperfection may be larger than the
imperfection that causes iq however the size of the indication is the basis for
acceptance evaluation.

8.1.1 Welds fabricated in accordance with AWS Dl.l that me subject to PT, in
addition to visual inspection, shall be evaluated on the basis of the
applicable requirements for visual inspection defined in Table 6.1 of
AWS D1.1 (see Luhibit A).
8.1.2 Welds fabricated in accordance with AWS Dl-2 that are subject to PT, in
addition to visual inspection, shall be rejected if any cracks are found
(regardless of length and location).
8.1

8.2

.3

Acceptance Criteria for materials:


All surfaces examined shall be unacceptable if the inspection confirms the
presence of surface cracks, laps or seams.

DRILL STEM ELEMENTS & HOISTINC EQUIPMENT


An indication of an imperfection may be larger than the imperfection that causes iU
however the size ofthe indication is the basis for acceptance evaluation.

a.
b.

Indication characterized as cracks are unacceptable.


Hairline cracks in hard facing are acceptable so long as they do not extend into
the base metal.

Parts with questionable indications shall be re<leaned and re-examined. A repeatable


indication shall be cause for rejection. Grinding or buffing ofindications is prohibited.
8.3

WELDS IN PRESSURE VESSELS


Al[ surfaces to be examined shall be free of:

a. Relevant linear indication


b. Relevant rounded indications gre ater than 3/16 inch (5 mm)
c. Four of more relevant rounded indication in a line separated by 1/16 inch (1.5
mm) or less, edge to edge
Terminologies used in the paragraph above are defined as follow:
a. Only indications which have major dimension greater than 1.5 mm shall be
considered relevant.
b. A linear indication is one having a length greater than three times ofthe width.
c. A rounded indication is one ofcircular or elliptical shape with a lenglh equal to
or less than three times its width.

PT. AK[]RA BINA CITRA

PAGE

9ofll

LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR STEEL STRUCTURES. DRILL STEM
ELEMENTS, HOISTINC EQUIPMENT, PRESSURE
VESSEI, & PARTS CONTAINING PRF,SSI]RE

8.4 WELL}IEAD AND CHRISTMAS TREE EQUIPMENT FOR

BODDIES,
BONNETS, END AND OUTLET CONNECTION AND CLAMP HUB END
CONNECTORS
8.4.1

a.

& 4 SURFACE NDE


No relevant indication with a major dimension equal to or greater

b.

than 5 mm ( 3/16 in )
No more than ten relevant indications in any continous 40 cm2 (6

PSL 2, 3, 3G

c.
d.
8.4.2

in21 area

Four or more relevant indications in a line separated by less than


l.6mm (l/16 in ) ( edge to edge ) are unacceptable
No relevant indications in pressure contact sealing surface

PSL 2, 3, 3G

a.
b.

& 4 WELDING SURFACENDE

No relevant linear indication


No rounded indication grcater than 3mm ( l/8 in ) for welds whose
depth is 16 mm ( 5/8 in ) or 5 mm (3/16 in ) for welds whose depth
is greater than 16 mm ( 5/8 in )

9. EXAMINATION OF AREAS FROM WHICH IMPERFECTION HAS

BEEN

REMOVEI)
Upon request, the area in which the defect has been removed (prior to making weld
repairs) shall be re-examined in accordance with this procedure to ensure that the defect
has been removed or reduced to acceptable size of imperfection.

IO. POST EXAMINATION CLEANING

10.1 For Steel & Aluminum Structures and part other than drill stem elements
Unless directed otherwise by the contracting documents, all parts and objects that
have been examined by liquid penetrant method are not necessary to be cleaned.
Post examination cleaning should be conducted as soon as practical using a process
that doesn't adversely affect the part. Typical post examination cleanings employed
in this procedure are:
. Simple water rinse or water spray.
. Removal by cleaning solvents or removers recommended by their manufacturer
as shown in Table 1 ofthis procedure.
10.2 For Drill Stem Elements
After the examination has been performed and all examination records have been
collected, post examination cleaning shall be done as soon as practical using a
process that doesn't adversely affect the part. Cleaning shall be done using simple
water rinse or solvent spray.

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE

0t -06 -2012

PAGE

l0ofll

LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR STEEL STRUCTURES, DRILL STEM
ELEMENTS, HOISTING EQUIPMENT, PRESSURE
'VESSEL & PARTS CONTAINING PRESSURE

AII acceptable connections shall be coated with an API Tool Joint Compound over all
thread and shoulder surfaces, including the end ofthe pin. Thread protectors shall be
applied and secured using 50 to 100 ftJbs oftorque. The thread protectors shall be ftee
ofany debris.

1.

EXAMINATION R-f,,PORT
Only rejectable indications need to be recorded. As a minimum, the type of indications and
their location shall be recorded on appropriate inspection report form. The report form shall
be custom made to suits the object being inspected and to meet customer's Quality
Assurance requirements. A copy ofthe inspection report shall be stored by Akura for at
least 5 (five) years or even longer if it is stated in the contracting documents

12. SAT'ETY PRECAUTIONS

12.1 Liquid penetrant materials used in this procedure are relatively toxic. Therefore, care
should be exercise not to excessively inhale the fume.
12.2 Smoking is prohibited while performing liquid penetrant examination.

12.3 Electrical hazards like opened electrical wire from lighting source and the presence of
short circuiting medium shall be treated with care.
12.4 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each liquid penetrant material shall be
consulted in determining the proper method for the disposal of used pressurized
spray cans and liquid residue waste.

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

01

DATE
06 -2012

PAGE

ll

of

ll

PENETRANT EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR STEEL STRUCTURES. DRILL STEM
ELEMENTS, HOISTING EQUIPMENT, PRESSURE
VESSEL & PARTS CONTATNING PRESSURE

Exhibit A - Table 6.1 of AWS

Dl.l
Srati.alh
Lofldcd

Noutl$r{nr
Criteria

,trxl cmc'li riull

tre runceeptAble. regardless

ol size or locnhou.

11'eld/Base-\tetol rusion
Thorough fusioD silall erosr Lrenl'eelr adjaceDt lq ers of ir eld ueral
(2

d be(i1eelr s_eid

r)da]

(3) t-rute1 (:ro-is Soction


All crnrers sirl1ll be lilled ro pro\'rde

the specrhed 1\'eld slze. e:(.ept lbr rlle el}de c,f


nlld1nrirleor filler \relds onside of rlEir efft.r,yc

({)
$

U eld ProfiIs

eld ploliles shall t)c iu corfonnauce

Ti

(S)

*irh i.l-l-

ollnspftlion

Visu.l mspecdor of \\elds m all sle.is a\' hegil nDnrdiarel! rlrer the coD)plded \.elds
hnle cooled io arDbleut teurperolLlle- A&-eprarrcd crirena fl"ll.\ST]i .\ 5l{. ,{ 5 t7. aud
A 709 Gade 100 alrd I00 W sleels sltau [ri based on lisarl inspectiou perfo rrednot iess
Ih^il

-18

hous aftir

of rlre

srld.

(61 ['Bdersize(I Welds


T\c stze of r fillet rld in nN conmuorE \'eld utay be less
sizr iLl $'irlronr conEciio Lit dle lblio$ing amomts (U)i

L.

h}npl

alloq'nble decrerse

< -vr6 [5]


[6]

>5/16 [8]
Io nll.ases. ihe uDdersize poltior oI tle $ld slufl
OD

\\'eb-roilarrge
Io iqrce tlle

$ elds ol1

lpeci]led no

itul

[r,

sp.-ciiied lrotnIra) $eid size. Iu.

r/r

ihaD dle

fro

L. ltl.

lln

< l/16 {rl


l J/,t: l:.51
< l/8 Jll

Dor e\ced l0rr. of the rretd l\sthgfders. rurdemrD slMl] be pro]xbited ar the eods lor a leugth

$ idiir of tlE
(7) f:rdrcut
(,\)For lll.renrl less thau f 1lI []5 lnrnl &ick. underclrt shflll ror erced l/-ll ur. li IuIl1.
vrdr dre lbllosiiug exceptionr Lurdercnt s1Hll orexceed l/16in. [: !n]lbr ar-y
acculnulald le+dr up lo I ir. [50 llrln] r alx ll rr [-l0O !ulu]. For D]rrenal equd to or

geater

tlu l

in- drick. rudercur shall uor ex&ed

l/16 r []

ruDl for

arr_r

lEngth oI rveld.

pnrr}ary rDelDbe.s. tuld*cut dlall t no Droie diaD fl.ol i . [0.]5 unnl deep sllell
the seld is tlass\erse to teusile sEess rud.I ar) dfslsn ioadng .olnluiolr. trdercri shall
b Do uore lhan l/ll in. [I llr r] deep lbr all ot,rei casee.
(B)

(8) Porosit]..
CJP groole q'elds ro buiijoiris nirls\'erse ro the direciion of colir}}lttcd tensile sress
slml lMye 1ro ttsible pry rg porosit] . For ll otLel eroor e $ elds aud lor fillet { elds. t[e
sun) of rle risibld pipirg porosiry l/31m. [1 rDIn]or:rEaier in dia rEr sllnll ]rot exceed
-ll3 i]r. 0 rln] r1aDy llnear irch o{ $eld arrd shal rlol e\.eed -l/-l ir I:0 ulilu}-1lro.
ol seld.
lJ00 oEDl

iAi

B ) The ftequelrcJ of ppirg poro siq il filler q eids shnll rror e\ceed olle in encir -+ r.
ll00 nurl of \\eld le4dr nlrd rhe rDnxlDutlr dhrftter slAll ore:iceed l/-11itr. [].5 un)rl

I let !\ irts coulectllrg stifl-e1Ers ro s eb. dre stLD of the diameters of


pipnglDrosiiv shall nor exceed.)/8 i). Ii0 rlx ] i arll lirle:]r ioch oI $_eld aDd shril uoi
erceEd l/.r i!. Il0 xlrl,ra ) r2 nr- I-ltlo nxrl lergthof$eld.
(C ) Cr? groo\.e lveids i,r bntr joius tra$\'erse to the direftioD of co rprted teusrle sfess
shal ha\'e o pipurg porosir_t. For all odtei grDor e i(eld!. rhe iqrlerrc( of pipixg pororitl
shall ot erceed oue ill -+ lll 00 rDur] of le grir affl tlle nrarr]NuD iliftDeler sh^il not
exceed 3/-rl lil, tl.s lrrl.
Nore: ln _X,' Lrdrc.r6 aplli.aLiiiii.v for llF.otue.rior rtlli n sira&i ir.a nidLtitt, notr .Ppli('rbrlrta
E\cepnon: ibr

CJclicrll]
Loadd
h,L ar
NoDrubrilar CoilrrectioDs
Co Ections (AI L0ads,

PT. AI(URA BINA CITRA

AMENDMENT NOTES
Date

oflssue :

4 January 2010

Affected Document : PT-OCTG 03


The document divided into 2 (two) procedures as revision

.
.

ASME BPV Sect. V Article 6, 2004 Edition


ASME BPV Sect. v SE 165

To be:

. ASTM 8165,20028
. DS I Volume 3, lanuary 2004
. NS 2 Volume l, October 2005
. API RP 7G - 2, August 2009
All

in the following titles:

ABC-PT-0301 Visible-Solvent RemovableTechnique


ABC - PT - 0302 Visible Water Washable Technique

The applicable and relevant standard was changed from:

.
.

0l

sections and contents were totallv different.

Issued by,

QA Department

NIASTMR
DATE

PAGE

01-10-2009

I of7

DOC. NO.

REV

ABC-PT_0302

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA


LIQUID PENETMNT EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Visible - Water Washable Technique)

PT. AKURA BINA CTTRA

LIQUTO PENETRANT EXAMINATION PROCEDURE


FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Yisihle - Water Washable Technique)

DOCUMENT NO. : ABC

PREPARED

NAME

BY

PT

0302

REVIEWED BY

APPRAVED BY
NAME

ARIAMW]DIAWATI

SYAIFIJ'DIN ZUHRI

BONME F. AMRIL

POSITION

POSITION

OPERATIONS MANAGER

QAMANAGER

ASNT_NDT_LEWLIII

SIGNATI]RE

ffi
DATE

:01

-10-2009

DATE

:01

l0 - 2009

DATF

:01

l0 - 2009

lV[ASTER
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA
LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION PROCEDURE

DOC. NO.

FOR OCTG INSPECTION


(Visible - Water Washable Technique)

ABC_PT*0302

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION

1.0

2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.0

CONTENT

PAGE

scoPE..........

CODEANDREFERENCES
3
PERSONNELQUALIFICATION
3
PENETRANTMATERIALS ,.,,,...,.,,..,.....,3-4
SURIACEPREPARATION
4
CALIBRATION
..............4-5
EXAMINATIONPROCEDURES ........-...... 5-6
ACCEPTANCESTANDARDS
6
POST EXAMINATTON CLEANING ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. 6 - 7
INSPECTIONSREPORTS ......,.,,,,,.......... 7
SAFETYPRECAUTIONS ......,......
7
.

E4IAST]flR
PAGE
3 of 7

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA


LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Visible - Water Washable Technique)

1.

DOC. NO.

ABC_PT-0302

SCOPE

1.1

This procedure covers the requirements of Color Contrast Water Washable dye
penetrant examination in detecting and evaluating metallic material discontinuities in
tubular products, which are open to the surface.

1.2 This

procedure shall be utilized upon


Examination by PT. Akura Bina Citra.

the performance of Liquid

Penetrant

1.3 This

procedure only govems Liquid Penetrant Examination on surfaces with


temperature within the standard temperature 40"F - 125'F (5'C - 52'C).

1.4

The materials, shapes, or sizes to be examined and the extent ol the examination
shall be as specified by the Customer's Requirements.

CODES AND REFERENCES

2.1 ASTM E 165, Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination, 2002 Edition.
2.2 DS-l Volume 3, Drill Stem lnspection Standard, 3d Edition Janua ry 2004.
2.3 NS-2 Volume 1, Drill String lnspection Standard, l't Edition Octob er 2005.

2.4
2.5

AOI RP 7G-2, Recommended Practice for Inspection and Classification of Used


Drill Stem Elements, l't Edition August 2009.
PT. Akura Bina Citra Written Practice for NDT Personnel Qualification and
Certification Doc. No.: ABC-WP-01 latest revision.

PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION

A1l personnel carry out Liquid Penetrant Examination under this procedure shall be
qualified and certified in accordance with PT. Akura Bina Citra Written Practice for NDT
Personnel Qualification and Certification Doc. No.: ABC-WP-01 latest revision.

PENETRANT MATERIALS
The term peneffant materials, as used in this procedure are intended to include the penetrant

and developers.

family of liquid penefant materials consists of the applicable water

washable penetrant and developer as listed in Table 1. lntermixing of penotrant material


from other families or different manufacturer is not permitted.

AfiASTER
PT. AKURA BINA CMRA

DATE
01

- l0-2009

LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION PROCEDIJRE


FOR OCTG INSPECTION
- Water Washable Technique)

(Visible

Table 1 - Liquid Penetrant Family

Manufacturer

Remover/Cleaner

Penetrant

Developer

MAGNAFLUX

N/A

SKL-WP1

SKD.52

When examining Nickel Base Alloys, the sulfi.r content shall not exc,eed 1o/o of the residue
by weight and when examining Austenitic Stainless Steel or Titanium, the total chlorine plus
fluorine content shall not exceed 170 of the residue by weight. At all times, valid penetrant
materials certificates shall be alailable to any conceming parties for verification between the
batch number stated in the certificate against the one printed on the aerosol cans.

5.

SURFACEPREPARATION

5.1

.2

Prior to liquid penetrant examination, the surface to be examined and al1 adjacenl areas
within at least I inch (25 mm) shall be cleaned to a degree that the shiny metal surfaces
are visible and no traces of grease or thread dope are detectable by wiping with a dry,
unused white paper towel or tissue.
Cleaning shall be accomplished by on of the following methods
Steam or hot water and detergent
Mineral Spirits
Cleaning solvents or removers

.
.
.

5.3

After cleaning the inspection surface shall be dried to a degree that a dry, unused paper
tower or tissue rubbed on the surface does not absorb any moistwe.

5.4

Temperatue on surface of the part to be examined and the penetrant materials itself
shall be within 40"F
125"F (5'C
52'C). This shall be verified by the use of a
calibrated infrared thermometer.

6. CALIBRATION
6.

Calibration of Visible Light Meter


Visible Light meter shall be calibrated at least every I (one) year or whenever the
meter has gone through major repair. Calibration shall be conducted by a reputable
agencyAaboratory. If meters have not been in used for 1 (one) year or more,
calibration shall be done before being used. At the minimum, the last calibration
report from the one that is presently applicable shall be maintained on fi1e.

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA


LIQUID PENETMNT EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR OCTG INSPECTION
- Water Washable Technique)

(Visible

6.2

,,

Calibration of Infrared Thermometer


lnfrared Thermometer shall be calibrated at least once a year or whenever the meter has
gone through major repair by a reputable agency/laboratory. Ifmeters have not been in
used for one year or mote, calibration shall be done before being used. At the
minimum, the last calibration certificate from the one that is presently applicable shall
be maintained on file.

EXAMINATION PROCEDURES
7

.l

.2

.3

Viewing Conditions
minimum light intensity of 100 fc (1000 lx) is required on the surface to be
examined to ensure adequate sensitivity during the examination and evaluation of
indications.

Drying after Surface Preparation


Following surface preparation as defined in Par. 5, surfaces being examined shall be
dried by normal evaporation to ambient temperature. A minimum of 5 (five) minutes
but not to exceed 10 (ten) minutes, in the exposure to ambient temperature shall be
allowed before applying the dye penetrant in order to make sure that examination
surlace is completely dry.
Penetrant Application

The dye penetrant may be applied by spraying or brusfung to the surface of the part
being examined. The dwell time (length of time the peretrant remains on the surface of
the pipe) shall be a minimum of 10 minutes and a maximurn of 60 minutes. For parts
with examination surface temperatue between 40"F - 50'F (5"C lO'C), the minimum
dwell time shall be 20 minutes.

.4

Excess Penetrant Removal

Excess water washable penetrant shall be removed with a low pressure water spray
(maximum 40 psi) and the water temperature shall not exceed 1 10'F (43'C) nor below

40'F (s'c).

7.5

Drying After Excess Penetrant Removal


The surface shall then be air dried or dried by blotting with dry, lint-free cloths. If
forced warm air is used for drying the surface, the forced air temperatwe at the part
surface shall not exceed 120'F (50'C) and with enough exposure time to ensure even
surface dr],ness. If exposure to ambient temperature is used for drying the surface,
minimum of 2 (two) minuts but not to exceed 5 (five) minutes, in the exposure to
ambient temperature shall be allowed before appllng the developer in order to make
swe that examination surface is completely dry.

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA


LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Visible - Water Washable Techniquc)

DATE
01

10-2009

PAGE

6 of7

DOC. NO.

REV

ABC*PT_0302

7.6

Developer Applications
After the excess penetrant has been removed and the surface has been dried, apply
developer by spraying in such a manner as to ensue complete part coverage with a
thin, even film or developer. These types ofdeveloper carrier evaporate very rapidly at
normal room temperature and do not, therefore, require special drying technique.
Developing time for final interpretation begins immediately after a wet developer
coating is dry. The minimum developing time shall be 10 (ten) minutes and not to
exceed 30 (thirty) minutes.

7.7

Final Interpretation
Final Interpretation for evaluation shall be made within the allowable developing time
as specified in Par. 7.6. This will allow proper bleed-out of penetrant from
discontinuities into the developer coating. Ifthe surface to be examined is large enough
to preclude complete examination within the time specified then examination may be
performed in increments.

7.8

Evaluation of Indication(s)

The types of discontinuities are di{ficult to evaluate if the penetrant diffi.rses


excessively into the developer. Therefore, it is good pructice to observe the bleed-out
while applying the developer as an aid in characterizing and determining the extent of
the indication(s). Surface discontinuities are indicated by bleed-out of the penetrant,
which is normally a deep red color that stains the developer. Indications with a light
pink color may indicate excessive cleaning. On the contrary, excessive reddish
background may indicate inadequate cleaning.

ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS
An indication ofan imperfection may be larget than the imperfection that causes it; however
the size of the indication is the basis for acceptance evaluation. Any indication
characterized as cracks shall be unacceptable regardless ofsize or location.
Parts with questionable indications shall be re-cleaned and re-examined. A repeatable
indication shall be cause for rejection. Grinding or buffing of indications is prohibited.

9. POSTEXAMINATION CLEANING
After the examination has been perfomred and all examination records have

been

collected, post examination cleaning shall be done as soon as practical using a process that
doesn't adversely affect the part. Cleaning shall be done using simple water rinse or solvent
spray.

NIASTMR
PT. AKURA BII\A CITRA
LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION PROCEDURE
FOR OCTG INSPECTION
(Visible - Water Washable Technique)

DATE

0l

- I0-2009

PAGE
7 of 7

DOC. NO.

REV

ABC_PT-0302

All

acceptable connections shall be coated with an API Tool Joint Compound over all threail
and shoulder surfaces, including the end of the pin. Thread protectors shall be applied and
secured using 50 to I00 ftlbs oftorque. The tkead protectors shall be fiee ofany debris.

10.

INSPECTION REPORTS
Only rejectable indications need to be recorded. As a minimum, the type of indications and
their location shall be recorded on appropriate inspection report form. The report form shall
be custom made to suits the object being inspected and to meet customer's Quality
Asswalce requirements. A copy of the inspection report shall be stored by Akura for at
least 5 (five) years or even longer if it is stated in the contracting documents.

1I. SAF'ETY PRECAUTIONS


11.1 Liquid penefiant materials used in this procedure are relatively toxic. Therefore, care
should be exercise not to excessively inlale the fume.
1

1.2 Smoking is prohibited while perlorming liquid penetrant examination.

.3 Electrical hazards like opened electrical wire from lighting

source and the presence

of

short circuiting medium shall be treated with care.

11.4 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each liquid penetrant material shall be
consulted in determining the proper method for the disposal of used pressurized
spray cans and liquid residue waste.

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

AMENDMENT NOTES
Date

oflssue :

4 January 2010

Affected Document : LT-04

New document number issued ABC


Procedure for transport unit.

LT

0401 as Revision 0 that cover Load Testing

The applicable and relevant standard was changed from:

.
.
.

.
.
.

sr t0l9
BS 6443

AODC 036

IMCA Code
LRS Code for Lifting Appliance in Marine Environtment 1987

AWSDl.l

To be:

.
.
.
.
All

BS 12079:2006 Part I and Part


DNV 2.7-1, Aprll2006
DNV 2.7-2, December 1996
DNV 2.7-3, June 2006

sections and contents were totally different-

lssued by,

d\-/

QA Department

DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA


OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTING
INSPECTION & TESTING OF PAD EYES

PAGE

20-08-2009

lofll

DOC. NO.
ABC _LT _ O4O1

REV

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA


OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTING INSPECTION
& TESTING OF PAD EYES
DOCUMENT NO : ABC

PREPARED BY

NAME

REVIEWED BY

NAMI,]

SYAIFI]DIN 7I]HRI

POSITION

- LT - 0401

NAME

ARIANI WIDIAWATI

POSITION

..

APPROVED BY

BONNIEF. AMRIL
POSITION

DATF.

:20-08-2009

OPERATIONS MANAGER

QA MANAGER
SIGNATI]RE

re
DA]E

:20 08

2009

DATE

:20-08-2009

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE

20-08-2009

OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTING


INSPECTION & TESTING OF PAD EYES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION

CONTENT

PAGE

ATTACHMENT
EXHIBIT A : Load Testing Report.................

...............

11

IVTASTER
DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA


OPERATING PROCEDURS FOR LIFTING
INSPECTION & TESTING OF PAD EYES

1.0

PAGE

20-08-2009

3ofll

DOC. NO.
ABC _LT _ O4OI

REV
I

SCOPE

1.1

This procedure covers the inspection, examination and testing of the pad eyes for
offshore units, including offshore containers, service containers and offshore
transportation that intended for repeated use.

1.2

For offshore and service container, the Maximum Gross Weight (MGW) shall not
exceed 25000 kg.

2.0

.3

CODESANDREFERENCES

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
3.0

This procedure is used to govem load testing procedure for initial or periodic testing
with the intention ofdesign verification, safety and service purpose.

1 : 2006, Offshore Containers and Associated Lifting Sets, Part I


Offshore Containers - Design, Manufacture and Marking
BS 12079 - 3 : 2006, Offshore Containers and Associated Lifting Sets, Part 3

BS 12079

Periodic Inspection, Examination and Testing


DNV 2.7 - 1, Offshore Containers, April 2006
DNV 2.7 - 2, Offshore Service Container, December 1995
DNV 2.7 - 3, Portable Offshore Units, June 2006

PERSONNELQUALIFICATION

All personnel carry out this inspectiog examination and testing under this procedure shall
be qualified and certified as ASNT NDT Level II in accordance with PT. Akura Bina
Citra (Akura) Written Practice, Doc. No.: BC

WP

* 0l

current edition.

He/she shall have qualification in visual and welding inspection, internally or extemally.
Good comprehension of various load test technical standard is a must.

4.0
"!:

"'

'r"'-

'9''

'

LIFTING TEST PREPARATION

'/ 4.1
4.2

1.,/

(,!.

,,,t\t.,..1

.i ,, !.,i.,.,,

Visual inspection shall be performed on the full body of the unit to ensure they are
fit for their designed purpose ofits service.
Pad eyes welds shall be visually acceptable in regards to their weld sizes and weld

profile. Cross reference to engineering drawings or applicable codes is required by


both Akura and the customer.

PT. AKURA BTNA CITRA

PAGE

4of11

OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTINC


INSPECTION & TESTTNG OF PAD EYES

5.0

4.3

Proper non destructive testing (NDT) shall be conducted prior to Load Test. The
type of NDT shall be either Magnetic Particle Examination (AC Yoke - Wet Nonfluorescence technique) or Liquid Penetrant Examination (Color Contrast Solvent
Removable technique). The NDT procedures shall be approved by an NDT Level
III. These procedures may be Akura's or its customer's whichever is specified in the
contract-

4.4

Dimensional properties of the unit shall be taken. Pad eyes dimensional properties
shall be verified as per the designated applicable standard mentioned in Paragraph 2
of this procedure. Customer shall be notified when the pad eyes is not in
compliance with the standard.

4.5

Inspector should refer to the initial certificate or the last inspection report before
carry out a periodic examination.

CALIBRATION
5.1

Calibration of Load Cell


Load Cell and handset shall be calibrated annually in accordance with ISO 7500-1
or other recognized standard to an accuracy of + 2Vo. Should a load cell be
overloaded or received a shock load (e.g. from being dropped), it is recommended
that the Load Cell and handset be re-calibrated before further use. A label shall be
tagged on the equipment to show the last date ofcalibration.

5.2

Calibration ofTest Block or Concrete Block


Test Block or Concrete Block where used as counterweight shall be calibrated
intemally by Akura as minimum every second year. The measured mass of each
block in kilogram, shall be legibly and durably marked. Calibration report shall be
properly maintained on file.
Care should be taken in the storage of calibrated concrete blocks so as to prevent
the absorption of water which will influence on the actual mass ofthe block.

5.3

Calibration of Caliper
Calipers for measuring of dimensional pad eyes shall be calibrated in accordance
with recognized standard at least once a year by a reputable laboratory/agency. The
last calibration label shall be put on the measuring equipment.

n/flASg'mR
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

PAGE

DATE

20-08-2009

of

11

OPERATINC PROCEDLIRE FOR LIFTING


INSPECTION & TESTING OF PAD EYES

6.0

LIFTING PROCEDURES

6.1

General

Test mass/test load shall normally be evenly distributed inside the unit. If it is not
possible to place all the test masses inside the unit, some of it may be placed on the
outside or under the unit, provided that it would give a loading on the structure
similar to the distribution ofthe loading in the unit's operating condition.

Examples of appropriate means of application oftest mass/test load are


calibrated test block,
water bags,
sand bags,
free weights,
a suitable test rig.

Container with additional cargo deck, the test mass / test load shall be evenly
divided between the floor and the additional deck. If the additional deck is
removable, it will be necess,lry to carry out the test with the test mass / test load
divided between the additional deck and the floor, as well as with the whole test
mass / test load, on the floor.
The unit shall be lifted by a lifting set with an "angle to the vertical" equal to the
design angle. The unit shall be lifted clear ofthe ground throughout the test.
Where the lifting set intended for use with the unit is used for the lifting test, care
shall be taken to ensure that no overloading, deformation or distortion is induced in
the lifting set. Should the lifting set normally fitted to the container be used for
lifting test it should be visually inspected after the load test.
The container shall be carefully lifted in such a way that no significant acceleration
forces occur. It shall be held for 5 minutes before measurements are taken.

6.2

All Points Lifting


The offshore containers, service container and transportation offshore units equal or
less than 25,000 kilogram shall be loaded to a give a total mass of 2.5 x Maximum
Gross Weight (MGW) and lifted clear of the ground, using all of the pad eyes.

For transportation units from 25 tonnes through 50 tonnes the overload factor shall
follow Table l.

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE

PAGE

20-08-2009

6of11

OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR LIF NG


TNSPECTION & TESTING OF PAD EYES

Table

Proof Load Test Factor for All Points Lifting

Moximum Gross l{eisht


Less or equal to 25 tonnes
25 to 30 tonnes
30 to 50 tonnes

Proof Load Test Factor


2.5 x MGW
(MGW-25)l
x MGW
lz.s-0.2
11.5 - 0.01(MGW - 30)i x MGW

For design verification, no deflection during testing shall be greater than 1/300 of
the span of the member. The unit shall show no permanent deformation or other
damage after testing.

6.3

Two Points Lifting

An unit fitted with four pad eyes shall also be lifted from only two pad eyes,
situated diagonally opposite to each other, with a total mass
Table 2

of 1.5 MGW.

Proof Load Test Factor for Two Points Lifting

Marimum Gross Weisht


Less or equal to 25 tonnes
25 to 30 tonnes
30 to 50 tonnes

Proof Load Test Factor


1.5 x MGW
t1.s - 0.06 (MGw - 2s)l x MGW
11.2 - 0.01(MGw- 30)l x MGw

The unit shall show no permanent deformation or other damage after testing.
6.4

Vertical Impact Test


The unit with its internal test mass corresponding to Payload./Safe Working Load
(SWL), shall be either lowered or dropped dnto a workshop floor of concrete or
other rigid structure.
This floor may be covered with a sheathing of wooded planks with a thickness not
to exceed 50 mm.

If container is lowered liom a crane, the suspending wire and hook may dampen the
impact compared to a free-fall drop test. Therefore the impact speed should be
greater if a lowering test is used.
In both cases, the unit shall be so inclined that each of the bottom side and end rails
connected to the lowest comer forms an angle of not less than 50 with the floor.

NflASTER
DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

20

- 08

2009

PAGE

7of11

OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTING


INSPECTION & TESTING OF PAD EYES

However, the greatest height difference between the highest and lowest point ofthe
underside of the container comers need not be more than 400 mm.
The impacting comer shall be the one expected to have the lowest rigidity.

No significant permanent damage shall occur.


Cracks in welds and minor deformations shall be repaired.
One

ofthe following procedues shall be carried out

6.4.1

Drop Test

An intemal load equal to SWL shall be safely secured and the container
shall be inclined as described above.
The unit shall be suspended from a quick release hook. When released, the
container shall drop freely from at least 50 mm to give it a speed at initial
impact of at least 1 m,/s.

6.4.2

Lowering Test

An intemal load equal to SWL shall be safely secued and the unit shall be
inclined as described above.
The unit shall be lowered to the floor to floor at a constant speed ofnot less
than 1.5 m/s.

6.5

Other Test

6.5.1

Open top containers with an overall length of 6.5 m or more, with fork
pockets designed for lifting of load with a total uniformly distributed gross
mass of 1.6 (R + S)g and lifted clear of the ground using the fork pocket. No
deflections during testing shall be greater than 1/300 of the span of the
member. The unit shall show no permanent deformation or other damage
after testing.

R : Rating or maximum gross mass ofthe unit including permanent equipment

ard its

cargo; but excluding the lifting set

Notes : The mass of the lifting set is not included in R because the lifting set is oilen not
available at the time of certification and because it may be replaced during the lifetime on
the unit

S : The mass oflifting

set

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

PAGE

DATE

20,08 -

2009

8of11

OPERATINC PROCEDURE FOR LIFTING


INSPECTION & TESTING OF PAD EYES

6.5.2

7.0

Tanks for dangerous cargoes shall be tested according to the requirements


the IMDC (Intemational Maritime Dangerous Containers) Code.

of

PAD EYES REQUIREMENTS

In order to prevent lateral bending moments on the pad eyes, they shall be aligned with
the sling to the centre of the lift, with a maximum manufacturing tolerance * 2.5.
Any difference in the diagonal measurements between lifting pin centre shall not exceed
0.2%o of lhe length of the diagonal, or 5 mm, whichever is the greater.
The diameter of holes in the pad eyes shall match the shackle to be used, cleara:rce
between shackle pin and pad eye hole shall not exceed 6Yo of the nominal shackle pin
diameter. However, maximum concentrated stresses at the hole edges shall not exceed 2 x
Minimum Yield Strength at design load.

It is recommended that the clearance actually be provided as close

as practicable

to the

6%Lilrlit.
The tolerance between the pad eye thickness and the inside width ofthe shackle shall not
exceed 25%o ofthe inside width ofthe shackle.

Pad eyes shall be so designed as to permit free movement


termination without fouling the eye.

of the shackle and sling

Pad eyes shall not protrude outside the boundaries of the container other than vertically
upward, and shall be designed as far as possible to avoid damages from other units.
Lifting points shall be positioned on the unit to preclude, as far as practicable, the risk of
sling fouling against the unit or its cargo during normal use.
Pad eyes shall be welded to the frame

with full penetration welds.

It is recommended that pad eyes be slotted into primary structurc.


Where ISO comer fittings are mounted in conjunction with pad eyes, the comer fittings
are not intended for lifting with offshore slings.

NIIASTMR
PT. AKT]RA BINA CITRA

PAGE

9ofl1

OPERATINC PROCEDURE FOR LIFTING


INSPECTION & TESTING OF PAD EYES

8.0

POST LIFTING INSPECTION AND EXAMINATION

On completion of the lifting test, a proper Non Destructive Test and visual inspection of
the pad eyes shall be carried out.

NDT shall be either Magnetic Particle Examination (AC Yoke : Wet Non-fluorescence
technique) or Liquid Penetrant Examination (Color Contrast Solvent Removable
techniques). The NDT procedures shall be approved by an NDT Level III. These
procedures may be of Akura's or its customer's, whichever it specified in the contract.

9.0

RE _ INSPECTION OF REPAIRED AREA

Discontinuities on pad eyes shall be removed and repaired. Repair of pad eyes shall be
carried out using approved manufacturing procedures. The repair shall be noted on the
certificate.

Non Destructive Testing shall be performed to ensure the discontinuities has

been

removed.

1O.O

MARKING
The unit shall be fitted with data plate carrying information of the testing.

The plate shall be made out of corrosion resistant material and securely be attached
extemally in a manner designed to avoid unauthorized or accidental removal. The plate
shall be fitted to a door or on the body, in prominent position.

Aluminium rivets have been found to be unsuitable as a fixing method in the offshore
environment and shall not be used.
The information on the plate shall be written in English.
The test shall be permanently and legibly marked on the plates in characters not less than
4 mm high.

I1.O INSPECTION REPORT


The load test result shall be recorded in an inspection report as mentioned in Exhibit A
this procedure.

of

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

PAGE

DATE
20 -08 * 2009

I0of11

OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTING


INSPECTION & TESTING OF PAD EYES

The inspection report shall show the following information as a mrnimum

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

0
c)

Unit identification
Owner's name
Certifrcate Number
Date and number of the preceding certificate of examination, name of the person
who issued it and his employer
The Total Gross Weight in kilograms applicable to all points lifting test and the
method oftest (where relevant)
Detail of the NDE carried out (where relevant)
A statement that the unit described was thoroughly examined and that particulars
are correct

h)

i)

i)

k)

Reference where appropriate to any report issued to the owner arising from the
test/inspection process
Confirmation that the data plate was marked
Date of examination (date of signature or report also to be shown if different from
the date of examination)
Name of organization and the signature and unique identification mark of the
inspector/inspection body carrying out the examination.

The report, signed by the inspector, shall be issued to the owner. The reports shall be
approved by an ASNT NDT Level II or equivalent examiner'
The copy of inspection report shall be stored for a minimum 5 (five) years or longer
specified in the conftact.

if

12.0 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS


12.1 Every person involved in performing this procedure has the responsibility to bring
to the attention of the HSE/QA Manager or relevant personnel for any safety
anomalies before, during or after the commencement ofthe Load Test.
12.2 Load Testing shall be conducted at proper and safe area. When applicable, work
permit shall be completed prior testing. Safety sign shall be put around to identit,
the restricted area and to wam other people especially during load testing.
12.3 The handling facilities such as crane, forklift and other lifting set such as wire rope
sling shall be checked that they are in good conditions to support the load testing. It
is recommended for the personnel who operates the handling facilities to have valid
certifrcation.

OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTINC


INSPECTION & TESTING OF PAD EYES

Exhibit A

PAGE

DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

ll

20-08-2009
DOC. NO.
ABC _LT _ O4OI

of

11

REV
I

LOAD TESTING REPORT

PROOF LOAD TESTING R,EPORT

No.
CUSTOMER
OWNER
Customer Work order
lob Location
Certificate

Issue Date

:
:

ABC

lob

No.

EOUIPMENT DETATL
Description
Dimension
Serial Number
MM/YY of Manufacture

INSPECfION SUMMARY
Date of

Examination

Visual inspection has been performed at critical area and full length of body before performing Load Testing.

Procedure
Equipment
Manufacturer
Serial Number
Range

Test

Weight
Load
Maximum Gross Weight
Required Test Weight
Actual Test
Actual Tare
SWL

Pay

:
:
:
:

:
:
:
:
:

kg
kg
kg
kg (..... lifting
kg

points) at

The test and or examinati6n(s) have been satisfactorily completed in accordance with -.-..............
(Explanation for NDT carried out ancl the result)
(confirmation that the data plate was marked)

PERTODIC EXA,I'INA,ION
( Recommendation

fot next inspection)

Name
:
Certificate ;
Inspector Slgnature,

Inspector

Valid

Inspector

Reviewed and

Approved,

until

Customer Representative

NNASTE]R
PAGE

DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

0l -

OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTING


INSPECTION & TESTING OF SLINGS
AND SHACKI,ES

06

'l

2010

O4O2

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA


OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTING INSPECTION
& TESTING OF SLINGS

DOCUMENT NO. : ABC

NAME

NAME

SYAIFIIDIN ZI]HRI

0402

POSITION

APPROVEDBY
NAME

ARIANI WIDIAWATI

QA MANAGER

BONNIE F. AMRIL

OPERATIONS MANAGER

ASNT _ NDT _ LEVEL

III

TURE

DATE

REVIEWED BY

PREPARED BY

POSITION

LT

:01

06

2010

DATE

:01

06

2010

DATE

:01

16

REV

DOC. NO.

ABC _LT

of

06

2010

n/flASTmR

ffi

PAGE

DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

0l -

06

2010

OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTING


INSPECTION & TESTING OF SLINGS
AND SHACKLES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION

PAGE

CONTENT

1.0

scoPE............

2.0

CODES AND

3.0

REFERENCES.......
PERSONNEL QUALTFTCATTON...

4.0

LTFTTNG TEST

..........,..
.............

............3 PREPARATrON..................................... 4

6.0

CALIBRATION.
LIFTING PROCEDURES..

7.0

THOROUGH EXAMINATION AND DISCARD CRITERIA

5.0

.............
.......................5

-6

FORWIREROPE...................

...............6-8
AND EXAMINATON............ 8

8.0

POST LIFTING INSPECTION

9.0

WIRE ROPE SLING AND SHACKLE REQUIRED BY

SERVICE
MARKING.......
INSPECTION REPORT..........
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.......
OFFSHORE

10.0
I 1.0
12.0

ATTACHMENT
EXHIBIT A : SLING DIMENSIONS
EXHIBITB:SLINGREPORT

.....8 _ 9

............ 9- l0
IO

............. l0 - l l

2of16

eflA s T'& R
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE
01

06

2010

PAGE
3

of 16

OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTING


INSPECTION & TESTING OF SLINGS
AND SHACKLES

1.

SCOPE

1.1
1

.2

1.3

2.

Types of slings covered by this procedure:


Wire rope slings
Chain slings

This procedure is used to govern load testing procedure for initial or periodic testing
with the intention of design verification, safety and service purpose.

CODE AND REF'ERENCES

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6

3.

This procedure covers the inspection, examination and testing of the slings for general
lifting service that intended for repeated use.

BS EN 12079 - 2:2006 Offshore Containers and Associated Lifting Sets, Part 2:


Lifting Set - Design, Manufacture and Marking.
BS EN 12079 - 3:2006 Offshore Containers and Associated Lifting Sets, Part 3 :

Periodic Inspection, Examination and Testing.


DNV 2.7 1, Offshore Containers, April 2006
BS EN 13414 l:2003 Steel Wire Rope Sling, Part 1: Slings for General Lifting
Service.
BS EN 13414 1:2003 Steel Wire Rope Sling, Part 2: Specification for Information
for Use and Maintenance to be provided by the Manufacturer.
ISO 4309 Cranes - Wire Ropes Care, Maintenance, Installation, Examination and
Discard

PERSOI{I\ELQUALIFICATION

All personnel carry out this inspection, examination and testing under this procedure shall
be qualified and certified as ASNT NDT Level II in accordance with PT. Akura Bina Citra
(Akura) Written Practice, Doc. No.: ABC

WP

01 latest edition.

The inspector should have, a minimum, a knowledge and adequate practical experience of:
Statutory requirements relating to lifting sets.
Methods of testing lifting sets.
Defects likely to be found in lifting sets and acceptable levels of wear, distortion and
deterioration in relation to safety in use.

MASTER
DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA


OPERA'I'ING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTING
INSPECTION & TESTING OF SLINCS
AND SIJACKLES

PAGE

0l 06 2010

4of16

DOC. NO.

REV

ABC

LT

O4O2

Visual examination as required by the applicable standard and the signs of wealness
and defects to look for.

4. LIFTINGTESTPREPARATION
An inspection is a visual check on the condition ofthe sling to identifr any obvious damage
or deterioration that might affect its fitness for use.
Shackles shall be visually inspected. Shackles shall be of bolt type with hexagon nut and
split pin. SCREW PIN SHACKLES SHALL NOT BE USED.

Table I
Nominal

Pin

WLL

Diameter

(Ton)

(mm)

3.25
4.75
6.5
8.5
9.5

Standard Shackles

Inside

Width at
Pin
(mm)

Inside
Length

Inside
Length

ol Dee
Shackles

Shackles

ofBow

l9

27

(mm)
47

22

3l

52

65

25

36

65

76

28

43
46.s
51.5

74

88

83

701

12

12

35

13.5

38

l7

42

25

50

60
74

(mm)
57

87

r08

104
I l5

126

139

168

t39

To facilitate examination, slings may need to be cleaned so as to be free from oil, dirt and
rust prior to examination. This can usually be accomplished by using a wire brush. Other
methods may be used providing that the parent metal is not damaged. Methods to avoid are
those using acids, overheating or removal of metal
The inspection shall be caried out with normally corrected vision, in a situation providing
sufficient lighting and other facilities necessary to allow it to be carried out safely and
effectively.

Check its diameter and length, its identification and condition to verifu
accordance with the specified specification or requirements

it is lully

in

Inspector should refer to the initial certificate or the last inspection report before carry out a
periodic examination.

iffil
i'ffii

Figure I

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE

PAGE

0l -06-2010

5of16

OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTING


INSPECTION & TESTING OF SLINGS
AND SHACKLES

Correct Position in Measurement of Wire Rope Diameter

5. CALIBRATION
Calibration of Load Cell
Load Cell and handset shall be calibrated annually in accordance with ISO 7500-1 or other
recognized standard to an accuracy of + 2%o. Should a load cell be overloaded or received a
shock load (e.g. from being dropped), it is recommended that the Load Cell and handset be
re-calibrated before further use. A label shall be tagged on the equipment to show the last
date of calibration.
Calibration of Test Block or Concrete Block
Test Block or Concrete Block where used as counterweight shall be calibrated intemally by
Akura as minimum every second year. The measured mass ofeach block in kilogram shall
be legibly and durably marked. Calibration report shall be properly maintained on file.
Care should be taken in the storage of calibrated concrete blocks so as to prevent the
absorption of water which will influence on the actual mass ofthe block.
Calibration of Caliper
Calipers for measuring of dimensional slings shall be calibrated in accordance with a
recognized standard at least once a year by a reputable laboratory/agency. The last
calibration label shall be put on the measuring equipment.

6. LIFTINGPROCEDURES
Load Test Requirement

A&AST}OR
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE

PAGE

0l -06-2010

6of16

OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTING


INSPECTION & TESTING OF SLINGS
AND SHACKLES

DNV Requirement

Atestloadequalto2xWLLofasinglelegratedinaccordancetoExhibitA+/-2Voshall
be applied to each leg without shock. The load shall be applied for a minimum of 2.5
MINUTES before measurements

are taken.

BS EN Requirement

A test load equal to 2.5 x WLL of a single leg rated in accordance to Exhibit A + I - 2o/o
shall be applied to each leg without shock. The load shall be applied for a minimum of 5
MINUTES before measurements are taken.
Table2-ProofloadTest
Standard

Test Load

Holding Time

DNV 2.7-1
BS EN 12079

2xWLL
2.5xWLL

2.5 Minutes
5 Minutes

For offshore service, ropes with WLL values BELOW 7.0 shall not be used
Ensure that the weight

ofthe load is within the rated capacity of the sling

Start and stop slowly. Sudden starts and stops dramatically increase the stresses in hoist
ropes and slings. Lift slowly until the load is suspended to minimize swinging. Avoid
shock loading.
Ensure that all personnel stand clear of the suspended load. Keep hands and fingers out
the area between the sling and the load.

of

Load shall be set on blocks. Do not pull a sling from under a load that is resting on the
sling.

7.

THOROUGH EXAMINATION AND DISCARD CRITERIA FOR WIRE ROPE


Wire rope slings are subjected to conditions that affect their safety. It is necessary to ensure
that the sling is safe for continued use.
The sling should be withdrawn from service
reached or exceeded:

if any of the following conditions

are present,

NflAST'ffiXq.
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA
OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTINC
INSPECTION & TESTING OF SLINGS
AND SHACKLES

.l

DATE

0l *06-20t0
DOC.NO.
ABC _LT _

O4O2

PAGE
7

of 16
REV
0

Sling Marking
The slings markings, i.e information on the sling identification and for the working
load limit are illegible.

7.2

Damaged Upper and Lower Terminals


Wear, distortion or cracking of the upper or lower terminal

t-1

Damaged Rope Termination


Wear, distortion or cracking of femrles or the pulling out of a splice

7.4

Broken Wire
Broken wires are detrimental because of:
a) the possibility of injury to the user's hands
b) the loss of the strength in the rope

Broken wires are usually caused by mechanical damage, although corrosion may also
be a factor.
The appearance of well distributed broken wires may have no marked effect on the
strength of the sling but the discard criteria below shall be adopted for randomly
distributed broken wires and concentrated broken wires respectively.

7.5

6 randomly distribute broken outer wires in a length of 6d but more than 14


randomly distributed broken wires in a length of 30d where d is the nominal rope
diameter.
3 adiacent broken outer wires in one strand.

Rope Distortion

Kinking, crushing, birdcaging or core protrusion or other damage which distorts the
rope structure.
7.6

Rope Wear
10% of the nominal rope diameter.

't1

Corrosion
Pitting of the wires or loss of flexibility of the rope due to severe intemal corrosion
may occur where slings have been improperly stored or have been used in particularly
corrosive conditions, such as moving loads in and out of acidlalkali baths. The effect
is readily identified through the loss of flexibility and roughness to the touch. While
light surface rusting is unlikely to affect the rope strength, it may be indicative of
intemal corrosion, the effect of which is not predictable.

MASTMR
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA
OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTTNG
INSPECTION & TESTING OF SLINGS
AND SHACKLES

8.

.8

DATE

PAGE

0l -06-2010

8ofl6

DOC. NO.
ABC _LT _ O4O2

REV
0

Heat Damage
Heat damage as evidenced by discoloration ofthe wires, loss of lubrication or pitting
ofthe wires caused by electric arcing

POST LIFTING INSPECTION AND EXAMINATION


On completion of the lifting test, a proper Non Destructive Test and visual inspection ofthe
pad eyes shall be carried out.

NDT shall be either Magnetic Particle Examination (AC Yoke - Wet Non-fluorescence
technique) or Liquid Penetrant Examination (Color Contrast Solvent Removable
techniques). The NDT procedures shall be approved by an NDT Level III. These
procedures may be of Akura's or its customer's, whichever it specified in the contract.
Components that are cracked, visibly distorted or twisted, severely corroded
deposits that cannot be removed shall be discarded and replaced.

or

have

Ensure that damaged slings are rendered unusable, removed from service, or discarded. Put
any comment to replace with the new slings. This rejection shall be reported.

Minor damage such as nicks and gouges to terminal fittings may be removed by careful
grinding or filing. The surface shall blend smoothly into adjacent material without abrupt
change of section. The complete removal of the damage shall not reduce the thickness of
the section at that point to less that the manufacturer's specified minimum dimension or by
more than 1070 of nominal thickness ofthe section. This repair shall be recorded.

9. WIRE ROPE SLING AND SHACKLE

REQUIRED BY OFFSHORE SERVICE

9.1 Wire Rope


Only wire rope grade 1770 or 1960 shall be used. The working load limit may be
determined based on the specified rope grade. The wire ropes shall be 6-stranded and
of type 6x19 or 6x36 and they may be fiber cored or steel cored.
The terminations of wire rope shall be femrle secured eyes with thimbles and comply
with BS EN 13411 - 3 or other recognized standard.

9.2

Shackles

Shackles shall be according to EN 13889 or EN 1677-1 or other recognized standard,


with additional requirements:

ffi
-

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE

PAGE

0l -06-2010

9of16

OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTING


INSPECTION & TESTING OF SLINGS
AND SHACKLES

Minimum breaking force shall not be taken less than 5 times the WLL.
The tolerance on the nominal diameter ofthe shackle pin shall be -11+3o/o.

Shackles are normally separate components form the chain or wire rope slings, and are
often supplied separately from these. Shackles are considered as part of the lifting
sling if assembly secured.

"
6

t9
FC
RH

OL
FSWR

Number of strands that make up the rope


Number of wires that make up each strand
Fibre core
Rieht hand lav
Ordinary lay
Flexible steel wire rope

ffi
O

Wire
Strand

core

ffiRope
Figure

10.

Wire Rope Construction

MARKING
satisfactory completion of inspection/examination/test, as applicable, the sling
identification tag shall be permanently marked that attached to the top assembly of the
sling. The tag shall be made of metal with the marking permanently embossed or stamped.
The text shall be permanently and legibly marked on the plates in characters not less than 4

On

mm high.
Shackles shall be indelibly marked with a unique identification. Such marking must be
applied using "low stress" stamp, the height of which should be a minimum of 5 mm, and
positioned away from areas ofhighest tensile stress i.e. applied to the straight section of the
body adjacent to the eye.

Marking on tags for chain and wire rope sling shall include:
a) Unique identification number
b) Owner
c) Diameter of chain or wire rope used

ffi

PT. AKT'RA BINA CITRA

PAGE

l0 of l6

OPERATINC PROCEDURE FOR LIFTTNG


INSPECTION & TESTING OF SLINGS
AND SHACKLES

d) Working Load Limit of the lifting set


e) Length of chain or wire rope used
f) The date YY - MM - DD of the inspection / examination / test as applicable
e) Any ofthe applicable suffix, chosen from below abbreviation:
: indicating load test, non-destructive examination and visual inspection
: indicating visual inspection only
: indicating NDE and visual inspection

T
V
\rN

All information on the plate shall be written in English.

II.

INSPECTION REPORT
When, in the opinion ofthe inspector, an inspection report shall be issued to the owner.
containing the following inlormation as a minimum:
a) Sling and shackle identification number

b) Owner's name
c) Certificate number
d) Statement that the lifting

equipment described was thoroughly inspected, examined and


tested, is safe to operate and that the parliculars are correct

e)

f)

g)

h)

i)

Detail ofthe NDE carried out (where relevant)


Confirmation that the sling identification tag was marked; date of inspection (date of
signature or report also to be shown ifdifferent from date ofinspection
Name of organization and the signature and unique identification mark of the
inspector/inspection body carrying out the examination.
Visual examination result
Applicable test

The report, signed by the inspector, shall be issued to the owner. The reports shall be
approved by an ASNT NDT Level I or equivalent examiner. The copy of inspection report
shall be stored for a minimum 5 (five) years or longer ifspecified in the contract.

12. SAFETY

REQUIREMENTS

12.1 Every person involved in performing this procedure has the responsibility to bring to
the attention ofthe HSE/QA Manager or relevant personnel for any safety anomalies
before, during or after the commencement ofthe Load Test.
12.2 Load Testing shall be conducted at proper and safe area. When applicable, work
permit shall be completed prior testing. Safety sign shall be put around to identiry the
restricted area and to warn other people especially during load testing.

MASTER
PT. AKURABINA CITRA

DATE
01

-06-2010

PAGE

ll

of16

OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTING


INSPECTION & TESTING OF SLINGS
AND SHACKLES

12.3 The handling facilities such as crane, forklift and other lifting set such as wire rope
sling shall be checked that they are in good conditions to support the load testing. It is
recommended for the personnel who operate the handling facilities to have valid
certification.

12.4 To prevent injury to the inspector's hands, protruding broken wires can be broken off
in the valleys between the strands by reverse bending the wire, with the help ofpliers,
until fracture occurs.

S/nASTmR
PAGE

DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

0l -06-2010

12

of

16

OPEMTING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTING


INSPECTION & TESTING OF SLINGS
AND SHACKLES

Exhibit

A-

SLING DIMENSIONS

Table A-1 Workins Load Limit for 12 and 4 Chain Sline at Different Ansles
Nominal
Size

of

Slins

Single Leg
SIing and
Forerunners

Two Leg Slings at

Four Leg Slings at


45'

40"

35'

30'

25'

45"

40'

35"

30'

25'

l0

3.1 5

16.71

7.24

7.7

8.2

8_6

14.5,l

t5.21

t5.5t

15.7,l

t3

s.30

12.2

13.0

I1.8

t4.4

'7.5

8.7

16

18.4

19.7

20.8

21.8

I1.3

23.O

24.6

26.0

t5.3

16.4

fi.2

27 .5

29.1

15.8

t7 .2

l8.l

19.4

20.3

20
22

12.5
15.0

20.5

21.7

22.7

26.O

27 .2

27.7

29.0

42.4
45.0

49.1

55.1

32.8
34.7

34.6
36.7

JO-J

52.1

43.s
54.4
57 .6

24.6
26.2

20.0
21.2

32.5
39.0
41.6
52.0

19.2
23.O

16.0

30;7
36.9
39.3

17.7

23
25

26.5
31.8
33.9

2s.0

25.7
28.7
34.5
36.8
46.0
48.7
57.5

27.2
30.5
34.0

14.1

19

21.2
23.8

9.2
13.9
l7 .3

14.5

18

8.00
10.00

11.2
17.0

t4.81
8.1
12.3

61.4

65.0

68.0

8.3

4t.o

43.3

45.3

.4

85.6
t 08.8
135.9

48.3

54.6

5',1

69.3

72.5

86.6

90.6

mm

26
28
32
36

40.0

53.0
66.8
84.9

40

50.0

106.1

31.5

'72.4

77

9t.9

98.3

81.8
r 03.9

114.9

122.9

129.9

40.8

21.2
22.6
28.3
30.0
35.4
44.5

24.5
30.6
3?.5
3

l3.l

56.6

61 .3

51.6
65.6

70;7

'76.6

8t.s

9.6

t8_l

38.4

.t

Table A-2 Working Load Limit for 1,2 an,d 4 Wire Rope Sling at Different Angles
Fibre Cored Rope Grade 1770
Nominal
Size

of

Slins

Single Leg
Sling and

Four Leg Slings at

mm

l0
l3
l6
18

t9
20
22
23
25

26
28
32

36

40

Two Leg Slings at

Forerunners

3.40
4.35
5.20
6.30
7 .20
8.40

40"

35'

30'

25"

45'

40'

35"

30'

25'

.8

8.4

8.8

9.2

t4.81

t s.21

t5.61

t5.91

16.21

10.0
12.0

10.7

ll-3

I l_8

16.21

16.'7)

7.5

.0

12.8

l1.5

l4.l

9.0

7.9
9.4

14.5
16.5

15.5

8.0
9.7

8.5

13.4
l5_3

7.4
8.9

I1.0

10.3
I l_8

10.9

10.2
I 1.9

15.2

't6.9

13.8
18.0

14.5

ls.6

g.t

19.9

7.2
9.2

'7

21.8

22.8
29.9

17.8

19.3

?7 .0

28.6

34.4

36.4
44.2
54.6
65.0

I1.0
14.0

29.7

?5.3
32.2

17.0

36.1

39.1

41.8

2t.0

44.5
53.0
61.5

48.3
57.5
66.6
7',1 .0
89.6

51.6

25.0
29.0
33.5
39.0

7t.l
82.7

.t

16.4
18.7

t'7

17.7
20.6

6t.4
71.3
82.3
95.8

19.6

I1.4
l3_l

38.1

19.8

21.4

22.9

24.2

24.4

46.2

24.0

26.0

27

29.7
35.4

29.4
36.4

30.8

.t

.9
34.4

41.0

43.3

45.3

s2.6

57

5.3

68.0
78.8

87.0

9l.l

41.0
47.4

10r.3

106.0

55.2

12.9

12.5

8.3

8.1

44.4

4'1

.5

50.2

51.3
59.8

54.9
63.9

58.0

60.7

6't .5

70.'1

SfiAST'ffiR
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE

PAGE

0l -06-2010

l3 of 16

OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTING


INSPECTION & TESTING OF SLINGS
AND SHACKLES

Table A-3 Working Load Limit for 1,2 and 4 Wire Rope Sling at Different Angles
Steel Cored Rope Grade 1770
Nominal
Size

of

Single Leg
Sling and

Sline
mm

Forerunners

l0

3.70

l3
t6

4.60

Four Leg Slings at

Two Leg Slings at

40'

35"

30'

25'

45"

40'

35"

300

25')

8.5

9.1

9.6

t0. t

15.71

t6.l I

t6.41

16.'71

r0.6

I1.3

12.0

13.0

13.9

t4;7

12.5
15.4

t5.21
t6.51

7.0
8.7

7.5
9.3

8.0
9.8

8.3
10.2

t4.2

15.4

16.5

t7 .4

18.2

t6.s

t7 .9

19.2

21.2
24.5

t 1.0

t2.l
t4.t

45"
7.8
9.8

t2-0

t9

5.65
6.70
7.80

20

9_00

l9_l

20.7

22.1

20.3
23.4

22

11.8
15.0

25.0
31.8
39.2

27

.t

29.0

30."1

32.1

34.5
42.5
51.7
59.8
72.4

36.9
45.5

39.0
48.1

55_3

67 .5

82.'.l

63.9
77.4
88.5

96 _s

103.2

109.1

l8

23
25

26
28
32
36

40

8.5
22.5
t

26.0

4'1

.7

31.5
36.0

55.2
66.8
76.4

42.0

89.1

8.5

81.8
93.5

8.0
9.5

10.3

t.0

I1.6

12.7

12.0
13.8

12.8
14;7

13.5
15.6

t6;7

18.1

19.3

40.8

2t.2

23.0

50.3
61.2
70.7
85.6

26.2
31.8
36.8

28.3
34.5
39.8

40.8

44.5

48.3

97 .9

50.9
59.4

55.2

24.6
30.3
36.9
42.6
51.6
59.0
68.8

20.4
26.0
32.0
39.0
45.0
54.6
62.4
72_7

76.1

114.2

64_3

16.3

21.4
27 .2

33.5
47.1
57

.l

65.3

NlIAST'E}R
PAGE

DATE

PT. AKT]RA BINA CITRA

0l -06-2010

14

of

16

OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTING


INSPECTION & TESTING OF SLINGS
AND SHACKLES

ExhibitB-SLINGREPORT
PROOF LOAD TESTING REPORT

Page

No,
:
CUSTOMER
OWNER
Customer Work Order :
lob Location
Certificate

Issue Date

"

ABC Job No.

EOUIPMENT DETAIL
Description
Serial Number

Number of Leg
Length of each

Actual Diameter
MM/YY of Manufacture

Capacity

:
:

Cm
TON

IITSPECTION SUMI,IARY
Date of

Examination

Visual inspection has been performed at full length of body before performing Magnetic Particle Inspection
and Proof Load Testing.

Procedure
Equipment
Manufacturer
Serial Number
Range
SwL per leg
Required Load Test
Actual Test
Test

i
i
:
:

:
:
:

kg
kg
kg

( Ansle' )

TEST RESULT

PERIODIC EXAMI I{ATIOT{

Inspector
Inspector

Name
Certificate

lnspector

Signature,

DUE DATE

Reviewed and

Approved,

Customer Representative

of 3

I\{AST]OR
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE

PAGE

0t -06-2010

l5 of 16

OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTING


INSPECTION & TESTING OF SLINGS
AND SHACKLES

MAGI{ETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION REPORT

Paqe 2 of

Issue Date

Certificate No.
CUSTOMER
OWNER

ABC Job No.

Customer Work Order

lob Location
EOUIPiiIENT DETAIL

0
0
0

Description
Serial Number
Actual Diameter
MM/YY of Manufacture

Number of Leg
Length of each
Capacity

Cm
Ton

INSPECTION SUtrlItlARY
VISUAL I'TSPECTION

Criteria : EN 13414-2
DefectYDefectYDefectYN
Broken wire
n n Reduction of rope diameter
E ! Kink
Externalwear ! E Basket or lantern deformation [ ! oamage
Decrease elasticity f] D Wire protrusion
n E Bend
Fracture of strand
increase
in
rope
diameter
Local
f] E
n E corrosion
FlattenedprotionEECoreofstrandprotrusion/nDSevereRusttrn
Waviness
Other:
n n distorsion
Pre Cleaning
: Solvent and Brushing
Acceptance

n
n
!
tr

tr
tr
!
t]

MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION


Test

Methods

Reference

Procedure

Acceptance Criteria
Equipment Used

Consumables
Material
Illumination

:
:
:
.

Surface Temperature

oC

The yoke Ac was able to lift 10 lb weight and the test is conducted every 5 (six) months.
Field indicator was used to vehry and evaluate the performance abd sensitivity of magnetic particles
During inspection, the legs of yoke was set in varying between 75 to 150 mm apart.
Wet contlnuous flow was applied using magnetization separately in two different peDendicular direction
with each other.

Post

Cleaning

Refer to next page

TEST RESULT

Inspector
lnspector

Name

Certificate

Inspector

:
:

Signature,

Reviewed and Approved,

Customer Representative

MAST}OR
PT. AKURABINA CITRA
OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR LIFTING
INSPECTION & TESTING OF SLINGS
AND SHACKLES

0l *

DATE
06

PAGE

2010

DOC. NO,
ABC _LT _ O4O2

iIAGNETTC PARTICLE INSPECTXON


Certificate No.

l6 of 16
REV
0

Page 3 of 3

Issue Date

CUSTOMER
OWNER

Customer Work Order


Job Location

ABC Job No.

PICTURE

CRITICAL AREA INSPECTED

wire
Socket
Thimble
Ferule
LIpS
Master

n Hook n
E Shackle n
n Link
n
! other:
L_J

link tr

,{Pl after load test completed


EXAMINATION AND TEST RESULT

TEST :
TEST :

BEFORE LOAD
AFTER LOAD

Status
Status

i
i

The Wire Rope Sling has passed visual examination satisfactorily and there is no apparent discountinuities
u/erc detected during lYagnetic Particle lnspection. It is recommended to its intended use,

PERIODIC EXAIIIINATION

DUE DATE

DATE

PT. AKT]RA BINA CITRA

PAGE

20-08-2009

of

ULTRASONIC THICKNESS MEASLTREMEN'I"

DOC- NO.

REV

PROCEDIJRE

ABC-UT-O5OI

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

ULTRASONIC THICKNESS MEASUREMENT PROCEDURE

DOCUMENT NO. : ABC

PREPARED BY

SYAIFUDIN ZUHRI
:

QA MANAGER

UT - 0501

APPROVED BY

REVIEWED BY

NAME

NAME

POSITION

ARIANI WIDIAWATI

POSITION

OPERATIONS MANACER

NAME

BONNIE F. AMRII-

POSITION

ASNT, NDT, I,EVEI, III

r..^--:Q

*gE;-*."'
DATE

:20-08-2009

afATE

:20-08-2009

DA'[E

:20

08

2009

PT. AI(URA BINA CTTRA

DATE

20-08-2009

ULTRASONIC THICKNESS MEAST'REMENT


PROCEDIJRE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION

CONTENT

1.0

scoPE............

2.0

REFERENCES...

3.0

PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION...

4.0

EQU IPMENT

5.0

CALIBRATION.

6.0

EXAMINATION PROCEDURES..

7.0

RECORDING OF THICKNESS MEASURING

AND MATERIAL...

PAGf,

PT. AKT]RA BINA CITRA


UL'TRASONIC THICKNESS MEASUREMENT
PROCEDIiRE

1.

DATE
20

PAGE
3 of 8

-08 -2009

DOC. NO.

REV

ABC-UT-OsO I

SCOPE

l.l

This procedure is established for the determination of metallic material thikness based
on the use of ultrasonic pulse-echo principles where scanning and reflecting surfaces
are substantially parallel.

1.2

Methods described in this procedure are suitable for the determination of material
thickness where surface temperature is within the range of 0'C to 200'C.

1.3

This procedure is used to for thickness measurement on materials with nominal surface
curvature above 1 inch (25 mm) and thicknesses from 1 mm to 200 mm.

1.4

Mode of measurement shall be Mode I where measurement is made between an


excitation pulse and the first backwall echo from the test piece, using direct contacttype transducers.

1.5

2.

This procedure is applicable in the performance of ultrasonic thickness measurement


by PT. Akura Bina Citra (Akura).

REFERENCES
2.1

Australian Standard AS-2452 Part


Ultrasonic Testing, 1985 Edition.

2.2

3.

Determination

of

Thickness

Use of

Australian Standard AS-2083 - Calibration Blocks and Their Methods of Use in


Ultrasonic Testing, 1981 Edition.

PERSOI\NELQUALIFICATION
carry out ultrasonic thickness measurement under this procedure shall be
qualified and certified in accordance with Akura's Written Practice for NDT Personnel
Qualification and Certification Doc. No.: ABC-WP-01 latest revision.
A11 personnel

4. EQUIPMENTANDMATERIALS
4.1

Ultrasoniclnstruments
Ultrasonic thickness meter to be used shall be Panametric 26DL or
The reject control shall be in the "off' position.

K&M KT-100.

N{AST'&R.
DATE

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

20-08-2009
DOC. NO.

ULTLASONIC THICKNESS MEASUREMENT


PROCEDURE

4.2

Search

ABC.tJT-O5O

Unit

Only dual element search units are to be used. The following list ofsearch unit shall
be used within their given temperature limit, thickness range ald minimum
examination surface diameter limit.

Table

Probe techncial properties for use with Panametric 26DL

Tip

Transducers
Model No.

Beam
Angle

Diameter

Olympus
D790

0'

1l mm

Freq.
5

MHz

Temp,
Range*

-20"c
200"c

Min.
Surface
Diameter
25 mm

Range in
steel (mm)

1-200

Temperature above 60'C, search unit's maximum contact time is 5 seconds with minimum
seconds cooling time

Table 2

*
4.3

Probe techncial properties for use with K&M KT-100

Tip

Transducers
Model No.

Beam
Angle

Diameter

KT-o8

0"

l0 mm

Freq.
5

MHz

Temp.
Range*

-20'c 60'c

Min.
Surface
Diameter
25 mm

Range in
steel (mm)

| -200

Temperature above 60'C, search unit's maximum contact time is 5 seconds with minimum 30
seconds cooling time

Couplant

The couplant, including additives, shall not be detrimental to the material being
examined. Grease or commercial couplant shall be used. For ultrasonic examination
on material v/ith temperature above 70'C, special couplants shall be used to prevent
excessive evaporation from the examination surface. The couplant used for
calibration shall be ofthe same type as the one to be used on the examination of
the production parts.
Akura need to obtain couplant material certificate from the couplant manufacturer
when conducting thickness measurement on the following material:
a. Couplants used on nickel base alloys shall not contain more than 250 ppm of
sulfrr.
b. Couplants used on austenitic stainless steel or titanium shall not contain more than
250 ppm ofhalides (chlorides plus fluorides).

NIASTMR.
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA
ULTRASONIC THICKNESS MEASUREMENT
PROCEDI]RI]

4.4

DATE

PAGE

20-08-2009

5 of 8

DOC. NO.

REV

ABC-UT-O5OI

Calibration Reference Block

The following block shall be used for calibration of equipment calibration and
examination system calibration. The block is known as a stepped block and shall
conforrn to the basic shape shown in Figure 1 or consist of a series of blocks of
varying thicknesses.

t+ f:i l.is tli i + ::1.i"i1llil l,i !),il_ril (r 0:i fiI


id E l:e tn r! : pri.li+ il ntelr.,iiu
,l - Tlr b+ rlu er1l ll:' diFr+nli.rti A lilnea,:he nuJl[]--r i:;f.iiibralicn 51-.p:.equire,1
""0
Ii - Tc, be a,:liri,/nleni lo :hr Irri{ n]unr r.i"rte tn ha cd,irl,t-:,1 arr at li,|rgnii it 5.rl!, fiJll
i,ri,nf

:-ll::,,:;s
P. a

IOTE:

II ,:r:t:r;r:: !::rr rl),rt :riii ;hrnlj t,: iu ir::$1i

Figure 1

ifi l,i

strarr)iji

Stepped Calibration Elock

4.4.1 Block Material

Selection. The material from which the block is fabricated


shall be of the same product form and material specification as the one being
examined.

4.4.2 Block Quality.

Prior to fabrication of the basic calibration block, the &aterial


shall be completely examined with a straight beam search unit in such
manner that areas contain an indication exceeding the remaining back
reflection shall be excluded fiom the beam paths required to reach the
various calibration refl ectors.

4.4.3 Block

Range of Use. The basic calibration block thickness range shall be as


shown in Figure 1. It is essential that the thickest dimension of the stepped

block (D) is equivalent or larger than the expected thickness of the material
to be examined.

NfiASTER
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA
ULTRASONIC THICKNESS MEASUREMENT
PROCEDURE

DATE

PAGE

20-08-2009

6 of 8

DOC. NO.
ABC-UT-O5OI

REV
0

4.4.4

Surface Finish and Temperature. The surface of the stepped block shall be as
smooth as possible and no loose scale or paint layer is permitted. The
temperature differential between the calibration block and examination
surfaces shall be within 14"C.

4.4.5

Workmanship. The accuracy of each referenced thickness sha.ll be within


+0.025 mm from the thickness specified. This shall be verified by using
manual measuring devices (i.e.: micrometer or other suitable devices) which
are traceable to a national standard. Altematively, block manufacturer
certificate is acceptable if it is traceable to national standard and the accuracy
of the block thicknesses is within +0.025 mm.

5. CALIBRATION
5.

Calibration of Ultrasonic Thickness Measurement System


Prior to performing thickness measurement, find out the minimum and maximum
thickness range of the test object. Select one or series of stepped block to give
various thickness measurements in the range of thickness being qualified. The
equipment must be calibrated to the anticipated range of thickness. Stepped
calibration block meeting the requirement ofPar. 4 ofthis procedure shall be used.

The following system calibration shall be done at the start and finish of each
examination or series of similar examinations, every 4 hours during the examination,
and when different examination systems are to be used (change in search unit, batery
change, couplant change, etc.). These checks are not necessary to be recorded and
maintained on frle. If during any check it is determined that the system has deviated
more than the values permitted, the entire parts that have been examined since the
last valid calibration shall be reexamined.

(1) Select one reference thickness that is nearest and below the thinnest material
thickness anticipated during examination.

(2) Select one reference thickness that is nearest and above the thickest material
thickness anticipated during examination.
(3) Couple the search unit to this thickest section of the stepped block. Calibrate the
equiment to display the actual thickness of the block.
(4) Couple the search unit to this thinnest section ofthe stepped block. Calibrate the
equiment to display the actual thickness ofthe block.
(5) The accuracy of systems shall be +0.2 mm or 17o of the indicated reading,
whichever is the greater.

MASTER
PT. AKURABINACITRA

DATE

PAGE

20-08-2009

7 of 8

ULTRASONIC THICKNESS MEASUREMENT


PROCEDURE

5.2

Calibration of Infrared Thermometer


Infrared thermometer shall be calibrated at least once a year or whenever the meter has
gone through major repair by a reputable agency/laboratory. If meters have not been in
used for one year or more, calibration shall be done before being used. At the
minimum, the last calibration certificate from the one that is presently applicable shall
be maintained on file,

6. EXAMINATION

PROCEDURE,

6.1

Examination Surface Preparatron


UT thickness measurement shall be conducted on unpainted surface only. Perform light
mechanical brushing to eliminate any scale, oxide and rust to a degree that the shiny
metal surfaces are visible.

6.2

Surface Temperature
Prior to performing calibration and measurement, perform temperature measurement to
determine suitable search unit and couplant. Temperature measurement may be
performed using a calibrated Infrared thermometer (having measurement range of at
least OoC - 200"C). If the test object can be touched by bare hand for at least 30 second
continuously, it is not necessary to measure temperaftre by thermometer.

6.3

Search Unit's Placement during Measwement


The profile of the sound beam from twin crystal probes is wide when viewed normal

to the crosstalk barrier and narrow when viewed parallel to the crosstalk barrier.
Because the orientation of a beam can be altered by the sloping side of a pit, it is
required that the search unit be turned 90" at the test point. This will enable two
measurements to be made; record the lower reading (see Figure 2).

6.4

Special Precautions on High Temperature Parts

Above 60'C, thickness measurements require special considerations.

These

considerations fall into three groups:

(a) Change in velocity of the acoustic transmission. Changes in velocity occur in the
material being measured and in the probe or probe delay line. To give highest
accuracy, always calibrate the examination system on calibration block(s) meeting
the requirements ofPar. Par. 5.1 ofthis procedure.

(b) Protection of the probe crystal. Changes in velocity due to the heating of the
search unit cannot be predicted accurately. Therefore it is essential for the search
unit not to be allowed to become overheated. This is achieved by reskicting
contact time to maximum 5 seconds and then let it cools off in ambient
temperature for at least 30 seconds.

VI
PT. AKURA BINA CITRA
ULTRASONIC THICKNESS MEASI-IREMENT
PROCEDURE

ASTER

DATE

PAGE

20-08-2009

8 of 8

DOC. NO.
ABC-UT-OsOI

REV
0

(c) Couplant. Always use couplants which are made for temperature within the range
that

will

be used in the examination.

ihrough

Figure

7.

9Oo

Corrosim pil rn onderside ol test piec

Search Unit Placements During Measurement

RECORDING OF' THICKNESS MEASUREMENTS


Thickness measurement reading shall be recorded on an appropriate report form. The part
examined detailed information (i.e.: line number, type of material, surface condition, etc.)
and sketch of point of measurement shall accompany report. Format of the report form
shall be as agreed between Akura and its customer.

&/gASTffiR
DATE

PT. AKI]RA BINA CITRA


QUAIIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION OF
PERSONNEL PERFORMING INSPECTION OF
APr RPTai-2 / rSO t0407

0t -06 -2012

PAGE
1 of 6

DOC.NO.

REV

ABC-WP.O2

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION OF PERSONNEL


PERFORMING INSPECTION OF API RP7G.2/ISO TO4O7
DOCUMENT NO. : ABC

NAMI]

ANDI SETYO

POSITION

WP - 02

APPROVED BY

REVIEWED BY

PREPARED BY

NAME

NAME

ARIANI WIDIAWATI

POSI'I'ION

OPERATIONS MANAGER

QA MANAGER

BONNIE F. AMRIL

ASNT _

NDT

LEVEL

III

lr'',

"r""*u",

,/k

D^rE

//

01 06

2ot2

DATE

Ol

-06-2012

DATE'

:ol o6

2012

PT. AI(JRA BINA CITRA


QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION OF
PERSONNEL PERFORMING INSPECTION OF
API RPTG-2 / ISO I 04{)7

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CONTENT

SECTION

PAGE

REFERENCES

ADMINISTRATIVE RESPONSIBILITIES

PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND REQUIREMENT

TRAINING

EXAMINATION

EDUCATION AND EXPERIENCE

RE.QUALIFICATION

DOCUMENTATION

..............................

PROGRAM................

............

3-4

4-5

5-6

PT. AKURA BINA CITRA

DATE

01 06

2012

QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION OF


PERSONNEL PERF'ORMING INSPECT}ON OF
API RPTG-2 / ISO IMO?

I.

SCOPE

l.l

.2

This procedure is established for the control and administration of NDE personnel
education, training, experience and qualification of personnel who performing
inspection for drill stem elements under API RPTG-2

This procedure is not intended to replace ABC-W?_0I as written practice. The


requirements of this procedure are additional to the Written practice ABC-Wp-01 for
application ofpersonnel who performs inspection under API RPTG-2

2.

REFERENCES

API RP 7G-2, Recommended Practice for Inspection and Classification of


Drill Stem Elements, I't Edition August 2009, Section 7
2.2 ASNT Recommended Practice No.: SNT-TC-IA 201 I Edition

3.

2.1

Used

2.3

Akura Written Practice for NDT Personnel Qualification and Certification Doc. No.:
ABC-WP-01 latest revision.

ADMINISTRATIVERESPONSIBILITIES

In the

project execution, Operations Manager has overall responsibilities for the


implementation of the applicable requirements of this procedure. It is Company,s
responsibility to assure that only those personnel within the respective departrnents who
meet the requirements of this guide are permitted to perform inspection, examination, and
testing activities covered by this guide that verifz conformance to quality requirements.

3.1

Field Service (FS) Department


is the responsibility ofFS Manager using authorized personnel that conform to the
requirements ofthis guide prior execution ofdrill stem element under ApI RPTG-2.
Quality Assurance Department
Inspectors shall have, or be given appropriate training or orientation to develop their
competence for performing required inspections by eA Manager also shall review
inspection performance to their understanding ofAPI RPTG-2.
Administration Deparhnent
Records of personnel qualification shall be maintained by the Administration
Collection, storage, and control of records required by this guide shall be in
accordance with Akura's Quality Management Manual

It

3.2

3.3

4.

PERSOI\TIEL QUALTFICATION REQUIRI,MENT

The requirements contained within this section define the minimum capabilities that

NflASTET}L\
PT. AKURA BINA CMRA

DATE

PACE

0t-06-2012

4of6

QUALIFICATION AND CERNFICATION OF'


PERSONNEL PERFORMING INSPECTION OF

API RPTG-2 / ISO

O4O7

qualiry personnel to perform inspections, examinations, and tests which are within API
RPTG-2.
4.1

Qualification Responsibility and Requirement


Inspector's responsibilities and requirements is identified on the latest "Minimum
Requirement and Job Description" that issued by Administration Department.

4.2

NDT

Personnel Certification

To be considered as qualified personnel, a candidate shall sadsry the ABC-WP-01 that


meet ASNT SNT TC I A latest edition for the applicable NDE methods.

TRAINING PROGRAM
Training or indoctrination may be given by company or by an outside agency.

5.1

Indoctrination
Previsions shall be made for the indoctrination of personnel as to the technical
objectives ofthe applicable section API RPTG-2 that are to be used, and the quality
assurance elements that are to be employed

5.2

Training

(1) Principles ofeach applicable method


(2) Procedures for each applicable inspection method, including standardization and
operation of inspection equipment
(3) Relevant section ofthe applicable standard.

6.

EXAMINATIONS

6.1

VisionExaminations
Vision Examinations shall be administered by Akura's NDE Level IIL Only the NDE
Level III Ophthalmologist or medical doctor shall conduct the examination. Vision
examination result shall be recorded as required by ABC-WP-0l.

a.

A Near-Vision Acuity Examination shall be conducted upon initial certification and


annually thereafter to ensure natuml or conected neardistance acuity in at least one

eye to the extent that the applicant is capable of reading a minimum of Jaeger
Number 2 or equivalent type and size letter at a distance ofnot less than 12" on a
Standard Jaeger Test Chart. Successful completion ofthe examination is mandatory
for individual seeking certification in MT, PT, UT, RT methods.

Note: Other equivalent tests such as the ability to perceive a Titmus number 8

NflASTT]0,]R
PT. AI(URA BINA CITRA
QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION OF
PERSONNEL PERFORMTNG INSPECTION OF

APr RPTG-2 /rSO 10407

targe! a Snellen frrction 20/25 (0.8), or vision examination with optical apparatus
administered by a qualified medical practitioner are also acceptable with approval
ofthe above personnel.

Color Contrast Differentiation Examination shall be conducted upon initial


certification and at five-year intervals thereafter using an Ishihara Test Plates to the
extent that the candidate is capable of differentiating color contrast with minimum
of 14 plates liom the 24 plates available. Successful completion ofthe examination
is mandatory only for individual seeking certification in MT, PT, UT methods.

For personnel that fail to meet the requirement of 8.1.b above, the NDE Level III
must perform additional examinations on test specimen that demonstrate that the
candidate can differentiate between the colors to be used in the applicable NDE
technique. This variation shall be documented in addition to Exhibit A and shall
obtain the NDE Level III approval.
Shades of Gray shall be conducted upon initial certification and at five-year
intervals thereafter using Shades of Gray Test Plates (see Fig. l) to the extent that
the candidate is capable of distinguishing the numbers in the shaded areas with
minimum of 20 plates fiom the 25 plates available. Successful completion of the

examination is mandatory for individual seeking certification

in MT and RT

methods.

6.2

Inspection personnel shall have successfully completed

a.

Written examination addressing the general and specific principles

b.

applicable inspection methods


Hands-on or operating examination

of

the

7. EDUCATIONANDDPERIENCE
t.t

Level I
Shall have high school transcript as minimum

(l)

(2) Two years of related experience in equivalent inspection, examination, or

(3)
7.2

Level
(I

(2)
(3)

testing activities for drill stem elements


Meet requirements ABC - WP - 0l latest edition

II
Shall have high school transcript and at least Two years of related experience
in equivalent inspection, examination, or testing activities for drill stem
elements
Shall have diploma transcript and one year ofrelated experience in equivalent
inspection, examination, or testing activities for drill stem elements
Meet requirements ABC - W? - 0l latest edition

PAGE

PT. AI(URA BINA CITRA

of6

QUALIFTCATION AND CERTIFICATION OF


PERSONNEL PERFORMINC INSPECTION OF
API RPTG-2 / ISO IO4O7

7.3

8.

Level III
As specified in ABC

WP

- 0l

latest edition.

RE.QUALIFICATION
Re-qualification is required at least every five years for all personnel. Re-qualification
shall be by evidence of continued satisfactory performance or redetermination of
capability in accordance ABC - WP - 0l latest edition.

The job performance of inspection, examination, and testing personnel shall be reevaluated at yearly intervals.
during this evaluation or at any other time, it is determined by the responsible
organization that the capabilities of an individual are not in accordance with the
qualifications specified for the job, that person shall be removed from that activity until
such time as the required capability has been demonstrated.

If,

Any person who has not performed inspection, examination, and testing activities in his
qualified area for a period of one year shall be re-evaluated by a redetermination of
required capability accordance ABC

9.

WP

01.

DOCUMENTATION
Record retention and documentation shall be required for all qualification programmes.
shal include:

9.1
9.2
9.3

Records of all qualified personnel showing training


and experiences

It

programme completion

Examination results, which shall be maintained by the agency and made


available for review upon request
Record for each qualified individual

All qualification

and related document shall be approved by the authorized personnel. The


retention period shall be 5 (five) years.

Page 1 of 2

Akura Bina Citra

From: BrianEdens[brian@oem-usa.com]
Sent: 04 Agustus 2010 8:55
To: Akura Bina Citra'
Subiect: DS-1 lnfo & Check Cal tunction
Dear Ariani,

Use the INSPECT MODE CHECK CALIBRATION function on the OPTIONS menu to see the kicks
(one per shoe channel). Signal to noise ratio can be seen when running the unit in the inspect mode to

see actual noise levels vs. the hole kicks. Manufacturer design supersedes any industry specifcation
for how to achieve the output results.

2.

You mention that DS-1 says "the standard 14qy have one hole for each ....arranged in a spiral". The
word 'may" means it is not mandatory to have a spiral pattern. Manufacturer design supersedes any
industry specification. The reason we put the holes in the center is to avoid end area influence on the
calibration results, which provides a better quality inspection. Sometimes the holes closest to the ends
of the reference standard can be influenced b,y the end area effect which causes the calibration for
those holes to be inaccurate (gains set too low).

Unfortunately, none ofthe industry specs are as up to date as the current EMI methods in the industry. DSI
is mostly a copy ofthe old EXXON spec from many, many years ago, as noted in the front ofthe book. OEM
has used a dual circle hole pattern in the center of the standard since 1 994. The need for a spiral hole pattern
was so OLD EMI units with paper chart decks could display the kicks separated by some physical distance on
the chart. The latest digitalsysterns have the ability to capture the peak hole signal from every shoe channel
as the buggy runs down the standard.

ASNT Level 3 certifcation does not mean the individual is all knowing about EMI or even qualifled to evaluate
the operation of any EMI unit. There is NO ASNT certification for EMl, only for NDE methods like UT, MPI
etc. These certifications are for the application of those testing methods to use for inspection purposes, not
for the design and applicaiion of EMI inspection equipment. There is also NO ASNT certifcation for the
application of the OS-1 speciication.

F<aei

ALd3.A.:

Brran Edens
ts-S- .E. D.Iect.rica.1 Rnqtneextnq
-'IP Engi-neertncS / TechnicaT gale9
oj"if i.eld Equipiflent Mark*l:.inrJ, Ine.
4'7 7! Dadqe *LteeL

REVIEWED:

San

DATE i

AnLcnia/ 'f ezae

78217

'tel, 2l1j-651 -160'1


r ai"i 214-65"1-2664

SIGN : ./-,

Al bl

eD\D

''BETTEF PF'DUCTS B'1 Lf,SIGN, ''


C:eLebret-Lrrtt 3, 'lears I
From: Akura Bina Citra Imailto:akura@cbn.net.id]
Sent: Tuesday, August 03, 2010 5:29 AM
To: brian@oem-usa.com; wade@oem-usa.com
Subjectr NEED ADVICE
Dear Mr. Edens,
We are now making EMI procedures that shall be approved by ASNT NDE Level lll.
Please advice the following:

Page 2 of 2

l.

How to appear 8 pulses that different location on the screen when we are running the buggy on
reference pipe (not on the drill pipe) in 'lnspection Mode' program? Our NDE Level lll said it should
appear I pulses. Because we need to identiry the minimum signal to noise ration 3:1 as per TH Hill DS1 and API RPTG-2:2009

2.

On DS-1 mentioned "the standard (rneans reference pipe) may have one hole for each detector with
the holes arranged in a spiral pattern'. On reference pipe manufactured by OEM, the holes is not in
spiral pattern.

Thank you for your assistance.


Regards,
Ariani Wdiawati
No virus found in this incoming message.
Checked by AVG - www.avg.com
Version: 9.0.851 / Virus Database: 271.1.113046 - Release Date: 08lO2l1O 12:59:00

Page 1 of3

Ariani Widiawati

From:
To:
Cc:
Sent:

Subject:

"shahib_sjati"<shahib_sjati@cbn.net.id>
"'ArianiWdiawati"'<a_widiawati@cbn.net.id>
"'bonnie fajrie"' <bonnie_fajrie@yahoo.com>
16 Nopember 2009 14:53
RE: Emailing: MT procedure for Coil Magnetization 0201-1, MT procedure Yoke-dry method 0202,
MT procedure Yoke-visible color contrast 0204

Bu At,
Soal harga, saya ptopose 9

it untuk ke-7 procedure nya. Please kindly consider and accept the proposal.

$slain ltu supaya menghilangkan ambiguitas dalam prosedur-prosedumya, tolong dilengkapi bagpn-bzgSart
mana srja, ymg z"kan digunakan untuk masing2 teknik MT nya.

1.

2.
3.
4.

\X/hite Contrast Wet Non-fluotescent Structual Welds (digunakan untuk pemerihsaan lasan
pacla steel sffuctures). Code yang digunakan Ar07S D1.1.
Yoke - White Cofltrast Wet Non-fluotescent Tubular (nah vang ini digunakan untuk dibagizn
mananra DP?). Code vang digunakan DS-1, RPTG-2 dan NS-2.
Yoke - Dry Powdet (selairl untuk SIip/Upset dan lilevator groove, dmana lagi digunakannr.-a?). Code
yang digunakan DS-1, RPTG-2 dan NS-2.
Yoke - Fluotescent lUet (ini drgunakan unruk mananla DP?). Untuk standatd yang digunakan RPTG-

Yoke

2.

5.
6.

H'S7DC Coil - Continuous Wet Fluorescent (sclain untuk connecdon, dmana lagi di.qunakannr-a?).
Untuk standard yang digunakan DS-1.
HWDC Coil - Residual Wet Fluorescent (digunakan untuk Dlll pipe tubc bodies, T'ool joint Oi) dan
(ionnections). Untuk standatd yang digr.rnakan NS-2, RI,7G-2, dan DS-1 (DS 1 tetap dimasuklial
karena ada l)ar. 3.30 DS-1 memperbolehkan menggunakar.r teknik tesidual iika customer menganlg2p
udak praktis menggunakan continr>us mcthod).
Ma,gr,ei'c Flux Leakage - EMI 1 (drill pipc full bodr', upset to upset). Untuk sta:edard yang digunakan
DS-1 dan RPTG-2 (baik 1)S 1 dan RPTCI 2 n.renggunakan through holc diametcr 1.5 mrn).

Info tentang aplikasinya di bagian

m^rt^-trtaLtTa zja zkar.t saLrtgat membantu Bu. Saya tunggu kabamya ya.

Regards,

Bonnie F Amril

-----Original Message----From: Ariani Widiawati [mailto: a_widiawatiGcbn.

net, id]
Sent: 14 Nopember 2009 9225
To: shahib_sj ati
Subject: Re: Emailing: MT procedure for Coil Magnetization A20l-7, MT procedure
Yoke-dry method 0202. MT procedure Yoke-visible co]or contrast 0204
Saya

pikir pak Bonnie lagi

Berarti Prosedur

MT yang

nggak

disini.

dibuat:

1. MT Yoke + White Contrast for Structure


2. MT Yoke + White Contrast for Turbular untuk
3. MT Yoke + Dry Powder untuk DS1 dan RPTG

DS-1 dan

RPTG

22/06120t0

LO

d)o
o0
Eol
Ar
E

-it:
siirc
> .a
=eo

o
o

iiNts_q
or4 .; c!

.o:6

<5

r s
CI

i!l
o.)

It

(IJ

(,o

o
c

.e

,e

0)

o
3
o

.E

E
.o
F
tu
ro

OJ

o.

c
(9

tr

3
o

OJ

o;

58
ZC

=
.q
c

c
a)
F
(IJ

Io
=
IL
q)

;CJ

to

(,)

.9'

.c,

(,

c
(1)

F
q)

oE
o)
G'

o
5

irE
9o

F
(J

o.

E2

=>

s3 XcI
r!

OJ

o1

qJ
C)

o
=

B
a
'jjET?
o
cu)o- 5
o.)
oc n
r(9
-to
(J

-a)

.F

o N
o
a- a\
o
o- N
ol' o +6 FQ FJ
=j

o
c

o-

zo o
N
o

o
o

{,

to

0
E

^>
o

o,

OJ

-o.

o.

o
I

(J
F
(J

o
OJ

ob

o,

i=

a4

o
c
o
!

o
E
o

E !
C'I 5
o o

q,

o,

b E6PU

b3
6Pi,
LO

l,

ID

o
o
q
o
o
o
+
d.
o

E?

-9
uJ

\l\

o
Lt_

u-

.>
.c

(9

F
(J

c
o)

(u

(J

#e
oL)

u--

co

=
.g

c
d)

gE

-cc
,'i,

PU =3
orI

::69

o,

=E
'; !2
or

o,)

d.

c)

oo
-g
-o

=
.9
lo

0
.>

(>

(o

EJ

(J

ao

ao

(J

rO

F\

?c
t> F.

o-

o.

a
(u

o
.E

Ec
lo
c
o

o)

q,

o.)

oc
lo

(l,

o.

or
C

ad

iE

o(, u-o

o., x 9",
5(I)
ni
..4 EA

95 9H
6'E o- al-

,5

'6E

ao

iD

zo

co

n
tt

F
CL

to

c)

.ll

q,

d)

Or

e.

o
o

o
o

p
o
o
o
q
o
ul

-qe

d.

(g

-g
-o
'6

N
o
N

a.J

o
z
o
o

T'

.g

-c

l!

c
o

-c

-q
-o

co
o
c

ID

.s'
c

nr,\o

-c

do
o^L

q.,

(I)

Lr

PA5
.- 6 'rl

c,

OJ

9oo
o.
oo
oo^
qd>

E
o<
o99

9c g
co
q6
(J! o

co

It':

.}o
-o
E
o
(J

o
N^

lI
E
(,o

-o
lg

q).9
o)d

o
E
o

o
o
N

NOC
--460
oH=ci
}fd;N

EFI Pm n,9

l!

=.E
o=E

o(l)

o.

'tP<

o-

c
o)
c
f

c
o

.c

F
t!

=
F
f

o)

IL

:J
l
_o.'o

oE

oc')

E(fr

Eb

'EO 'p

o*g

o
o
or: o

g
IEE
.J;

al

o
to

b
(J
ao

o
o
F
(J
ao

o
o
F
l

(J

d)

KUITANSI
Official Receipt

SrLda[terima

dari :

PT. Akura Bioa Citra

Rccciretl lrom

I Jn! scb(lar
lhr \um (|l
tlnl.uk Pcllltuq]lu"D

Empatjuta rupiah

- Penlbuatan dan approval


- Pe buatan dan approval

- Petnbuatan dan apPro\al

Rp

(satu) NDE Proccdurc no.:


(satu) NDF: Proccdurc no.:
(satu) NDU Procedure no.:

AIJC l'f

0l0l Rc\.0

ABC Pl 03{)2 Rc\. l)


AB( - P'l 0l0l l{ct ll

4,000.000.Jakana-

:8

Seplenrber 1009

Ditransfrr BCA crb. Bcndsngrn Ililir


x/n- Hj. Ir. AInril Moenir
.t01.J00.J.180

llonnie Fairie Amril


NDE Lc\cl

NPWP

24.680.112.0-{88.000

BONNIE FA.|RIE AI'RIL


JL.MANGGAR ll BLl(AtrVl4 RT-005rc07
PONDOX KELAPA
DUREN SAWT

iAi(ARiA

liiriiR

rci-

TEfiDAF

AR:

0&11-Zr0
00E

lll